Physics DPPs

Preface
This DPP File is a compilation of useful model questions based on past year trends in JEE
and various other competitive examinations. This would be a must resource for serious
aspirants during their last days of JEE preparation along with Past Year Archives provided
by CONCEPTREE Learning.
We wish all the students a very best in their JEE preparation.
Index
DPP File- Physics
XI Standard
S.NO Topics Page No
1 DPPs- Physics 001-159
2 Answer Key- Physics 160-165

PHYSICS Total Marks : 32
DPP No. 1 Max. Time : 32 min.
Topics : Kinetic Theory of Gases and Thermodynamics, Motion in Two Dimensions, Newton’s Law of
Motion, Sound Wave, Projectile Motion,Simple Harmonic Motion
Type of Questions M.M., Min.
Single choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.1 to Q.5 (3 marks, 3 min.) [15, 15]
Multiple choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.6 to Q.7 (4 marks, 4 min.) [8, 8]
Comprehension ('–1' negative marking) Q.8 to Q.10 (3 marks, 3 min.) [9, 9]
p
1. One mole of an ideal gas at a temperature T 1 expands slowly according to the law = constant. Its
V
final temperature is T 2. The work done by the gas is
R 2R
(A) R(T2  T1) (B) 2R(T2  T1) (C) (T  T1) (D) (T2  T1)
2 2 3
2. A particle moves along the parabolic path y = ax 2 in such a way that the y-component of the velocity
remains constant, say c. The x and y coordinates are in meters. Then acceleration of the particle at
x = 1 m is
c2 c
(A) ac k̂ (B) 2ac 2 ĵ (C)  2
î (D)  î
4a 2a
3. A bead of mass m is attached to one end of a spring of natural length R and spring constant
( 3  1) mg
k= . The other end of the spring is fixed at point A on a smooth vertical ring of radius R as
R
shown in figure. The normal reaction at B just after it is released to move is
mg 3 3 mg
(A) (B) 3 mg (C) 3 3 mg (D)
2 2
4. A sounding body emitting a frequency of 150 Hz is dropped from a height. During its fall under gravity it
crosses a balloon moving upwards with a constant velocity of 2m/s one second after it started to fall. The
difference in the frequency observed by the man in balloon just before and just after crossing the body will be:
(given that -velocity of sound = 300m/s; g = 10m/s2)
(A) 12 (B) 6 (C) 8 (D) 4
5. A particle is projected at angle 60º with speed 10 3 , from the point ' A ' as
shown in the fig. At the same time the wedge is made to move with speed
10 3 towards right as shown in the figure. Then the time after which particle
will strike with wedge is (g = 10 m/sec 2) :
4
(A) 2 sec (B) 2 3 sec (C) sec (D) none of these
3
DPPS FILE # 1
A
6. A particle performing S.H.M. undergoes displacement of (where A = amplitude of S.H.M.) in one second.
2
At t = 0 the particle was located at either extreme position or mean position. The time period of S.H.M. can
be : (consider all possible cases)
(A) 12s (B) 2.4 (C) 6s (D) 1.2s
7. In the figure shown all the surface are smooth. All the blocks A, B and C are movable, x-axis is horizontal and
y-axis vertical as shown. Just after the system is released from the position as shown.
y
A

B x
C

Horizontal Surface
(A) Acceleration of 'A' relative to ground is in negative y-direction

(B) Acceleration of 'A' relative to B is in positive x-direction
(C) The horizontal acceleration of 'B' relative to ground is in negative x-direction.
(D) The acceleration of 'B' relative to ground along the inclined surface of 'C' is greater than g sin .
COMPREHENSION
A large tank of cross-section area A contains liquid of density . A cylinder of density / 4 and length , and
cross- section area a (a <<A) is kept in equilibrium by applying an external vertically downward force as
shown. The cylinder is just submerged in liquid. At t = 0 the external force is removed instantaneously.
Assume that water level in the tank remains constant.
8. The acceleration of cylinder immediately after the external force is removed is

(A) g (B) 2g (C) 3g (D) zero
9. The speed of the cylinder when it reaches its equlibrium position is

1 3
(A) g (B) g (C) 2g (D) 2 g
2 2
10. After its release at t = 0, the time taken by cylinder to reach its equilibrium position for the first time is
       
(A) 8 g (B) 3 g (C) 4 g (D) 2 g
DPPS FILE # 2
Topics : Kinetic Theory of Gases and Thermodynamics, Simple Harmonic Motion, Circular Motion, Friction,
Work, Power and Energy, String Wave
Comprehension ('–1' negative marking) Q.10 (8 marks, 10 min.) [8, 10]
1. In the figure shown the pressure of the gas in state B is:
63 73 48
(A) P (B) P (C) P (D) none of these
25 0 25 0 25 0
2. Figure shows the kinetic energy K of a simple pendulum versus its angle  from the vertical. The
pendulum bob has mass 0.2 kg. The length of the pendulum is equal to (g = 10 m/s 2).
K(mJ)
15
10
5
(mrad)
-100 0 100
(A) 2.0 m (B) 1.8 m (C) 1.5 m (D) 1.2 m
3. A particle is revolving in a circle increasing its speed uniformly. Which of the following is constant?
(A) centripetal acceleration (B) tangential acceleration
(C) angular acceleration (D) none of these
4. A bead of mass m is located on a parabolic wire with its axis vertical and vertex at the origin as shown in
figure and whose equation is x2 = 4ay. The wire frame is fixed in vertical plane and the bead can slide on it
without friction. The bead is released from the point y = 4a on the wire frame from rest. The tangential
acceleration of the bead when it reaches the position given by y = a is :
g 3g g g
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 2 2 5
DPPS FILE # 3
5. In the shown arrangement if f 1, f 2 and T be the frictional forces on 2 kg block, 3kg block and tension in
the string respectively, then their values are:
(A) 2 N, 6 N, 3.2 N (B) 2 N, 6 N, 0 N

(C) 1 N, 6 N, 2 N (D) data insufficient to calculate the required values.
6. A block is attached with a spring and is moving towards a fixed wall with speed v as shown in figure. As
the spring reaches the wall, it starts compressing. The work done by the spring on the wall during the
process of compression is :
(A) 1/2 mv2 (B) mv2 (C) Kmv (D) zero
COMPREHENSION
Figure shows a clamped metal string of length 30 cm and linear mass density 0.1 kg/m. which is taut
at a tension of 40 N. A small rider (piece of paper) is placed on string at point P as shown. An external
vibrating tuning fork is brought near this string and oscillations of rider are carefully observed.
7. At which of the following frequencies of turning fork, rider will not vibrate at all :
100
(A) Hz (B) 50 Hz (C) 200 Hz (D) None of these
3
8. At which of the following frequencies the point P on string will have maximum oscillation amplitude
among all points on string :
200
3
9. Now if the tension in the string is made 160 N, at which of the following frequencies of turning fork, rider
will not vibrate at all
100
3
10. In each situation of column-I, the x-coordinate of a particle moving along x-axis is given in terms of time t. (
is a positive constant). Match the equation of motion given in column-I with the type of motion given in
column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) sin t – cos t (p) SHM
(B) sin3 t (q) Periodic
(C) sin t + sin3 t + sin5 t (r) Periodic but not SHM
(D) exp (– 2 t2) (s) Non periodic
DPPS FILE # 4
Topics : Simple Harmonic Motion, Circular Motion, Work, Power and Energy, Newton’s Law of Motion,
Kinetic Theory of Gases and Thermodynamics, Sound Waves, Geometrical Optics
Subjective Question ('–1' negative marking) Q.8 (4 marks, 5 min.) [4, 5]
Mathch the following (no negative marking) Q.9 (8 marks, 10 min.) [8, 10]
1. A simple pendulum 50 cm long is suspended from the roof of a cart accelerating in the horizontal
direction with constant acceleration 3 g m/s2. The period of small oscillations of the pendulum about
its equilibrium position is (g = 2 m/s 2) :
(A) 1.0 sec (B) 2 sec (C) 1.53 sec (D) 1.68 sec
2. A smooth wire is bent into a vertical circle of radius a. A bead P can slide smoothly on the wire. The
circle is rotated about vertical diameter AB as axis with a constant speed  as shown in figure. The
bead P is at rest w.r.t. the wire in the position shown. Then 2 is equal to :
2g 2g
(A) (B)
a a 3
g 3 2a
(C) (D)
a g 3
3. The potential energy of a particle varies with x according to the relation U(x) = x 2  4 x. The point
x = 2 is a point of :
(A) stable equilibrium (B) unstable equilibrium
(C) neutral equilibrium (D) none of above
4. Two blocks each of mass m lie on a smooth table. They are attached to two other masses as shown in
the figure. The pulleys and strings are light. An object O is kept at rest on the table. The sides AB and
CD of the two blocks are made reflecting. The acceleration of two images formed in those two reflecting
surfaces w.r.t. each other is :
(A) 5g/6 (B) 5g/3 (C) g/3 (D) 17 g/6
DPPS FILE # 5
5. A cylinder of mass M and radius R is resting on two corner edges A and B as
shown in figure. The normal reaction at the edges A and B are : (Neglect friction)
(A) NA = 2NB (B) NB = 3 N A
Mg 2 3Mg
(C) NA = (D) NB =
2 5
6. An ideal gas undergoes a cyclic process abcda which is shown by P

pressuredensity curve. d
(A) Work done by the gas in the process 'bc' is zero
(B) Work done by the gas in the process 'cd' is negative c
(C) Internal energy of the gas at point 'a' is greater than at state 'c' a
(D) Net work done by the gas in the cycle is negative. b

1 2
7. A car moves towards a hill with speed vc. It blows a horn of frequency f which is heard by an observer following
the car with speed v0. The speed of sound in air is v.
v
(A) the wavelength of sound reaching the hill is
f
v  vc
(B) the wavelength of sound reaching the hill is
f
v  vc
(C) The wavelength of sound of horn directly reaching the observer is
f
2v c v  v o f
(D) the beat frequency observed by the observer is
v 2  v 2c
8. Power delivered to a body varies as P = 3 t2. Find out the change in kinetic energy of the body from
t = 2 to t = 4 sec.
9. Four particles are moving with different velocities in front of stationary plane mirror (lying in y-z plane).
  
At t = 0, velocity of A is v A  î , velocity of B is v B   î  3 ĵ , velocity of C is v C  5 î  6 ĵ , velocity of D
  
is v D  3 î  ĵ . Acceleration of particle A is a A  2 î  ĵ and acceleration of particle C is aC  2 t ĵ . The
particle B and D move with uniform velocity (Assume no collision to take place till t = 2 seconds). All
quantities are in S.I. Units. Relative velocity of image of object A with respect to object A is denoted by

VA , A . Velocity of images relative to corresponding objects are given in column I and their values are
given in column II at t = 2 second. Match column I with corresponding values in column II and indicate
your answer by darkening appropriate bubbles in the 4 × 4 matrix given in OMR.
Column I Column II

(A) VA , A (p) 2 î

(B) VB , B (q)  6 î

(C) V C , C (r)  12 î  4 ĵ

(D) VD , D (s)  10 î
DPPS FILE # 6
Topics : Kinetic Theory of Gases ,Thermodynamics, Projectile Motion, Friction, Geometrical Optics, String
Waves
Single choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.1 to Q.3 (3 marks 3 min.) [9, 9]
Multiple choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.4 (4 marks 4 min.) [4, 4]
Subjective Question ('–1' negative marking) Q.5 (4 marks 5 min.) [4, 5]
Comprehension ('–1' negative marking) Q.6 to Q.8 (3 marks 3 min.) [9, 9]
1. A gas undergoes an adiabatic process and an isothermal process. The two processes are plotted on a
P-V diagram. The resulting curves intersect at a point P. Tangents are drawn to the two curves at P.
These make angles of 135º & 121º with the positive V-axis. If tan 59º = 5/3, the gas is likely to be:
(A) monoatomic (B) diatomic

(C) triatomic (D) a mixture of monoatomic & diatomic gases
2. A particle is projected from a point P (2, 0, 0)m with a velocity 10 m/s making an angle 45º with the
horizontal. The plane of projectile motion passes through a horizontal line PQ which makes an angle of
37º with positive x-axis, xy plane is horizontal. The coordinates of the point where the particle will
strike the line PQ is: (Take g = 10 m/s 2)
(A) (10, 6, 0)m (B) (8, 6, 0)m (C) (10, 8, 0)m (D) (6, 10, 0)m
3. A ray of light is incident at an of 30º on a plane mirror M1. Another plane mirror M2 is inclined at angle
 to M1. What is the value of angle  so that light reflected from M2 is parallel to M1.
(A) 60º (B) 75º (C) 67.5º (D) none of these
4. A variable force F = 10 t is applied to block B placed on a smooth surface. The coefficient of friction between
A & B is 0.5. (t is time in seconds. Initial velocities are zero, A is always on B)
(A) block A starts sliding on B at t = 5 seconds

(B) the heat produced due to friction in first 5 seconds is 312.5J
(C) the heat produced due to friction in first 5 seconds is (625/8) J
(D) acceleration of A at 10 seconds is 5 m/s2.
DPPS FILE # 7
5. A point source S is centered in front of a 70 cm wide plane mirror. A man starts walking from the source along
a line parallel to the mirror in a single direction. Maximum distance that can be walked by man without losing
sight of the image of the source is _____.
COMPREHENSION
A sinusoidal wave is propagating in negative x–direction in a string stretched along x-axis. A particle of string
at x = 2m is found at its mean position and it is moving in positive y direction at t = 1 sec. If the amplitude
of the wave, the wavelength and the angular frequency of the wave are 0.1meter, /4 meter and 4 rad/sec
respectively.
6. The equation of the wave is

(A) y = 0.1 sin (4t –1)+ 8(x – 2)) (B) y = 0.1 sin (t–1)– (x – 2))
(C) y = 0.1 sin (4t –1)–8(x – 2)) (D) none of these
7. The speed of particle at x = 2 m and t = 1sec is

(A) 0.2 m/s (B) 0.6 m/s
(C) 0.4 m/s (D) 0
8. The instantaneous power transfer through x=2 m and t= 1.125 sec, is

4 2
(A) 10 J/s (B) J/s (C) J/s (D) zero
3 3
DPPS FILE # 8
Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Geometical Optics., Calorimetry, Work, Power and Energy , Fluid Mechanics,
Kinetic Theory of Gases and thermodynamics
Multiple choice objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.3 (4 marks, 4 min.) [4, 4]
Subjective Questions ('–1' negative marking) Q.4 to Q.6 (4 marks, 5 min.) [12, 15]
Match the Following (no negative marking) (2 × 4) Q.10 (8 marks, 10 min.) [8, 10]
1. Moment of inertia of a uniform quarter disc of radius R and mass M about an axis through its centre of
mass and perpendicular to its plane is :
2 2
MR 2  4R  MR 2  4R 
(A) M   (B) M  2 
2  3  2  3  
2 2
MR 2  4R  MR 2  4R 
(C) +M   (D) +M  2 
2  3  2  3  
2. Angle of incidence of the incident ray for which reflected ray intersect perpendiculaly the principal axis.
i
C
(A) 0° (B) 30° (C) 45° (D) 60°

3. Heat is supplied to a certain homogeneous sample of matter at a uniform rate. Its temperature is
plotted against time as shown in the figure. Which of the following conclusions can be drawn? k
(A) its specific heat capacity is greater in the solid state than in the liquid state.
(B) its specific heat capacity is greater in the liquid state than in the solid state.
(C) its latent heat of vaporization is greater than its latent heat of fusion.
(D) its latent heat of vaporization is smaller than its latent heat of fusion.
4. A block of weight W is dragged across the horizontal floor from A to B by the constant vertical force P acting
at the end of the rope. Calculate the work done on the block by the force P = ( 3 + 1)N.Assume that block
does not lift off the floor. (g = 10 m/s2)
DPPS FILE # 9
5. A Plane mirror revolves as shown at constant angular velocity making 2 rps about its normal. With what
velocity will the light spot move along a spherical screen of radius of 10 m if the mirror is at the centre of
curvature of the screen and the light is incident from a fixed direction.
6. A water tank stands on the roof of a building as shown. Find the value of h (in m) for which the horizontal
distance 'x' covered by the water is greatest.
h
1m
3m
COMPREHENSION
A quantity of an ideal monoatomic gas consists of n moles initially at temperature T1. The pressure and
volume are then slowly doubled in such a manner so as to trace out a straight line on a P-V diagram.
W
7. For this process, the ratio is equal to (where W is work done by the gas) :
nRT1
(A) 1.5 (B) 3 (C) 4.5 (D) 6
Q
8. For the same process, the ratio nRT is equal to (where Q is heat supplied to the gas) :
1
(A) 1.5 (B) 3 (C) 4.5 (D) 6
C
9. If C is defined as the average molar specific heat for the process then has value
R
(A) 1.5 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 6
10. Consider a system of particles (it may be rigid or non rigid). In the column- some condition on force
and torque is given. Column- contains the effects on the system. (Letters have usual meaning)
Column-I Column-II
 
(A) Fres  0 (p) Psystem will be constant
 
(B) res  0 (q) L system will be constant
(C) External force is absent (r) total work done by all forces will be zero
(D) No nonconservative force acts. (s) total mechanical energy will be constant.
DPPS FILE # 10
Topics : Centre of Mass, Circular Motion, Geometrical Optics., Kinetic Throry of Gases and Thermodynamics

Subjective Questions ('–1' negative marking) Q.6 (4 marks, 5 min.) [4, 5]
1. If a ball is dropped from rest, it bounces from the floor repeatedly. The coefficient of restitution is 0.5 and the
speed just before the first bounce is 5ms–1. The total time taken by the ball to come to rest finally is :
(A) 1.5s (B) 1s (C) 0.5s (D) 0.25s
2. A section of fixed smooth circular track of radius R in vertical plane is shown in the figure. A block is released
from position A and leaves the track at B. The radius of curvature of its trajectory when it just leaves the track
at B is:
R R
(A) R (B) (C) (D) none of these
4 2
3. A bob is attached to one end of a string other end of which is fixed at peg A. The bob is taken to a
position where string makes an angle of 300 with the horizontal. On the circular path of the bob in
vertical plane there is a peg ‘B’ at a symmetrical position with respect to the position of release as
shown in the figure. If Vc and Va be the minimum tangential velocity in clockwise and anticlockwise
directions respectively, given to the bob in order to hit the peg ‘B’ then ratio Vc : Va is equal to :
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 1 : 4
4. A virtual erect image in a concave mirror is represented, in the above figures, by
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5. A driving mirror on a car is never concave because :

(A) its field of view is too small
(B) the image would be inverted
(C) the image would be virtual and therefore useless for the driver
(D) only a plane mirror forms true images.
DPPS FILE # 11
6. A point object is placed at a distance 20 cm from the focus of a concave mirror of radius of curvature 20 cm.
Find the distance (in cm) of the image from the focus.
COMPREHENSION
A point object is placed on principal axis of a concave mirror ( of focal length 15 cm) at a distance u = 61 cm
from pole. A slab of thickness t = 3 cm and refractive index  = 1.5 is placed with two sides perpendicular to
principal axis, such that its nearest face is x0 cm from pole. The final image of object is to be considered after
refraction by slab, reflection by mirror and final refraction by slab.
f =15cm
object
x0
t=3cm =1.5
7. If x 0 = 30 cm, then the distance of final image from pole is

(A) 19 (B) 21 (C) 23 (D) 24
8. If the slab is shifted parallel to itself by 3 cm then the final image

(A) shifts towards left (B) shifts towards right
(C) may shifts towards left or right (D) does not shift
9. If x0 = 30 cm and the object is given velocity 18 m/s towards left then the speed of image at that instant is
(A) 2 m/s (B) 6 m/s (C) 9 m/s (D) 162 m/s
10. A sample of gas goes from state A to state B in four different manners, as shown by the graphs. Let W
be the work done by the gas and U be change in internal energy along the path AB. Correctly match
the graphs with the statements provided.
V
(A) A B (p) Both W and U are positive
P B
(B) A (q) Both W and U are negative
T A
(C) B (r) W is positive whereas U is negative
V
A
(D) B (s) W is negative whereas U is positive
DPPS FILE # 12
Topics : Simple Harmonic Motion, Friction, Fluid Mechanics, Rigid Body Dynamics, Kinematics, Geometrical
Optics
Subjective Questions ('–1' negative marking) Q.5 to Q.6 (4 marks 5 min.) [8, 10]
1. A particle performs S.H.M. on xaxis with amplitude A and time period T. The time taken by the particle to
travel a distance A/5 starting from rest is:
T T 4 T  1 T  1
(A) (B) 2  cos1   (C) 2  cos1   (D) 2  sin1  
20 5 5 5
3
2. A body of mass 10 kg lies on a rough inclined plane of inclination  = sin1 with the horizontal. When
5
a force of 30 N is applied on the block parallel to & upward the plane, the total reaction by the plane on
the block is nearly along:
(A) OA (B) OB (C) OC (D) OD
3. A large open tank has two small holes in its vertical wall as shown in figure. One is a square hole of side 'L'
at a depth '4y' from the top and the other is a circular hole of radius 'R' at a depth ‘y’ from the top. When the
tank is completely filled with water, the quantities of water flowing out per second from both holes are the
same. Then, 'R' is equal to :
y
2R v1
4y
L v2
L 2 L
(A) (B) 2L (C) .L (D)
2  2
4. A ring of mass m and radius R rolls on a horizontal rough surface without slipping due to an applied
force ‘F’. The friction force acting on ring is : –
F 2F F
(A) (B) (C) (D) Zero
3 3 4
DPPS FILE # 13
5. A particle is projected from the ground level. It just passes through upper ends of vertical poles A, B, C of
height 20 m, 30 m and 20 m respectively. The time taken by the particle to travel from B to C is double of the
time taken from A to B. Find the maximum height attained by the particle from the ground level.
6. A man is standing at the edge of a 1m deep swimming pool, completely filled with a liquid of refractive
index 3 / 2 . The eyes of the man are 3 m above the ground. A coin located at the bottom of the pool
appears to be at an angle of depression of 300 with reference to the eye of man. Then horizontal distance
(represented by x in the figure) of the coin from the eye of the man is ____________ mm.
COMPREHENSION
A block with a concave mirror of radius of curvature 1m attached to one of its sides floats, with exactly half of
its length immersed in water and the other half exposed to air.
Any ray originating from an object O1 and O2 (as shown in figure) floating on the surface of water first gets
reflected by the mirror. This then gets refracted by the water surface if the image formed by reflection is real
(1). If the image is virtual (2), then the reflected ray never encounters the air-water interface and hence there
is no refraction. The image for the next three questions refers to the final image, formed after both the
reflection and refraction (if it occurs at all) has taken place.
7. The final image formed is unique (i.e. only one image is formed) if the point object floats on the surface of
water at a distance x in front of the mirror where
(A) x is less than 50 cm (B) x is less than 1m
(C) x is between 50 cm and 1m (D) for any value of x
8. There is no refraction of light rays reflected from the mirror if the point object floats on the surface of water at
a distance x in front of the mirror where
(A) x is less than 50 cm (B) x is less than 1m
(C) x is between 50 cm and 1m (D) for any value of x
9. The final image is not unique (i.e. more than one image for the same object) if the point object is placed a
distance ‘y’ above the surface of water and a distance x in front of the mirror (rays are not paraxial), where
y = 20 cm and x is :
(A) less than 50 cm (B) less than 1m
(C) between 50 cm and 1m (D) for any value of x
DPPS FILE # 14
Tpoics : Simple Harmonic Motion, Friction, Rigid Body Dynamics, String Waves, Sound Waves, Geometrical
Optics
1. A particle is executing SHM according to the equation x = A cos  t. Average speed of the particle during the

interval 0 t  .
6
3 A 3 A 3A  3A 
(A)
2
(B)
4
(C)

(D)


2 3 
2. A particle of mass 5 kg is moving on rough fixed inclined plane (making an angle 30 ° with horizontal)
with constant velocity of 5 m/s as shown in the figure. Find the friction force acting on a body by the
inclinedplane. ( take g = 10m/s 2)
(A) 25 N (B) 20 N
(C) 30 N (D) none of these
3. A sphere rolls without sliding on a rough inclined plane (only mg and contact forces are acting on the
body). The angular momentum of the body:
(A) about centre is conserved
(B) is conserved about the point of contact
(C) is conserved about a point whose distance from the inclined plane is greater than the
radius of the sphere
(D) is not conserved about any point.
4. A string of length 1.5 m with its two ends clamped is vibrating in fundamental mode. Amplitude at the
centre of the string is 4 mm. Distance between the two points having amplitude 2 mm is:
(A) 1 m (B) 75 cm (C) 60 cm (D) 50 cm
5. The source (S) of sound is moving constant velocity v0 as shown in diagram. An obserever O listens to
the sound emmited by the source. The observed frequency of the sound :
(A) continuously decreases (B) continuously increases

(C) first decreases then increases (D) first increases then decreases.
DPPS FILE # 15
6. A composite slab consisting of different media is placed infront of a concave mirror of radius of curvature 150
cm. The whole arrangement is placed in water. An object O is placed at a distance 20 cm from the slab. The
R.I. of different media are given in the diagram. Find the position of the final image formed by the system.
7. Find out the moment of inertia of the following structure (written as ) about axis AB made of
thin uniform rods of mass per unit length .
COMPREHENSION
All objects referred to the subsequent problems lie on the principle axis.
00
8. If light is incident on surface 1 from left, the image formed after the first refraction is definitely :
(A) Real for a real object (B) Virtual for a real object
(C) Real for a virtual object (D) Virtual for a virtual object
9. In above question if the object is real, then the final image formed after two refractions :
(A) may be real (B) may be virtual (C) must be virtual (D) both A and B
10. If light is incident on surface 2 from right then which of the following is true for image formed after a single
refraction.
(A) Real object will result in a real image (B) Virtual object will result in a virtual image
(C) Real object will result in a virtual image (D) Virtual object will result in a Real image
DPPS FILE # 16
Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Relative Motion, Sound Waves, Geometrical Optics
1. A uniform disk of mass 300kg is rotating freely about a vertical axis through its centre with constant angular
velocity . A boy of mass 30kg starts from the centre and moves along a radius to the edge of the disk. The
angular velocity of the disk now is
0 0 40 5 0
(A) (B) (C) (D)
6 5 5 6
2. A man is holding an umbrella at angle 30° with vertical with lower end towards himself, which is appropriate
angle to protect him from rain for his horizontal velocity 10 m/s. Then which of the following will be true-
(A) rain is falling at angle 30° with vertical, towards the man
(B) rain may be falling at angle 30° with vertical, away from the man
(C) rain is falling vertically
(D) none of these
3. In Resonance tube experiment, if 400 Hz tuning fork is used, the first resonance occurs when length of
air column in the tube is 19 cm. If the 400 Hz. tuning fork is replaced by 1600 Hz tuning fork then to get
resonance, the water level in the tube should be further lowered by (take end correction = 1 cm)
(A) 5 cm (B) 10 cm (C) 15 cm (D) 20 cm
4 A parallel beam of light is incident on a lens of focal length 10 cm. A
parallel slab of refractive index 1.5 and thickness 3 cm is placed on the
other side of the lens. Find the distance of the final image from the
lens.
5. A small object stuck on the surface of a glass sphere (n = 1.5) is viewed from the diametrically opposite
position. Find transverse magnification.
COMPREHENSION
Two bodies A and B of masses 10 kg and 5 kg are placed very slightly
separated as shown in figure. The coefficient of friction between the
floor and the blocks is  = 0.4. Block A is pushed by an external force
F. The value of F can be changed. When the welding between block A
and ground breaks, block A will start pressing block B and when welding
of B also breaks, block B will start pressing the vertical wall –
6. If F = 20 N, with how much force does block A presses the block B
(A) 10 N (B) 20 N (C) 30 N (D) Zero
7. What should be the minimum value of F, so that block B can press the vertical wall
(A) 20 N (B) 40 N (C) 60 N (D) 80 N
8. If F = 50 N, the friction force (shear force) acting between block B and ground will be :
(A) 10 N (B) 20 N (C) 30 N (D) None
9. The force of friction acting on B varies with the applied force F according to curve :
(A) (B) (C) (D)
DPPS FILE # 17
Topics : Sound Waves, Rigid Body Dynamics, Projectile Motion, Geometrical Optics, Simple Harmonic
Motion

Comprehension ('–1' negative marking) Q.8 to Q.10 (3 marks, 3 min.) [9,9]
1. A stationary observer receives sonic oscillations from two tuning forks, one of which approaches and the
other recedes with same speed. As this takes place the observer hears the beat frequency of 2 Hz. Find the
speed of each tuning fork, if their oscillation frequency is 680 Hz and the velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s.
[ Use g = 10 m/s2 ]
(A) 1 m/s (B) 2 m/s (C) 0.5 m/s (D) 1.5 m/s
2. A plank P is placed on a solid cylinder S, which rolls on a horizontal surface. The two are of equal
mass. There is no slipping at any of the surfaces in contact. The ratio of the kinetic energy of P to the
kinetic energy of S is:
(A) 1: 1 (B) 2: 1 (C) 8: 3 (D) 1: 4
3. A stone is projected from ground and hits a smooth vertical wall after 1 sec. and again falls back on the
ground. The time taken by stone to reach the ground after the collision is 3 secs. The maximum height
reached by the same stone if the vertical wall were not to be present is. (g = 10 m/s 2)
(A) 10 m (B) 12.5 m (C) 15 m (D) 20 m
4. A cylinde rical optical fibre (quarter circular shape) of refractive index n = 2 and diameter d = 4mm is surrounded
by air. A light beam is sent into the fibre along its axis as shown in figure. Then the smallest outer radius R
(as shown in figure) for which m
(A) 2mm (B) 4mm (C) 8 mm (D) 6 mm
DPPS FILE # 18
5. A light is incident on face AB of an equilateral glass prism ABC. After refraction at AB, the ray is incident
on face BC at the angle slightly greater than critical angle so that it gets reflected from face BC and
finally emerges out from face AC. Net deviation angle of the ray is 112° anticlockwise. The angle of
incidence 'i' has value :
c
B C
(A) 22° (B) 24° (C) 26° (D) 28°
6. In a compound microscope
(A) the objective has a shorter focal length (B) the objective has a shorter aperture
(C) (A) and (B) (D) the aperture of objective and eyepiece are same.
7. A particle initially at rest experiences a force F = a sin(t) where a and  are positive constants. The
direction of force is always towards positive x-axis. State with reason or explanation or derivation
whether the particle will change its direction of velocity or not.
COMPREHENSION
An extended object of size 2 cm is placed at a distance of d (cm) in medium (refractive index n = 3) from pole,
on the principal axis of a spherical curved surface.The medium on the other side of refracting surface is air
(refractive index n = 1).
n=3 n=1
2cm
ROC =20cm
8. For d = 20 cm, the distance of the image from the pole is

(A) 2 cm (B) 3 cm (C) 4 cm (D) 5 cm
9. For d = 20 cm, The size of image is

1 2 6 3
(A) cm (B) cm (C) cm (D) cm
6 15 5 2
10. For all nonzero and finite values of d (the object is placed to the left of pole as shown), the nature of image
formed always is
(A) Image is real and erect (B) Image is real and inverted
(C) Image is virtual and erect (D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 19
Topics : Geometrical Optics, Fluid, Work, Power and Energy, Center of Mass, Circular Motion, Heat and
Thermodynamics, Rigid Body Dynamics
Multiple choice objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.6 to Q.7 (4 marks, 4 min.) [8, 8]
1. An object moves in front of a fixed plane mirror. The velocity of the image of the object is
(A) Equal in the magnitude and in the direction to that of the object.
(B) Equal in the magnitude and opposite in direction to that of the object.
(C) Equal in the magnitude and the direction will be either same or opposite to that of the object.
(D) Equal in magnitude and makes any angle with that of the object depending on direction of motion of the
object.
2. A point object is moving along principal axis of a concave mirror with uniform velocity towards pole.
Initially the object is at infinite distance from pole on right side of the mirror as shown. Before the
object collides with mirror, the number of times at which the distance between object and its image is
40 cm are.
(A) one time (B) two times (C) three times (D) Data insufficient
3. Three containers of same base area, same height are filled with three different liquids of same mass as
shown in the figure. If F1, F2, F3 are the force exerted by the liquid on the base of the container in case
I, II and III respectively, then we have the relation:
(A) F1 = F2 = F3 (B) F1 > F2 > F3 (C) F3 > F2 > F1 (D) F2 < F3 < F1
4. A particle is projected with a velocity u making an angle  with the horizontal. The instantaneous
power of the gravitational force
(A) varies linearly with time (B) is constant throughout
(C) is negative for complete path (D) None of the above
5. A body of mass 'm' sliding down a movable inclined plane of mass 2 m,

assuming friction is absent everywhere the kinetic energy of 2 m as a
function of time is: (m remains on 2m)
(A) (B) (C) (D) none of these
DPPS FILE # 20
6. A car is moving along a circle with constant speed on an inclined plane as shown in diagram. Then friction
force on car may be in horizontal direction at least at one point :
(A) in portion 'AB' including point A and B

(B) in portion 'BC' including point B and C
(C) in portion 'CD' including point C and D
(D) in portion 'DA' including point D and A
7. In a cyclic process, a gas is taken from state A to B via

path- as shown in the indicator diagram and taken back
to state A from
state B via path-. In the complete cycle :
(A) work is done on the gas.
(B) heat is given to the gas
(C) no work is done by the gas.
(D) nothing can be said about work as data is insufficient
8. In the figure, an object is placed at distance 25 cm from the surface of a convex mirror, and a plane mirror is
set so that the image formed by the two mirrors lie adjacent to each other in the same plane. The plane mirror
is placed at 20 cm from the object. What is the radius of curvature of the convex mirror?
COMPREHENSION
A uniform ring of radius 4 cm placed on a rough horizontal surface is given a sharp impulse as in figure.
As a consequence it acquires a linear velocity of 2 m/s. If coefficient of friction between the ring and the
horizontal surface be 0.4. Then answer the following questions based on given information.
9. The velocity of centre of mass after which the ring will start pure rolling is -
(A) 2 m/s (B) 1 m/s (C) 4 m/s (D) 1/2 m/s
10. The time after which the ring will start pure rolling is -
(A) 1/2 s (B) 1 s (C) 1/4 s (D) 2 s
DPPS FILE # 21
Topics : Geometrical Optics., Rectilinear Motion, String Wave, Projectile Motion, Rigid Body Dynamics,
Heat and Thermodynamics
1. Two plane mirrors are inclined to each other at 90º. A ray of light is incident on one mirror and the
reflected light goes to the other mirror. The ray will undergo a total deviation of :
(A) 180º (B) 90º
(C) 45º (D) cannot be found because angle of incidence is not
given.
2. AB is an incident beam of light and CD is a reflected beam (the number of reflections for this may
be 1 or more than 1) of light. AB & CD are separated by some distance (may be large). It is
possible by placing what type of mirror on the right side.
(A) one plane mirror (B) one concave mirror

(C) one convex mirror (D) none of these
10
3. A particle A of mass kg is moving in the positive direction of x. Its initial position is x = 0 &
7
initial velocity is 1 m/s. The velocity at x = 10 is: (use the graph given)
(A) 4 m/s (B) 2 m/s

(C) 3 2 m/s (D) 100/3 m/s
4. Two wave functions in a medium along x direction are given by -

1 1
y1  m y2   m
2  ( 2 x  3 t )2 2  ( 2 x  3 t  6 )2
where x is in metres and t is in seconds
(A) There is no position at which resultant displacement will be zero at all times.
(B) There is no time at which resultant displacement will be zero everywhere.
(C) Both waves travel along the same direction.
(D) Both waves travel in opposite directions.
DPPS FILE # 22
5. A bullet is fired with speed 50 m/s at 45° angle find the height of the bullet when its direction of motion makes
angle 30° with the horizontal.
6. A thin uniform rod AB of mass ‘m’ translates with an acceleration ‘a’,

when two anti parallel forces F1 and F2 act on it as shown in figure. If
the distance between F1 and F2 is ‘b’, the length of the bar is _______.
7. In the figure shown M1 and M2 are two spherical mirrors of focal length 20 cm each. AB and CD are their
principal axes respectively which are separated by 1 cm. PQ is an object of height 2 cm and kept at
distance 30 cm from M1. The separation between the mirrors is 50 cm. Consider two successive
reflections first on M1 then on M2. Find the size of the 2nd image. Also find distances of end points P
and Q of that image from the line AB.
COMPREHENSION
One mole of an ideal monatomic gas undergoes a linear process from A to B, in which is pressure P
and its volume V change as shown in figure
8. The absolute temperature T versus volume V for the given process is
(A) (B) (C) (D)
9. The maximum temperature of the gas during this process is

P0 V0 P0 V0 3 P0 V0 3 P0 V0
(A) 2 R (B) 4 R (C) 4R (D) 2R
10. As the volume of the gas is increased, in some range of volume the gas expands with absorbing the heat
(the endothermic process) ; in the other range the gas emits the heat (the exothermic process). Then the
volume after which if the volume of gas is further increased the given process switches from endothermic to
exothermic is
2V0 3 V0 5 V0
8 8 8
DPPS FILE # 23
Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Geometrical Optics, Simple Harmonic Motion, Center of Mass
1. A car is initially at rest, 330 m away from a stationary observer. It begins to move towards the observer
with an acceleration of 1.1 m/s 2, sounding its horn continuously. 20 second later, the driver stops
sounding the horn. The velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s. The observer will hear the sound of the horn
for a duration of:
(A) 20 sec (B) 21 sec (C) 62/3 sec (D) 58/3 sec
2. A point moves in a straight line under the retardation a v2 , where ‘a’ is a positive constant and v is
speed. If the initial speed is u , the distance covered in ' t ' seconds is :
1 1
(A) a u t (B) ln (a u t) (C) ln (1 + a u t) (D) a ln (a u t)
a a
3. A ring of radius R lies in vertical plane. A bead of mass ‘m’ can move along the ring without friction. Initially the
bead is at rest at the bottom most point on ring. The minimum constant horizontal speed v with which the ring
must be pulled such that the bead completes the vertical circle
(A) 3gR (B) 4gR (C) 5gR (D) 5 . 5 gR
4. Minimum number of prisms required to make a combination which is 'Achromatic' as well as 'Direct
Vision' is:
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 11
5. As shown in figure, S is a point on a uniform disc rolling with uniform angular velocity on a fixed rough
horizontal surface. The only forces acting on the disc are its weight and contact forces exerted by
horizontal surface. Which graph best represents the magnitude of the acceleration of point S as a
function of time
(A) (B) (C) (D)
DPPS FILE # 24
6. Consider a uniform disc of mass ‘m’ performing pure rolling with velocity ‘v’ on a fixed rough surface
3
(A) Kinetic energy of upper half will be mv2
8
3
(B) Kinetic energy of upper half will be less than mv2
8
3
(C) Kinetic energy of upper half will be more than mv2
8
3
(D) Kinetic energy of upper half will be more than mv2
4
7. A block of mass m = 1 kg is placed on a smooth surface and is connected with a spring of spring
constant k = 100 N/m and another end of spring is connected to a fixed wall as shown. The block is
pulled by a distance A = 0.10 m from its natural length and released at t = 0.
 
(A) The maximum speed is after t = s. (B) Time taken to cover first 0.10 m, t = s.
20 20
 
(C) Time taken to cover first 0.05 m, t = s. (D) Time taken to cover first 0.05 m, t = s.
40 30
8. A block of mass m 1 = 2 kg slides on a frictionless table with speed of 10 m/s. In front of it, another
block of mass m 2 = 5 kg is moving with speed 3 m/s in the same direction. A massless spring of spring
constant k = 1120 N/m is attached on the backside of m 2 as shown. Find the maximum compression
of the spring in cm when the block of mass m 1 in contect with spring. (Take g = 10 m/s 2)
COMPREHENSION
Magnification (by a lens) of an object at distance 10 cm from it is – 2. Now a second lens is placed exactly
at the same position where first was kept and first lens is removed. The magnification by this lens is – 3.
9. Find position of image formed by combination of both in contact. (relative to combination) :
60 60 60 60
(A) cm (B) cm (C) cm (D) cm
9 11 13 17
10. What is the focal length of the combination when both lenses are in contact :
60 5 12 13
(A) cm (B) cm (C) (D) cm
17 17 7 9
11. When both the lenses are kept in contact at the same place, what will be the new magnification :
13 12 6 5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 7 11 7
DPPS FILE # 25
Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Geometrical Optics, Simple Harmonic Motion, Work, Power and
Energy , Electrostatics, Fluid
1. A circular platform is mounted on a frictionless vertical axle. Its radius R = 2m and its moment of inertia about
the axle is 200 kgm2. it is initially at rest. A 50 kg man stands on the edge of the platform and begins to walk
along the edge at the speed of 1ms–1 relative to the ground. Time taken by the man to complete one
revolution with respect to disc is :
3 
(A) s (B) s (C) 2s (D) s
2 2
2. For the angle of minimum deviation of a prism to be equal to its refracting angle, the prism must be made of
a material whose refractive index :
(A) lies between 2 and 1 (B) lies between 2 and 2
(C) is less than 1 (D) is greater than 2
3. The potential energy of a particle executing SHM changes from maximum to minimum in 5 s. Then the time
period of SHM is :
(A) 5 s (B) 10 s (C) 15 s (D) 20 s
 
4. A force F  (3 î  4 ĵ) N acts on a 2 kg movable object that moves from an initial position di  ( 3 î  2 ĵ) m

to a final position d f  (5 î  4 ĵ ) m in 6 s. The average power delivered by the force during the interval is
equal to :
50 50
(A) 8 watt (B) watt (C) 15 watt (D) watt.
6 3
5. Two blocks A (5kg) and B(2kg) attached to the ends of a spring constant 1120N/m are placed on a
smooth horizontal plane with the spring undeformed. Simultaneously velocities of 3m/s and 10m/s
along the line of the spring in the same direction are imparted to A and B then
k = 1120 N/m
5kg 2kg
(A) when the extension of the spring is maximum the velocities of A and B are zero.
(B) the maximum extension of the spring is 25cm.
(C) the first maximum compression occurs 3/56 seconds after start.
(D) maximum extension and maximum compression occur alternately.
6. Two free point charges +q and +4q are placed a distance x apart. A third charge is so placed that all the three
charges are in equilibrium. Then
(A) unknown charge is -4q/9
(B) unknown charge is -9q/4
(C) It should be at (x/3) from smaller charge between them
(D) It should be placed at (2x/3) from smaller charge between them.
DPPS FILE # 26
7. A fixed container of height ' H ' with large cross-sectional area ' A ' is completely filled with water. Two
small orifice of cross-sectional area ' a ' are made, one at the bottom and the other on the vertical side
of the container at a distance H/2 from the top of the container. Find the time taken by the water level
to reach a height of H/2 from the bottom of the container.
8. A standing wave pattern of maximum amplitude 2mm is obtained in a string whose shape at t = 0 is represented
in the graph. If the speed of the travelling wave in the string is 5 cm/s then find the component waves.
COMPREHENSION
Consider the situation in figure. The bottom of the pot is a reflecting plane mirror, S is a small fish and
T is a human eye. Refractive index of water is 4/3.
60 cm
60 cm
30 cm
9. At what distance from itself will the fish see the image of the eye in upward direction?
(A) 35 cm (B) 45 cm (C) 55 cm (D) 110 cm
10. At what distance from itself will the fish see the image of the eye in downward direction?
(A) 90 cm (B) 110 cm (C) 170 cm (D) 180 cm
DPPS FILE # 27
Topics : Electrostatics, Surface Tension, Friction, Simple Harmonic Motino, Thermal Expansion, Work,
Power and Energy , Rigid Body Dynamics , Geometrical Optics
1. A point charge + Q is placed at the centroid of an equilateral triangle. When a second charge + Q is
placed at a vertex of the triangle, the magnitude of the electrostatic force on the central charge is 8 N.
The magnitude of the net force on the central charge when a third charge + Q is placed at another
vertex of the triangle is:
(A) zero (B) 4 N (C) 4 2 N (D) 8 N
2. The figure shows a soap film in which a closed elastic thread is lying. The
film inside the thread is pricked. Now the sliding wire is moved out so that
the surface area increases. The radius of the circle formed by elastic thread
will
(A) increase (B) decrease

(C) remain same (D) data insufficient
3. A block of mass M rests on a rough horizontal surface. The co-efficient of friction between the block
and the surface is . A force F = M g acting at angle  with the vertical side of the block pulls it. In which
of the following cases, the block can be pulled along the surface?
(A) tan  (B) cot  (C) cot (/2)  (D) none
4. A particle is executing SHM between points -X m and X m, as shown in figure-I. The velocity V(t) of the
particle is partially graphed and shown in figure-II. Two points A and B corresponding to time t1 and time
t2 respectively are marked on the V(t) curve.
B
+x t1
-Xm O Xm
t2 t
A
Figure-I Figure-II
(A) At time t1 , it is going towards X m.

(B) At time t1, its speed is decreasing.
(C) At time t2, its position lies in between –X m and O.
(D) The phase difference  between points A and B must be expressed as 90° <  < 180°.
5. When the temperature of a copper coin is raised by 80 oC, its diameter increases by 0.2%,
(A) percentage rise in the area of a face is 0.4%
(B) percentage rise in the thickness is 0.4%
(C) percentage rise in the volume is 0.6%
(D) coefficient of linear expansion of copper is 0.25x10-4 / oC.
DPPS FILE # 28
6. Starting at rest, a 5 kg object is acted upon by only one force as indicated in figure. Find the total work
done by the force.
7. A 2 kg uniform cylinder is placed on a plank of mass 4 kg which in turn

rests on a smooth horizontal plane. A constant horizontal force of 20 N
is applied on the plank. If no slipping occurs between cylinder and
plank obtain the acceleration of the cylinder and the plank.
COMPREHENSION
There is a slab of refractive index n2 placed as shown. Medium on two side are n1 and n3. Width of slab is d2.
An object is placed at distance d1 from surface AB and observer is at distance d3 from surface CD. Given
n1 = air [ref. index = 1] and n2 is glass
[ref. index = 3/2], d1 = 12 cm and d2 = 9cm, d3 = 4cm.
8. If object starts to move with speed of 12cm/sec towards the slab then find the speed of image as seen by
observer [given n3 = air = (ref. index = 1)]
(A) 8 cm/sec (B) 180 cm/sec (C) 12 cm/sec (D) none of these
4
9. If n3 = then distance of image of object seen by observer is :
3
(A) 25 cm (B) 30 cm (C) 28 cm (D) none of these
4
10. If n3 = and object start to move towards the slab with speed of 12 cm/sec then speed of image is :
3
(A) 16 cm/sec (B) 9 cm/sec (C) 12 cm/sec (D) none of these
DPPS FILE # 29
Topics : Electrostatics, Fluid, Circular Motion, Work, Power and Energy, Sound Wave, String Wave,
Geometrical Optics
1. Four positive charges (22-1) Q are arranged at corner of a square. Another charge q is placed at the
centre of the square. Resultant force acting on each corner is zero If q is
(A) – 7Q/4 (B) – 4Q/7 (C) -Q (D) None
2. A vessel contains oil (density = 0.8 gm/cm3) over mercury (density = 13.6 gm/cm3). A uniform sphere floats
with half its volume immersed in mercury and the other half in oil. The density of the material of sphere in gm/
cm3 is:
(A) 3.3 (B) 6.4 (C) 7.2 (D) 12.8
3. A small coin of mass 40 g is placed on the horizontal surface of a rotating

disc. The disc starts from rest and is given a constant angular acceleration 
= 2 rad/s2. The coefficient of static friction between the coin and the disc is µs
= 3/4 and coefficient of kinetic friction is µk = 0.5. The coin is placed at a
distance r = 1 m from the centre of the disc. The magnitude of the resultant
force on the coin exerted by the disc just before it starts slipping on the disc
is : (Take g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 0.2 N (B) 0.3 N (C) 0.4 N (D) 0.5 N
4. A block of mass 1 kg slides down a curved track that is one quadrant of a circle of radius 1m. Its speed
at the bottom is 2 m/s. The work done by frictional force is : (g = 10 m/s 2)
(A) 8 J (B) 8J

(C) 4 J (D)  4 J
5. Which of the following is/ are correct.
(A) (B) (C) (D)
DPPS FILE # 30
6. An electron is placed just in the middle between two long fixed line
charges of charge density + each. The wires are in the xy plane (Do
not consider gravity)
(A) The equilibrium of the electron will be unstable along x-direction
(B) The equilibrium of the electron will be stable along y-direction
(C) The equilibrium of the electron will be neutral along y-direction
(D) The equilibrium of the electron will be stable along z-direction
7. The ratio of the intensities of the mechanical waves propagating in the same medium Y1=10 sin(t – kx) and
Y2= 5 [sin (t – kx) + 3 cos (kx – t)] is
COMPREHENSION
There is an insect inside a cabin eying towards a thick glass plate P1. Insect sees the images of light source
3
across the glass plate P1 ouside the cabin. Cabin is made of thick glass plates of refractive index  = and
2
thickness 3 cm. Insect is eying from the middle of the cabin as shown in figure. (glass plates are partially
reflective and consider only paraxial rays)
8. At what distance (from eye of insect) will the eye see first image?
(A) 5 cm (B) 7 cm (C) 9 cm (D) 14 cm
9. At what distance (from eye of insect) will the eye see second image?
(A) 11 cm (B) 13 cm (C) 16.5 cm (D) 18 cm
10. Number of image seen by insect ?

(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 8 (D) 
DPPS FILE # 31
Topic : Rigid Body Dynamics, String Wave, Kinetic Throry of Gases, Thermal Expansion, Simple Harmonic
Motion, Electrostatics

Match the Following (no negative marking) (2 × 4)Q.10 (8 marks, 10 min.) [8, 10]
1. A uniform cylinder of mass M lies on a fixed plane inclined at an angle 
with horizontal. A light string is tied to the cylinder’s right most point, and
a mass m hangs from the string, as shown. Assume that the coefficient of
friction between the cylinder and the plane is sufficiently large to prevent
slipping. For the cylinder to remain static, the value of mass m is-
M cos  sin 
(A) (B) M
1  sin  1  sin 
cos  sin 
(C) M (D) M
1 – sin  1 – sin 
2. At t = 0, a transverse wave pulse travelling in the positive x direction with a speed of 2 m/s in a long
6
wire is described by the function y = 2 , given that x  0. Transverse velocity of a particle at x = 2m and
x
t = 2 seconds is :
(A) 3 m/s (B) – 3 m/s (C) 8 m/s (D) – 8 m/s
dN dN
3. Graph shows a hypothetical speed distribution for a sample of N gas particle (for V > V0; = 0, is rate
dV dV
of change of number of particles with change veloicty)
dN
dV
V0
speed V
(A) The value of aV0 is 2N.

(B) The ratio Vavg/V0 is equal to 2/3.
(C) The ratio Vrms/V0 is equal to 1/ 2 .
(D) Three fourth of the total particle has a speed between 0.5 V0 and V0.
4. A vessel is partly filled with liquid. When the vessel is cooled to a lower temperature, the space in the vessel,
unoccupied by the liquid remains constant. Then the volume of the liquid (VL), volume of the vessel (Vv), the
coefficients of cubical expansion of the material of the vessel (v) and of the liquid (L) are related as
(A) L>v (B) L<v (C) v/L=Vv/VL (D) v/L=VL/Vv
DPPS FILE # 32
5. Two particles perform SHM with the same amplitude and same frequency about the same mean position and
along the same line. If the maximum distance between them during the motion is A (A is the amplitude of
either) then the phase difference between their SHM is _ _ _ _ _ _ _.
6. Calculate the magnitude of electrostatic force on a charge placed at a vertex of a triangular pyramid (4
vertices, 4 faces), if 4 equal point charges are placed at all four vertices of pyramid of side ‘a’.
COMPREHENSION
A bar of mass m is held as shown between 4 uniform discs, each of mass m and radius r = 75 mm. The
bar has been released from rest, knowing that the normal forces exerted on the discs by vertical walls
are sufficient to prevent any slipping. Answer the following questions assuming attachments are massless
and fixed to the bar. (Acceleration due to gravity is g)
7. If m = 5 kg and m = 2 kg, then acceleration of the bar is

g
(A) g (B) 13g/7 (C) 13g/17 (D)
17
8. If the mass m of the discs is negligible, then acceleration of the bar is

g
(A) g (B) 2g/3 (C) 13g/17 (D)
17
9. If the mass m of the bar is negligible, then acceleration of the bar is

g
(A) g (B) 2g/3 (C) 13g/17 (D)
17
10. Assume only electrostatic interaction forces :
Column –  Column – 
(A) Three charges are kept along a (p) The system may be in equilibrium with
straight line proper choice of the value of charges.
(B) Three charges are kept at the vertices of an (q) The system will be in equilibrium for any
equilateral triangle value of the charges.
(C) Three charges are kept at the three vertices (r) The system will not be in equilibrium for
of a square, and a fourth charge is kept at any choice of the value of charges.
the point of intersection of the diagonals.
(D) Three charges are kept at the vertices of an (s) The equilibrium is unstable.
equilateral triangle with the fourth charge
at the centroid.
DPPS FILE # 33
Topics : Calorimetry & Thermal Expansion, Electrostatics, Work, Power and Energy, Rigid Body Dynamics,
String Wave, Geometrical Optics
Match the Following (no negative marking) (2 × 4) (8 marks, 10 min.) [8, 10]
1. Water of mass m2 = 1 kg is contained in a copper calorimeter of mass m1 = 1 kg. Their common temperature
t = 10°C. Now a piece of ice of mass m3 = 2 kg and temperature is –11°C dropped into the calorimeter.
Neglecting any heat loss, the final temperature of system is. [specific heat of copper = 0.1 Kcal/ kg°C, specific
heat of water = 1 Kcal/kg°C, specific heat of ice = 0.5 Kcal/kg°C, latent heat of fusion of ice = 78.7 Kcal/kg]
(A) 0°C (B) 4°C (C) – 4°C (D) – 2°C

2. Two identical spheres of same mass and specific gravity (which is the ratio of density of a substance and
density of water) 2.4 have different charges of Q and – 3Q. They are suspended from two strings of same
length  fixed to points at the same horizontal level, but distant  from each other. When the entire set up is
transferred inside a liquid of specific gravity 0.8, it is observed that the inclination of each string in equilibrium
remains unchanged. Then the dielectric constant of the liquid is
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 1.5 (D) None of these
3. A block of mass 10 kg is released on a fixed wedge inside a cart which is
moved with constant velocity 10 m/s towards right. Take initial velocity of
block with respect to cart zero. Then work done by normal reaction (with
respect to ground) on block in two seconds will be: (g = 10 m/s2).
(A) zero (B) 960 J

(C) 1200 J (D) none of these
4. If the frequency of a wave is increased by 25 %, then the change in its wavelength will be:
(medium not changed)
(A) 20 % increase (B) 20 % decrease (C) 25 % increase (D) 25 % decrease
5. The moment of inertia of a thin sheet of mass M of the given shape

about the specified axis is
(A) (3/2)MR2 (B) (3/4)MR2
(C) MR2 (1 + 1/2) (D) MR2/(22)
6. AB wire is vibrating in its fundamental mode. W ire

AB is in resonance with resonance tube in which air
column is also vibrating with its fundamental mode.
Sound speed is 400 m/sec and linear mass density
of AB wire is 10 –4 kg/m and g = 10 m/sec 2 , value of
mass m = [(10 –1 )] kg, then find value of .Neglect
the masses of wires in comparison to block's mass
'm'.
DPPS FILE # 34
COMPREHENSION
A glass prism with a refracting angle of 600 has a refractive index 1.52 for red and 1.6 for violet light.
A parallel beam of white light is incident on one face at an angle of incidence, which gives minimum deviation
for red light. Find :
[Use: sin (50º) = 0.760; sin (31.6º) = 0.520 ; sin (28.4º) = 0.475; sin (56º) = 0.832 ;  = 22/7]
7. The angle of incidence at the prism is :

(A) 30º (B) 40º (C) 50º (D) 60º
8. The angular width of the spectrum is :

(A) 6º (B) 4.8º (C) 9.6º (D) 12º
9. The length of the spectrum if it is focussed on a screen by a lens of focal length 100 cm is :
10 10 5 5
(A) cm (B) m (C) cm (D) m
3 3 3 3
10. The column  gives the two point charge system separated by 2a and the column  gives the variation of
magnitude of electric field intensity at point on the x-axis. Match the situation in Column  with the results
in Column  and indicate your answer by darkening appropriate bubbles in the 4 × 4 matrix given in the
OMR.
Column –  Column – 
q q
(A) x' + +
a (a, 0)
x (p) Increases as x increases
(-a, 0) (0, 0)
in the interval 0  x < a

q -q
(B) x' + –
a (a, 0)
x (q) Decreases as x increases
(-a, 0) (0, 0)
in the interval 0  x < a
y
q (0,+a)
+
x
(0, 0)
(C) (r) Zero at x = 0
q
+
(0,–a)
y
–q – (0,+a)
(D) (s) Decreases as x increases

x in the interval a < x < 
(0, 0)
q
+
(0,–a)
DPPS FILE # 35
Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Electrostatics, Kinematics, Sound Wave, Friction, Fluid

1. A uniform rod of mass M and length L leans against a frictionless wall,
with quarter of its length hanging over a corner as shown. Friction at
corner is sufficient to keep the rod at rest. Then the ratio of magnitude
of normal reaction on rod by wall and the magnitude of normal reaction
on rod by corner is
1 2 1 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 sin  sin  2 cos  cos 
2. A non – conducting semicircular disc (as shown in figure) has a uniform
surface charge density . The ratio of electric field to electric potential at
the centre of the disc will be :
1  nb / a 2 1  n (b / a ) 2  (b  a)
(A) (B) (C) (D) 2  n(b / a)
 (b  a)   (b  a)
3. Two particles P and Q start their journey simultaneously from point A. P
moves along a smooth horizontal wire AB. Q moves along a curved smooth
track. Q has sufficient velocity at A to reach B always remaining in contact
with the curved track. At A, the horizontal component of velocity of Q is
same as the velocity of P along the wire. The plane of motion is vertical. If
t1, t2, are times taken by P and Q respectively to reach B then (Assume Q
A P B
velocity of P is constant)
(A) t1 = t2 (B) t1> t2 (C) t1 < t2 (D) none of these
4. A receiver and a source of sonic oscillations of frequency 200 Hz are located on the x  axis. The receiver
is fixed and the source swings harmonically along that axis with a circular frequency  and an amplitude 50
cm. At what value of  (in rad/sec) will the frequency band width (fmax fmin) registered by the stationary
receiver be equal to 20 Hz. [ The velocity of sound is equal to 340 m/s ]
(A) 17 (B) 34 (C) 68 (D) 8.5
5. Block A is kept on block B as shown in figure. It is known that acceleration of
block A is 2 m/s2 towards right and acceleration of block B is 3 m/s2 towards right
under the effect of unknown forces. Direction of friction force acting on A by B
(AB = 0.3)
(A) is necessarily towards right (B) may be towards right
(C) may be towards left (D) may be zero
6. An infinitely large nonconducting plane of uniform surface charge
density  has circular aperture of certain radius carved out from it. The
electric field at a point which is at a distance ‘a’ from the centre of the
aperture (perpendicular to the

plane) is Find the radius of aperture :
2 2 0
DPPS FILE # 36
COMPREHENSION
A tank of base area 4 m2 is initially filled with water up to height 2m. An object of uniform cross-section 2m2
and height 1m is now suspended by wire into the tank, keeping distance between base of tank and that of
object 1m. Density of the object is 2000kg/m3. Take atmospheric pressure 1 × 105N/m2 ; g = 10m/s2.
A=2m2 1m
1m
4m2
7. The downwards force exerted by the water on the top surface of the object is :
(A) 2.0 × 105 N (B) 2.1 × 105 N (C) 2.2 × 105 N (D) 2.3 × 105 N
8. The tension in the wire is :
(A) 0.1 × 105 N (B) 0.2 × 105 N (C) 0.3 × 105 N (D) 0.4 × 105 N
9. The buoyant force on the object is :
(A) 0.1 × 105 N (B) 0.2 × 105 N (C) 0.3 × 105 N (D) 0.4 × 105 N
10. In each situation of column-I a mass distribution is given and information regarding x and y-coordinate of
centre of mass is given in column-II. Match the figures in column-I with corresponding information of centre
of mass in column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) An equilateral triangular wire (p) xcm > 0
frame is made using three thin
uniform rods of mass per unit
lengths , 2 and 3 as shown
(B) A square frame is made using (q) ycm > 0
four thin uniform rods of mass
per unit length lengths , 2,
3 and 4 as shown
(C) A circular wire frame is made (r) xcm < 0

of two uniform semicircular wires
of same radius and of mass per
unit length  and 2 as shown
(D) A circular wire frame is made (s) ycm < 0

of four uniform quarter circular
wires of same radius and
mass per unit length , 2, 3
and 4 as shown
DPPS FILE # 37
Topics : Geometrical Optics , Kinetic Theory of Gases, Rigid Body Dynamics, String Wave, Electrostatics,
Center of Mass
1. An infinitely long rectangular strip is placed on principal axis of a concave mirror as shown in figure.
One end of the strip coincides with centre of curvature as shown. The height of rectangular strip is very
small in comparison to focal length of the mirror. Then the shape of image of strip formed by concave
mirror is
F C
(A) Rectangle (B) Trapezium (C) Triangle (D) Square
2. N(< 100) molecules of a gas have velocities 1, 2, 3........ N km/s respectively. Then
(A) rms speed and average speed of molecules is same.
(B) ratio of rms speed to average speed is (2N + 1)(N + 1)/6N
(C) ratio of rms speed to average speed is (2N + 1)(N + 1)/6
(D) ratio of rms speed to average speed of molecules is 2 ( 2N  1)

6(N  1)
3. A horizontal plane supports a fixed vertical cylinder of radius R and a particle is attached to the cylinder
by a horizontal thread AB as shown in Fig. A horizontal velocity vo is imparted to the particle, normal to
the thread, then during subsequent motion
(A) Angular momentum of particle about O remains constant

(B) Angular momentum about B remains constant
(C) Momentum and kinetic energy both remain constant
(D) Kinetic energy remain constant.
4. The equation of a string wave is given by (all quantity expressed in S.I. units) Y = 5 sin10 (t – 0.01x) along
the x-axis. The magnitude of phase difference between the points separated by a distance of 10 m along x-
axis is
(A) /2 (B)  (C) 2 (D) /4.
DPPS FILE # 38
5. Two infinite plane sheets A and B are shown in the figure. The surface charge densities on A and B are (2/)
× 10-9 C/m2 and (–1/) × 10-9 C/m2 respectively. C, D, E are three points where electric fields (in N/C) are EC,
ED and EE respectively.
(A) EC = 18, towards right (B) ED = 54, towards right

(C) ED = 18, towards right (D) EE = 18, towards right
6. A sinusoidal wave propagates along a string. In figure (a) and (b) ' y ' represents displacement of particle
from the mean position. ' x ' and ' t ' have usual meanings. Find:
y(in mm) at t = 0
1 4 7
x(in m)
(a) wavelength, frequency and speed of the wave.

(b) maximum velocity and maximum acceleration of the particles
(c) the magnitude of slope of the string at x = 2 at t = 4 sec.
7. A point charge Q is located at centre of a fixed thin ring of radius R with uniformly distributed
charge-Q. The magnitude of the electric field strength at the point lying on the axis of the ring at
a distance x from the centre is (x >> R) _______________.
COMPREHENSION
Figure shows an irregular wedge of mass m placed on a smooth horizontal surface. Horizontal part BC is
rough.The other part of the wedge is smooth.
8. What minimum velocity should be imparted to a small block of same mass m so that it may reach point B :
(A) 2 gH (B) 2gH (C) 2 g(H  h) (D) gh
9. The magnitude of velocity of wedge when the block comes to rest (w.r.t. wedge) on part BC is :
(A) gH (B) g(H  h (C) 2 gH (D) none of these
10. If the coefficient of friction between the block and wedge is , and the block comes to rest with respect to
wedge at a point D on the rough surface then BD will be
H Hh h
  
DPPS FILE # 39
Topics : Calorimetry & Thermal Expansion, Kinetic Theory of Gases, Center of Mass, Geometrical Optics,
Circular Motion.

1. A cubical block of copper of side 10 cm is floating in a vessel containing mercury. Water is poured into
the vessel so that the copper block just gets submerged. The height of water column is
(Hg = 13.6 g/cc , Cu= 7.3 g/cc, water =1 gm/cc)
(A) 1.25 cm (B) 2.5 cm (C) 5 cm (D) 7.5 cm
2. Maxwell’s velocity distribution curve is given for the same quantity two
different temperatures. For the given curves.
(A) T 1 > T 2 (B) T 1 < T 2
(C) T1  T2 (D) T 1 = T 2
3. A particle of mass m is given initial horizontal velocity of magnitude u as shown in the figure. It transfers to
the fixed inclined plane without a jump, that is, its trajectory changes sharply from the horizontal line to
the inclined line. All the surfaces are smooth and 90    0. Then the height to which the particle shall
rise on the inclined plane (assume the length of the inclined plane to be very large)
horizontal surface
(A) increases with increase in  (B) decreases with increase in 

(C) is independent of  (D) data insufficient
4. The angle of deviation () vs angle of incidence (i) is plotted for a prism.
Pick up the correct statements.
(A) The angle of prism is 60°
(B) The refractive index of the prism is n = 3
(C) For deviation to be 65° the angle of incidence i1 = 55°
(D) The curve of '' vs 'i' is parabolic
5. A particle is describing circular motion in a horizontal plane in contact with the smooth inside surface
of a fixed right circular cone with its axis vertical and vertex down. The height of the plane of motion
above the vertex is h and the semivertical angle of the cone is . The period of revolution of the particle:
(A) increases as h increases (B) decreases as h increases

(C) increases as  increases (D) decreases as  increases
DPPS FILE # 40
6. Two identical straight wires are stretched so as to produce 6 beats/sec. when vibrating simultaneously.
On changing the tension slightly in one of them , the beat frequency remains unchanged. Denoting by
T 1, T 2, the higher & the lower initial tensions in the strings, then it could be said that while making the
above changes in tension:
(A) T 2 was decreased (B) T 2 was increased (C) T 1 was increased (D) T1 was decreased
COMPREHENSION
Two point charges are placed at point a and b. The field strength to the
right of the charge Qb on the line that passes through the two charges
varies according to a law that is represented graphically in the figure.
The electric field is taken positive if its direction is towards right and
negative if its direction is towards left.
7. Choose the correct statement regarding the signs of the charges.

(A) Charge at point a is positive and charge at point b is negative.
(B) Charge at point a is negative and charge at point b is positive.
(C) Both charges are positive
(D) Both charges are negative
Qa
8. Ratio of magnitudes of charges will be equal to
Qb
2 2 4
       
(A)  1   (B) 1   (C) 1    (D)  1  
 x 1   x x  x
9. The distance x 2 from point b where the field is maximum, will be
   
(A) 2 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 1
   x1 3    x1 3    2x1 3    2x1  3
   1    1    1    1
 x1   x1   x1   x1 
10. A uniform disc rolls without slipping on a rough horizontal surface with uniform angular velocity. Point O
is the centre of disc and P is a point on disc as shown. In each situation of column I a statement is
given and the corresponding results are given in column-II. Match the statements in column-I with the
results in column-II.
Column  Column 
(A) The velocity of point P on disc (p) Changes in magnitude with time
(B) The acceleration of point P on disc (q) Is always directed from that point (the
point on disc given in column-I)
towards centre of disc.
(C) The tangential acceleration of point P on disc (r) is always zero
(D) The acceleration of point on disc which is in (s) is non-zero and remains constant
contact with rough horizontal surface in magnitude
DPPS FILE # 41
Topics : String Wave, Circular Motion, Projectile Motion, Center of Mass, Rectilinear Motion, Sound Wave,
Geometrical Optics, Rigid Body Dynamics
1. A diatomic ideal gas undergoes a thermodynamic change according to the P–V diagram shown in the
figure. The total heat given to the gas is nearly (use n2 = 0.7) :
P B
2P0
Isothermal
A
P0 C
V
V0 2V0
(A) 2.5 P0V0 (B) 1.4 P0V0

(C) 3.9 P0V0 (D) 1.1 P0V0
2. Figure shows three circular arcs, each of radius R and total charge as indicated.
The net elecric potential at the centre of curvature is :
+Q
Q Q 45°
(A) 2 R (B) 4 R 30°
0 0 –2Q •
R
2Q Q +3Q
(C)  R (D)  R
0 0
3. A heavy body of mass 25 kg is to be dragged along a horizontal plane ( = 1/ 3 ). The least force
required is
(A) 25 kg f (B) 2.5 kg f (C) 12.5 kg f (D) 25/ 3 kg f
4. A particle is acted upon by a force whose component's variations with time are shown in diagrams. Then the
magnitude of change in momentum of the particle in 0.1 sec will be
Fz
Fx Fy
30 N 80 N
t=0.1 sec
0
0 t=0.1 sec 0 t=0.1 sec – 50 N
m m m m
(A) 2 kg (B) 10 kg (C) 12 kg (D) 5 2 kg
sec sec sec sec
DPPS FILE # 42
5. A small block of mass m is pushed towards a movable wedge of mass m and height h with initial
velocity u. All surfaces are smooth. The minimum value of u for which the block will reach
the top of the wedge
h m
u
 1  1
(A) 2gh (B)  2gh (C) 2gh 1  (D) 2gh 1 
   
6. A bird flies for 4 seconds with a velocity of |t – 2| m/sec. in a straight line, where t = time in seconds. It
covers a distance of
(A) 4 m (B) 6 m (C) 8m (D) none of these
7. A violin string oscillating in its fundamental mode, generates a sound wave with wavelength . To
generate a sound wave with wavelength /2 by the string, still oscillating in its fundamental mode,
tension must be changed by the multiple :
(A) 2 (B) 1/2 (C) 4 (D) 1/4
8. In displacement method, the distance between object and screen is 96 cm. The ratio of length of two images
formed by a convex lens placed between them is 4.84.
(A) Ratio of the length of object to the length of shorter image is 11/5.
(B) Distance between the two positions of the lens is 36 cm.
(C) Focal length of the lens is 22.5 cm.
(D) Distance of the lens from the shorter image is 30 cm.
9. A source emit sound waves of frequency 1000 Hz. The source moves to the right with a speed of 32 m/s
relative to ground. On the right a reflecting surface moves towards left with a speed of 64 m/s relative to
ground. The speed of sound in air is 332 m/s :
(A) wavelength of sound infront of source is 0.3 m
(B) number of waves arriving per second which meets the reflected surface is 1320
(C) speed of reflected wave is 268 m/s
(D) wavelength of reflected waves is nearly 0.2 m
10. A wheel (to be considered as a ring) of mass m and radius R rolls without sliding on a horizontal
surface with constant velocity v. It encounters a step of height R/2 at which it ascends without sliding.
(A) the angular velocity of the ring just after it comes in contact with the step is 3v/4R
mg 9 mv 2
(B) the normal reaction due to the step on the wheel just after the impact is +
2 16 R
(C) the normal reaction due to the step on the wheel increases as the wheel ascends
(D) the friction will be absent during the ascent.
DPPS FILE # 43
Topics : String Wave, Circular Motion, Projectile Motion, Geometrical Optics, Electrostatics, Center of
Mass
centre of the string is 4 mm. Minimum distance between the two points having amplitude 2 mm is:
(A) 1 m (B) 75 cm (C) 60 cm (D) 50 cm
2. A particle is projected horizontaly with speed 10m/s from a certain point above ground. Find the tangential
acceleration of particle at t = 2 sec. (Take g = 10 m/s2).
10 25
(A) (B) (C) 4 5 (D) 10 5
5 5
3. A ball is thrown eastward across level ground. A wind blows horizontally to the east, and assume that
the effect of wind is to provide a constant force to the east, equal in magnitude to the weight of the ball.
The angle  (with respect to horizontal) at which the ball should be projected so that it travels maximum
horizontal distance is
(A) 45° (B) 37° (C) 53° (D) 67.5°
4. Two equilateral glass prisms of refractive index 2 are placed as shown in figure. A ray is incident on
side AB of left prism as shown in figure. This ray further suffers refraction at sides AC, PQ and PR in
succession. The prisms are adjusted such that for each refraction the deviation is clockwise. Then the
angle between sides AC and PQ of two prisms for net minimum deviation of incident ray is
(A) 30° (B) 60°

(C) 90° (D) 120°
5. Figure given below shows uniformly positively charged, thin rod of length L and four points A, B, C and D at the
same distance d from the rod, with position as marked. If VA, VB, VC and VD are their respective potentials then:
A B C
L d D
4
L
2
L
(A) VB > VA > VC > VD (B) VB > VA > VC = VD

(C) VA = VB > VC = VD (D) VD > VB > VA > VC
DPPS FILE # 44
6. A rod AB is moving on a fixed circle of radius R with constant velocity ‘v’ as shown in figure. P is the point of
3R
intersection of the rod and the circle. At an instant the rod is at a distance x = from centre of the circle.
5
The velocity of the rod is perpendicular to the rod and the rod is always parallel to the diameter CD.
(a) Find the speed of point of intersection P.

(b) Find the angular speed of point of intersection P with respect to centre of the circle.
COMPREHENSION
The nuclear charge (Ze) is non–uniformly distributed within a nucleus of radius R. The charge density (r)
[charge per unit volume] is dependent only on the radial distance r from the centre of the nucleus as shown
in figure. The electric field is only along the radial direction. Figure [JEE-2008 ; 12/163]
7. The electric field at r = R is :

(A) independent of a (B) directly proportional to a
(C) directly proportional to a2 (D) inversely proportional to a
8. For a = 0, the value d (maximum value of  as shown in the figure) is :
3 Ze 2 3Ze 4Ze Ze
(A) (B) 3 (C) 3 (D)
4R 3
R 3R 3R 3
9. The electric field within the nucleus is generally observed to be linearly dependent on r. This implies :
R 2R
(A) a = 0 (B) a = (C) a = R (D) a =
2 3
10. Two blocks A and B of mass m and 2m respectively are connected by a massless spring of spring
constant K. This system lies over a smooth horizontal surface. At t = 0 the block A has velocity u towards
right as shown while the speed of block B is zero, and the length of spring is equal to its natural length at
that instant. In each situation of column I, certain statements are given and corresponding results are
given in column II. Match the statements in column  corresponding results in column  and indicate your
answer by darkening appropriate bubbles in the 4 × 4 matrix given in the OMR.
Column I Column II
(A) The velocity of block A (p) can never be zero
(B) The velocity of block B (q) may be zero at certain instants of time
(C) The kinetic energy of system of two blocks (r) is minimum at maximum compression of spring
(D) The potential energy of spring (s) is maximum at maximum extension of spring
DPPS FILE # 45
Topics : Projectile Motion, Sound Wave, Relative Motion, Center of Mass, Geometrical Optics, Simple
Harmonic Motion, Circular Motion, Fluid
Match the Following (no negative marking) (2 × 4) Q.10 (8 marks ,10 min.) [8, 10]
1. Two stones are projected simultaneously from a tower at different angles of projection with same speed ‘u’.
The distance between two stones is increasing at constant rate ‘u’. Then the angle between the initial
velocity vectors of the two stones is :
(A) 30° (B) 60° (C) 45° (D) 90°
2. A curve is plotted to represent the dependence of the ratio of the received frequency  to the frequency 0
emitted by the source on the ratio of the speed of observer Vob to the speed of sound Vsound in a situation in
which an observer is moving towards a stationary sound source. The curve is best represented by :
f/f0
(A) (B) 1
0 Vob/Vsound
0.5 1
(C) (D)
3. Car A and car B move on a straight road and their velocity versus time graphs are as shown in figure.
Comparing the motion of car A in between t = 0 to t = 8 sec. and motion of car B in between t = 0 to t
= 7 sec., pick up the correct statement.
v (m/s) v (m/s)
10 m/s 10 m/s
t(s) t(s)
t=2s t=8s t=3s t=7s
Car A Car B
(A) Distance travelled by car A is less than distance travelled by car B.

(B) Distance travelled by car A is greater than distance travelled by car B.
(C) Average speed of both cars are equal.
(D) Average speed of car A is less than average speed of car B.
DPPS FILE # 46
4. In the figure shown a hole of radius 2 cm is made in a semicircular disc of radius 6  cm at a distance
8 cm from the centre C of the disc. The distance of the centre of mass of this system from point C is:
(A) 4 cm (B) 8 cm (C) 6 cm (D) 12 cm
5. A parallel glass slab of refractive index 3 is placed in contact with an equilateral prism of refractive
index 2 . A ray is incident on left surface of slab as shown. The slab and prism combination is
surrounded by air. The magnitude of minimum possible deviation of this ray by slab-prism combination
is
2
(A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 60° (D) 60° – sin–1
3
6. The amplitude of a particle due to superposition of following S.H.Ms. Along the same line is
X 1 = 2 sin 50  t ; X 2 = 10 sin (50  t + 37º)
X 3 =  4 sin 50  t ; X 4 =  12 cos 50  t
(A) 4 2 (B) 4 (C) 6 2 (D) none of these
7. A bob of mass 2 kg is suspended from point O of a cone with an inextensible string of length 3 m. It is
moving in horizontal circle over the surface of cone as shown in the figure. Then : (g = 10 m/s2)
(A) bob looses contact with cone if v  5 m/s (B) normal force on bob is 19 N when v = 2 m/s
38 17
(C) tension in string is N when v = 2 m/s (D) normal force on bob is N when v = 2m/s
3 3
DPPS FILE # 47
 4
8. Inside water     there is an air bubble of radius 4 cm as shown an observer O is looking into the
 3
diametrical axis AB of bubble. Find the distance in cm of a point object from point A on the axis in water
which appears to be at point A as seen by observer.
Air
Bubble
A B O
9. A wooden cube (density 0.5 gm/cc) of side 10 cm is floating in water kept in a cylindrical beaker
of base area 1500 cm 2. W hen a mass m is kept on the wooden block the level of water rises in the
beaker by 2mm. Find the mass m.
10. Match the column:

In all cases in column–I, the blocks are placed on the smooth horizontal surface.
Column–I Column–II
(A) When spring is relaxed. (p) Centre of mass of the complete system shown
the initial velocities given will not move horizontally
to the blocks are as shown
(friction is absent)
(B) A constant force is applied on 2 kg block. (q) Centre of mass of the complete system shown
Springs are initially relaxed and friction is absent will move horizontally
(C) There is no friction between plank and ground (r) Mechanical energy of the system will be
and initially system is at rest. Man starts moving conserved
on a large plank with constant velocity.
(D) Two trolleys are resting on a smooth horizontal (s) Mechanical energy of the system will increase
surface and a man standing on one of the trolleys
jumps to the other with relative velocity of 4 m/s
(t) Linear momentum of the complete system
will always remain constant
DPPS FILE # 48
Topics : Electrostatics, Circular Motion, Geometrical Optics , Relative Motion, Work, Power and Energy,
Fluid
U
1. At distance ' r ' from a point charge, the ratio (where ' U ' is energy density and ' V ' is potential) is
V2
best represented by :
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2. The figure shows several equipotential lines. Comparing between points A and B, pick up the best possible
statement
(A) the electric field has a greater magnitude at point A and is directed to left.
(B) the electric field has a greater magnitude at point A and is directed to right.
(C) the electric field has a greater magnitude at point B and is directed to left.
(D) the electric field has a greater magnitude at point B and is directed to right.
3. A small block slides with velocity 0.5 gr on the horizontal

frictionless surface as shown in the Figure. The block leaves
the surface at point C. The angle  in the Figure is:
(A) cos 1 (4/9) (B) cos1(3/4)
(C) cos1(1/2) (D) none of the above
4. In the figure the variation of components of acceleration of a particle of mass 1 kg is shown w.r.t. time.

The initial velocity of the particle is u  ( 3 î  4 ĵ ) m/s. The total work done by the resultant force on the
particle in time interval from t = 0 to t = 4 seconds is :
(A) 22.5 J (B) 10 J

(C) 0 (D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 49
5. A ray of light falls on a transparent sphere as shown in figure. If the final ray emerges from the sphere parallel
to the horizontal diameter, then the refractive index of the sphere is (consider that sphere is kept in air) :
(A) 2 (B) 3
3
(C) (D) 2
2
6. A boat moves relative to river with a velocity which is n times the river flow velocity.
(A) If n < 1, boat cannot cross the river
(B) If n = 1, boat cannot cross the river without drifting
(C) If n > 1, boat can cross the river along shortest path
(D) Boat can cross the river whatever is the value of n (excluding zero)
7. A force F = 20 N is applied to a block (at rest) as shown in figure. After the block has moved a distance
of 8 m to the right, the direction of horizontal component of the force F is reversed. Find the velocity
with which block arrives at its starting point.
COMPREHENSION
A glass tube has three different cross sectional areas with the values indicated in the figure. A piston at the
left end of the tube exerts pressure so that the mercury within the tube flows from the right end with a speed
of 8.0 m/s. Three points within the tube are labeled A, B and C. The atmospheric pressure is 1.01 × 105 N/m2;
and the density of mercury is 1.36 × 104 kg/m3. (use g = 10 m/s2)
Vacuum
12cm
2 h
A B
Piston C
2
5.6 cm
2
6cm
8. At what speed is mercury flowing through the point A ?

(A) 2.0 m/s (B) 4.0 m/s (C) 8.0 m/s (D) 12 m/s
9. The pressure at point A is equal to:

(A) 2.02 × 105 Pa (B) 2.25 × 105 Pa (C) 3.26 × 105 Pa (D) 4.27 × 105 Pa.
10. The height h of mercury in the manometer is

(A) 136 mm (B) 169 mm (C) 272 mm (D) 366 mm
DPPS FILE # 50
Topics : Kinetic Theory of Gases, Surface Tension, Rigid Body Dynamics, Center of Mass, Electrostatics,
Sound Wave, Work, Power and Energy
1. V–T diagram for a process of a given mass of ideal gas is as shown in the figure.
During the process pressure of gas.
(A) first increases then decreases
(B) continuously decreases
(C) continuously increases
(D) first decreases then increases.
2. A long capillary tube of mass '' gm, radius 2mm and negligible thickness, is partially immersed in a
liquid of surface tension 0.1 N/m. Take angle of contact zero and neglect buoyant force of liquid. The
force required to hold the tube vertically, will be - (g = 10 m/s 2)
(A) 10.4 mN (B) 10.8 mN

(C) 0.8 mN (D) 4.8 mN
3. A small solid sphere of mass m is released from a point A at a height h above the bottom of a rough
track as shown in the figure. If the sphere rolls down the track without slipping, its rotational kinetic
energy when it comes to the bottom of track is
10 5 2
(A) mgh (B) mgh (C) mgh (D) mgh
7 7 7
4. In the figure shown a particle P strikes the inclined smooth plane horizontally and rebounds vertically. If the
angle  is 60º, then the coefficient of restitution is:
1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) 1
3 3 2
DPPS FILE # 51
5. A point charge ' q ' is placed at the corner of an equilateral prism. Then the electric flux through the
surface of the prism is:
q q q q
(A) (B) (C) (D)
8 0 6 0 12  0 24  0
6. There is a set of four tuning forks, one with the lowest frequency vibrating at 550 Hz. By using any two
tuning forks at a time, the following beat frequencies are heard: 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8. The possible frequencies
of the other three forks are:
(A) 552, 553, 560 (B) 557, 558, 560 (C) 552, 553, 558 (D) 551, 553, 558
7. Which of the following statements is/are true

(A) work done by kinetic friction on an object may be positive.
(B) A rigid body rolls up an inclined plane without sliding. The friction force on it will be up the incline.
(only contact force and gravitational force is acting)
(C) A rigid body rolls down an inclined plane without sliding. The friction force on it will be up the incline.
(D) A rigid body is release from rest and having no angular velocity from the top of a rough inclined plane. It
moves down the plane with slipping. The friction force on it will be up the incline.
COMPREHENSION
A stone is projected from level ground with speed u and at an angle  with horizontal. Some how the
acceleration due to gravity (g) becomes double (that is 2g) immediately after the stone reaches the
maximum height and remains same thereafter. Assume direction of acceleration due to gravity always
vertically downwards.
8. The total time of flight of particle is :
3 u sin  u sin   1  2u sin  u sin   1 

(A) 2 g (B) 1   (C) (D)  2  
g  2 g g  2
9. The horizontal range of particle is
3 u2 sin 2 u 2 sin 2  1  u2 u 2 sin 2  1 

(A) (B) 1   (C) sin2 (D)  2  
4 g 2g  2 g 2g  2
10. The angle  which the velocity vector of stone makes with horizontal just before hitting the ground is
given by:
(A) tan  = 2 tan  (B) tan  = 2 cot  (C) tan  = 2 tan  (D) tan  = 2 cot 
DPPS FILE # 52
Topics : Kinetic Theory of Gases, Geometrical Optics, Electrostatics, Center of Mass, Relative Motion,
Rigid Body Dynamics, String Wave
1. At pressure P and absolute temperature T a mass M of an ideal gas fills a closed container of volume V. An
V
additional mass 2M of the same gas is added into the container and the volume is then reduced to and the
3
T
temperature to . The pressure of the gas will now be:
3
P
(A) (B) P (C) 3 P (D) 9 P
3
2. A ray hits the y-axis making an angle  with y-axis as shown in the figure.
 x
The variation of refractive index with x-coordinate is  =  0  1 –  for 0 
 d 
 1 
x  d 1 –   and  = 0 for x < 0, where d is a positive constant. The
 0 
maximum x-coordinate of the path traced by the ray is

(A) d(1 – sin ) (B) d (1 – cos ) (C) d sin  (D) d cos 
3. A sphere of radius R contains a total charge +Q which is uniformly distributed

throughout its volume. At a distance 2R from the centre of sphere, a particle
having charge +q is fixed. P is a point on surface of sphere and lying on
line joining the centre of sphere and point charge. For what value of q will
the electric field at P be zero.
Q 3
(A) (B) Q (C) Q (D) 2Q
2 2
4. A particle ‘A’ of mass m collides head on with another stationary particle ‘B’ of the same mass ‘m’.The
kinetic energy lost by the colliding particle 'A' will be maximum if the coefficient of the restituition is
(A) 1 (B) 0 (C) 0.5 (D) none
5. An open elevator is ascending with zero acceleration and speed 10 m/s. A ball is thrown vertically up by a
boy when he is at a height 10 m from the ground, the velocity of projection is 30m/s with respect to elevator.
Choose correct option, assuming height of the boy very small : (g = 10 m/s2)
(A) Maximum height attained by the ball from ground is 90 m.
(B) Maximum height attained by the ball with respect to lift from the point of projection is 45 m.
(C) Time taken by the ball to meet the elevator again is 6 sec
(D) The speed of the ball when it comes back to the boy is 20 m/s with respect to ground.
DPPS FILE # 53
6. A circular ring of mass m and radius R rests flat on a frictionless surface. A bullet also of mass m and
moving with a velocity v, strikes the ring and gets embedded in it. The thickness of the ring is much smaller
than R. Find the angular velocity with which the system rotates after the bullet strikes the ring.
COMPREHENSION
One end of massless inextensible string of length  is fixed and other end is tied to a small ball of mass m.
The ball is performing a circular motion in vertical plane. At the lowest position, speed of ball is 20 g  .
Neglect any other forces on the ball except tension and gravitational force. Acceleration due to gravity is g.
7. Motion of ball is in nature of

(A) circular motion with constant speed
(B) circular motion with variable speed
(C) circular motion with constant angular acceleration about centre of the circle.
(D) none of these
8. At the highest position of ball, tangential acceleration of ball is -

(A) 0 (B) g (C) 5 g (D) 16 g
9. During circular motion, minimum value of tension in the string -

(A) zero (B) mg (C) 10 mg (D) 15 mg
10. In each of the four situations of column -I , a stretched string or an organ pipe is given along with the
required data. In case of strings the tension in string is T = 102.4 N and the mass per unit length of
string is 1 g/m. Speed of sound in air is 320 m/s. Neglect end corrections. The frequencies of resonance
are given in column -II. Match each situation in column-I with the possible resonance frequencies
given in Column -II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) String fixed at both ends fixed

0.5m
fixed
(p) 320 Hz
(B) String fixed at one end and (q) 480 Hz

0.5m
free at other end fixed end free end
0.5m
(C) Open organ pipe (r) 640 Hz
0.5m
(D) Closed organ pipe (s) 800 Hz
DPPS FILE # 54
Topics : Geometrical Optics, Sound wave, Kinetic Theory of Gases, Rectilinear Motion, Projectile Motion,
Electrostatics,Rigid Body Dynamics, Work, Power and Energy
1. Two point objects are placed on principal axis of a thin converging lens. One is 20 cm from the lens and other
is on the other side of lens at a distance of 40 cm from the lens. The images of both objects coincide. The
magnitude of focal length of lens is
80 40 20
(A) cm (B) cm (C) 40 cm (D) cm
3 3 3
2. A stationary source 's' is producing sound of frequency ' f ' and an observer 'o' is at rest at some distance from
source. A reflector is moving with constant speed ' v ' along perpendicular bisector of line joining source and
observer. The variation of beat frequency registered by observer will be: [ Reflector is moving
from  to +  along perpendicular bisector ]
(A) (B) (C) (D)
P2
3. During an experiment, an ideal gas is found to obey a condition = constant [ = density of the gas]. The


gas is initially at temperature T, pressure P and density . The gas expands such that density changes to
2
(A) The pressure of the gas changes to 2 P..
(B) The temperature of the gas changes to 2 T..
(C) The graph of the above process on the P-T diagram is parabola.
(D) The graph of the above process on the P-T diagram is hyperbola.
4. Consider two cars moving perpendicular to each other as shown. Initially distance between them is 100
m. Velocity of A is 10 3 m/s and velocity of B is 10 m/s. Then:
(A) magnitude of velocity of A w.r.t. B is 20 m/s
(B) minimum distance between them is 50 m
(C) minimum distance between them is 50 3 m
DPPS FILE # 55
(D) at t = 2 sec. they will be nearest to each other
5. Two graphs of the same projectile motion (in the xy plane) projected from origin are shown. X axis is along
horizontal direction & Y axis is vertically upwards. Take g = 10 m/s2.
Find (i) Y component of initial velocity and (ii) X component of initial velocity
 
6. Electric dipole of moment P = p î is kept at a point (x,y) in an electric field E = 4 xy2 î + 4 x2y ĵ . Find the
magnitude of force acting on the dipole.
COMPREHENSION
A horizontal uniform rod of mass 'm' has its left end hinged to the fixed
incline plane, while its right end rests on the top of a uniform cylinder of
mass 'm' which in turn is at rest on the fixed inclined plane as shown. The
coefficient of friction between the cylinder and rod, and between the cylinder
and inclined plane, is sufficient to keep the cylinder at rest.
7. The magnitude of normal reaction exerted by the rod on the cylinder is

mg mg mg 2 mg
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 3 2 3
8. The ratio of magnitude of frictional force on the cylinder due to the rod and the magnitude of frictional force on
the cylinder due to the inclined plane is:
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 3 (C) 2 : 1 (D) 2 :1
9. The magnitude of normal reaction exerted by the inclined plane on the cylinder is:
3 mg 5 mg
(A) mg (B) (C) 2mg (D)
2 4
10. Match the statements in Column  with the results in Column  and indicate your answer by darkening
appropriate bubbles in the 4 × 4 matrix given in the OMR.
Column – I Column – II
(A) Work done by ideal gas during free expansion (p) zero
(B) A wedge block system is as shown in the fig. (q) non zero
The wedge lying on horizontal surface is accelerated to
right by a horizontal force F. All surfaces are smooth.
Work done by normal reaction exerted by wedge on
block in any time interval is
(C) Two identical conducting spheres of radius 'a' are separated (r) negative
by a distance 'b' (b>>a). Both spheres carry equal and
opposite charge. Net electrostatic potential energy of
system of both spheres is
(D) A uniform cylinder lies over a rough horizontal platform. The (s) positive
platform is accelerated horizontally as shown with acceleration
a. The cylinder does not slip over the platform.The work done
by the force of friction on the cylinder w.r.t ground in any time interval is
DPPS FILE # 56
Topics : Newton’s Law of Motion, Center of Mass, Geometrical Optics, Surface Tension, Electrostatics

1. A cylinder rests in a supporting carriage as shown. The side AB of carriage makes an angle 30o with the
horizontal and side BC is vertical. The carriage lies on a fixed horizontal surface and is being pulled towards
left with an horizontal acceleration 'a'. The magnitude of normal reactions exerted by sides AB and BC of
carriage on the cylinder be NAB and NBC respectively. Neglect friction everywhere. Then as the magnitude of
acceleration 'a ' of the carriage is increased, pick up the correct statement:
(A) NAB increases and NBC decreases. (B) Both NAB and NBC increase.
(C) NAB remains constant and NBC increases. (D) NAB increases and NBC remains constant.
2. On a smooth carom board, a coin moving in negative ydirection with a speed of 3 m/s is being hit at
the point (4, 6) by a striker moving along negative x-axis. The line joining centres of the coin and the
striker just before the collision is parallel to x-axis. After collision the coin goes into the hole located at
the origin. Masses of the striker and the coin are equal. Considering the collision to be elastic, the
initial and final speeds of the striker in m/s will be:
(A) (1.2, 0) (B) (2, 0)

(C) (3, 0) (D) none of these
3. A prism of angle A and refractive index 2 is surrounded by

medium of refractive index 3 . A ray is incident on side PQ at
an angle of incidence i (0 < i < 90°) as shown. The refracted
ray is then incident on side PR of prism. The minimum angle A
of prism for which ray incident on side PQ does not emerge
out of prism from side PR (for any value of i) is
(A) 30° (B) 45°
(C) 60° (D) 120°
DPPS FILE # 57
4. Assuming the xylem tissues through which water rises from root to the branches in a tree to be of
uniform cross-section find the maximum radius of xylum tube in a 10 m high coconut tree so that water
can rise to the top. (surface tension of water = 0.1N/m, Angle of contact of water with xylem tube= 60°)
(A) 1 cm (B) 1 mm (C) 10 µm (D) 1 µm
5. A particle is attached to an end of a rigid rod. The other end of the rod is hinged and the rod rotates
always remaining horizontal without in contact with any thing else. It’s angular speed is increasing
 at
constant rate. The mass of the particle is 'm'. The force exerted by the rod on the particle is F , then :
(A) F  mg
(B) F is constant

(C) The angle between F and horizontal plane decreases.

(D) The angle between F and the rod decreases.
COMPREHENSION
An uncharged ball of radius R is placed at a point in space and the region out side (from R to  measured
C
from centre of the ball) the ball is non uniformly charged with a charge density  = coul/m 3 where ‘C’
r3
is a positive constant and r is the distance of a point measured from centre of the ball.
6. Electric potential at the centre of the ball is :

(A) Directly proportional to R (B) Directly proportional to R2
(C) Inversely proportional to R (D) Inversely proportional to R2
7. Electric field intensity at a distance x from centre of the ball (x > R) is :
C x C  x R  C C x
(A) 2
n (B) 2
n   (C) 2 (R2 – x 2) (D) 2
n
0 R R 2 0 R  R  2 0 R 0 x R
8. As we move away from ball’s surface, electric potential :

(A) decreases. (B) increases.
(C) decreases then increases. (D) increases then decreases.
DPPS FILE # 58
Topics : Electrostatics, Calorimetry & Thermal Expansion, Rectilinear Motion, Fluid, Center of Mass,
String Wave
R
1. A ring of radius R having a linear charge density moves towards a solid imaginary sphere of radius , so
2
that the centre of ring passes through the centre of sphere. The axis of the ring is perpendicular to the line
joining the centres of the ring and the sphere. The maximum flux through the sphere in this process is :
R R R R
(A)  (B) 2  (C) 4  (D) 3 
0 0 0 0
2. A rod of length 1000 mm and co-efficient of linear expansion  = 104 per degree is placed symmetrically
between fixed walls separated by 1001 mm. The Young's modulus of the rod is 1011 N/m 2. If the
temperature is increased by 20 ºC, then the stress developed in the rod is (in N/m 2):
(A) 10 (B) 108

(C) 2  108 (D) cannot be calculated
3. Two particles are projected under gravity with speed 4m/s and 3m/s simultaneously from same point
and at angles 53º and 37º with the horizontal surface respectively as shown in figure. Then :
(A) Their relative velocity is along vertical direction.

(B) Their relative acceleration is non-zero and it is along vertical direction.
(C) They will hit the surface simultaneously
(D) Their relative velocity (for time interval 0 < t < 0.36s) is constant and has magnitude 1.4 m/s.
DPPS FILE # 59
4. A long cyclindrical drum is filled with water. Two small holes are made on the side of the drum as shown in the
fig. Find the depth of the liquid in the drum if the ranges of water from the holes are equal.
5. A 500 g block P rests on a frictionless horizontal table at a distance of 400 mm from a fixed pin
O . The block is attached to pin O by an elastic cord of constant k = 100N/m and of undeformed length
900 mm . If the block is set in motion perpendicularly as shown in figure, (assume there is no loss in
energy due to jerk) determine :
(a) the speed in the begining for which the distance from O to the block
P will reach the maximum value of 1.2 m.
(b) the speed when OP = 1.2 m
(c) the radius of curvature of the path of the block when OP = 1.2 m .
COMPREHENSION
A sinusoidal wave travels along a taut string of linear mass density 0.1 g/cm. The particles oscillate
along y-direction and wave moves in the positive x-direction. The amplitude and frequency of oscillation
are 2mm and 50 Hz respectively. The minimum distance between two particles oscillating in the same
phase is 4m.
6. The tension in the string is (in newton)

(A) 4000 (B) 400 (C) 25 (D) 250
7. The amount of energy transferred (in Joules) through any point of the string in 5 seconds is
2 2 2
(A) (B) (C)
10 50 5
(D) Cannot be calculated because area of cross-section of string is not given.
8. If at x = 2m and t = 2s, the particle is at y = 1mm and its velocity is in positive y-direction, then the
equation of this travelling wave is : (y is in mm, t is in seconds and x is in metres)
x x
(A) y = 2 sin ( – 100 t + 30°) (B) y = 2 sin ( – 100 t + 120°)
2 2
x
(C) y = 2 sin ( – 100 t + 150°) (D) None of these
2
DPPS FILE # 60
Topics : String Wave, Newton’s Law of Motion, Electrostatics, Projectile Motion, Circular Motion, Center
of Mass
Single choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.1 (3 marks, 3 min.) [3, 3]
1. Two identical pulses move in opposite directions with same uniform speeds on a stretched string. The
width and kinetic energy of each pulse is L and k respectively. At the instant they completely overlap,
the kinetic energy of the width L of the string where they overlap is :
(A) k (B) 2k (C) 4k (D) 8 k
2. A solid sphere of mass 10 kg is placed over two smooth inclined planes as shown in figure. The normal
reactions at 2 is 10x N. Find x (g = 10 m/s2)
2 1
60° 30°
3. A conducting sphere of radius R has two spherical cavities of radius a and b. The cavities have charges qa
and qb respectively at their centres. ‘A’ is the centre of the sphere and ‘B’ is the centre of the cavity of radius
‘b’. Find:
(i) electric field and electrical potential at

(a) r (distance from A)> R,
(b) r (distance from B)< b
(ii) surface charge densities on the surface of radius R, radius a and radius b.
(iii) What is the force on qa and qb?
4. A particle moves along the plane trajectory y = f(x) with velocity v whose modulus is constant. Find the
acceleration of the particle at the point x = 0 and the curvature radius of the trajectory at that point if the
trajectory has the form
(a) of a parabola y = ax2.
(b) of an ellipse (x/a)2 + (y/b)2 = 1; a and b are constants here.
DPPS FILE # 61
COMPREHENSION
A ball is hanging vertically by a light inextensible string of length L from fixed point O. The ball of mass m is
given a speed u at the lowest position such that it completes a vertical circle with centre at O as
shown. Let AB be a diameter of circular path of ball making an angle  with vertical as shown. (g is
acceleration due to gravity)
A
u
m
5. Let T A and T B be the magnitude of tension in string when ball is at A and B respectively, then T A – T B is
equal to
(A) 6 mg cos (B) 6 mg (C) 12 mg cos (D) None of these
   
6. Let a A and a B be acceleration of ball when it is at A and B respectively, then | a A  a B | is equal to
(A) 2 g sin (B) g 12 cos 2   4 (C) 4 g cos (D) None of these
7. Let KA and KB be kinetic energy of ball when it is at A and B respectively, then KA – KB is equal to
(A) mgL cos (B) 2mgL cos (C) 4mgL cos (D) None of these
8. Two identical uniform solid smooth spheres each of mass m each approach each other with constant velocities
such that net momentum of system of both spheres is zero. The speed of each sphere before collision is u.
Both the spheres then collide. The condition of collision is given for each situation of column-I. In each
situation of column- information regarding speed of sphere(s) is given after the collision is over. Match the
condition of collision in column- with statements in column-.
Column- Column-
(A) Collision is perfectly elastic and head on (p) speed of both spheres after collision is u
(B) Collision is perfectly elastic and oblique (q) velocity of both spheres after
collision is different
1
(C) Coefficient of restitution is e = and (r) speed of both spheres after collision
2
collision is head on is same but less than u.
1
(D) Coefficient of restitution is e = and (s) speed of one sphere may be more than u.
2
collision is oblique
DPPS FILE # 62
Topics : Newton’s Law of Motion, Fluid, Surface Tension, Gravitation, Electrostatics

1. A mass m is supported as shown in the figure by ideal strings connected to a rigid wall and to a mass
3m at rest on a fixed horizontal surface. The string connected to larger mass is horizontal, that
connected to smaller mass is vertical and the one connected to wall makes an angle 60° with
horizontal.Then the minimum coefficient of static friction between the larger mass and the horizontal
surface that permits the system to remain in equilibrium in the situation shown is:
60°
3m
1 1
(A) (B)
3 3 3
3 3
(C) (D)
2 2
2. Water (density ) is flowing through the uniform tube of cross-sectional area A with a constant speed v
as shown in the figure. The magnitude of force exerted by the water on the curved corner of the tube
is(neglect viscous forces)
v 60°
(A) 3 Av 2 (B) 2Av 2
Av 2
(C) 2Av 2 (D)
2
3. A container is partially filled with a liquid of density 2. A capillary tube of radius r is vertically inserted
in this liquid. Now another liquid of density 1 (1 < 2) is slowly poured in the container to a height h as
shown. There is only denser liquid in the capillary tube. The rise of denser liquid in the capillary tube is
also h. Assuming zero contact angle, the surface tension of heavier liquid is
(A) r 2 g h (B) 2 r 2 g h

r
(C) (2 – 1) g h (D) 2r (2 – 1) g h
2
DPPS FILE # 63
4. A point P lies on the axis of a fixed ring of mass M and radius a, at a distance a from its centre C. A small
particle starts from P and reaches C under gravitational attraction only. Its speed at C will be _______.
Q
5. Three conducting concentric spherical shells of radius R, 2R and 3R have charges Q, and
3
–2Q respectively. Q = 1.6 × 10 C. The intermediate shell is grounded. Find the number of electrons that will
–6
flow through the connecting wire. Also tell whether, the electrons flow into the earth or into the shell.
6. A nonuniform string of mass 45 kg and length 1.5 m has a variable linear mass density given by =
kx, where x is the distance from one end of the string and k is a constant. Tension in the string is 15
N which is uniform. Find the time (in second) required for a pulse generated at one end of the string to
travel to the other end.
COMPREHENSION
Two blocks A and B of equal masses m kg each are connected by a light thread, which passes over a
massless pulley as shown. Both the blocks lie on wedge of mass m kg. Assume friction to be absent
everywhere and both the blocks to be always in contact with the wedge. The wedge lying over smooth
horizontal surface is pulled towards right with constant acceleration a (m/s 2). (g is acceleration due to
gravity).
7. Normal reaction (in N) acting on block B is

m m m m
(A) (3g + 4a) (B) (3g – 4a) (C) (4g + 3a) (D) (4g – 3a)
5 5 5 5
8. Normal reaction (in N) acting on block A.

m m m m
(A) (3g + 4a) (B) (3g – 4a) (C) (4g + 3a) (D) (4g – 3a)
5 5 5 5
9. The maximum value of acceleration a (in m/s 2) for which normal reactions acting on the block A and
block B are nonzero.
3 4 3 5
(A) g (B) g (C) g (D) g
4 3 5 3
DPPS FILE # 64
Topics :Electrostatics, Gravitation,Work, Power and Energy, Projectile Motion, Elasticity & Viscosity,
Geometrical Optics,Sound Wave, Friction
1. The figure shows a charge q placed inside a cavity in an uncharged

conductor. Now if an external electric field is switched on :
(A) only induced charge on outer surface will redistribute.
(B) only induced charge on inner surface will redistribute.
(C) both induced charge on outer and inner surface will redistribute.
(D) force on charge q placed inside the cavity will change.
2. A certain quarternary star system consists of three stars, each of mass m, moving in same circular orbit
about a stationary central star of mass M. The three identical stars orbit in same sense and are symmetrically
located with respect to each other. Considering gravitational force of all remaining bodies on every star, the
time period of each of three stars is :
r3 r3
r3 r3
(A) 2 G  M  m  (B) 2 G  M  m  (C) 2 (D) 2
  G M  3m G (M  3m)
 3  3
3. Block A in the figure is released from rest when the extension in the spring is x 0. (x 0 < Mg/k). The
maximum downwards displacement of the block is (ther is no friction) :
2Mg Mg
(A)  2x 0 (B)  x0
K 2K
2Mg 2Mg
(C)  x0 (D)  x0
K K
4. Three stones A, B, C are projected from surface of very long inclined plane with equal speeds and
different angles of projection as shown in figure. The incline makes an angle  with horizontal.If HA, HB
and HC are maximum height attained by A, B and C respectively above inclined plane then : (Neglect
air friction)
C
B
(A) HA + HC = HB (B) H2A  HC

2
 HB2 (C) HA + HC = 2HB (D) H2A  HC
2
 2HB2
DPPS FILE # 65
5. When a ball is released from rest in a very long column of viscous liquid, its downward acceleration is ‘a’(just
after release). Then its acceleration when it has acquired two third of the maximum velocity :
a 2a a
3 3 6
6. An isosceles trapezium of reflecting material of refractive index

2 and dimension of sides being 5cm, 5cm,
10cm and 5cm. The angle of minimum deviation by this when light is incident from air and emerges in air is:
1
(A) 22  (B) 45° (C) 30° (D) 60°
2
7. A triangular medium has varying refracting index n = n0 + ax, where x is the distance (in cm) along x–axis
4
from origin and n0 = . A ray is incident normally on face OA at the mid–point of OA. The range of a so that
3
light does not escape through face AB when it falls first time on the face AB (OA = 4 cm, OB = 3 cm and
AB = 5 cm) : (Surrounding medium is air)
1 2 1
(A) a > (B) a > (C) a > (D) None of these
9 9 3
8. A string 25 cm long fixed at both ends and having a mass of 2.5 g is under tension. A pipe closed from one
end is 40 cm long. When the string is set vibrating in its first overtone and the air in the pipe in its fundamental
frequency, 8 beats per second are heard. It is observed that decreasing the tension in the string decreases
the beat frequency. If the speed of sound in air is 320 m/s. Find tension in the string.
9. Two blocks of masses 20 kg and 10 kg are kept or a rough horizontal floor. The coefficient of friction
between both blocks and floor is = 0.2. The surface of contact of both blocks are smooth. Horizontal
forces of magnitude 20 N and 60 N are applied on both the blocks as shown in figure. Match the
statement in column-I with the statements in column-II.
F1=20N
20kg 10kg F2=60N
left
=0.2 right
rough horizontal floor
Column-I Column-II
(A) Frictional force acting on block of mass 10 kg (p) has magnitude 20 N
(B) Frictional force acting on block of mass 20 kg (q) has magnitude 40 N
(C) Normal reaction exerted by 20 kg block on 10 kg block (r) is zero
(D) Net force on system consisting of 10 kg block (s) is towards right (in horizontal
and 20 kg block direction).
DPPS FILE # 66
Topics : Gravitation ,Work, Power and Energy, Elasticity & Viscosity, Sound Wave, Relative Motion,
Electrostatics.
1. The orbital velocity of an artificial satellite in a circular orbit just above the earth’s surface is V0. The
value of orbital velocity for another satellite orbiting at an altitude of half of earth’s radius is
3 3 2  2
(A)   V0 (B) V0 (C) V0 (D)   V0
2 2 3 3
2. The potential energy (in joules) of a particle of mass 1kg moving in a plane is given by V = 3x + 4y, the
position coordinates of the point being x and y, measured in metres. If the particle is at rest at (6, 4) ; then
(A) its acceleration is of magnitude 5m/s2
(B) its speed when it crosses the y–axis is 10m/s
(C) it crosses the y-axis (x = 0) at y = –4
(D) it moves in a striaght line passing through the origin (0, 0)
3. A wire of uniform cross section is hanging vertically and due to its own weight its length changes. There is a
point ‘C’ on the wire such that change in length AC is equal to the change in length BC. Points A, B & C are
AC
shown in figure. Find .
BC
u
4. A wall is moving with velocity u and a source of sound moves with velocity in the same direction as shown
2
in the figure. Assuming that the sound travels with velocity 10u. Find the ratio of incident sound wavelength
on the wall to the reflected sound wavelength by the wall.
5.  
Two particles P and Q are moving with velocities of ( î  ĵ ) and  î  2 ĵ respectively. At time t = 0, P
 
is at origin and Q is at a point with position vector 2 î  ĵ . Find the equation of the path of Q with
respect to P.
DPPS FILE # 67
6. A cone of mass 'm' falls from a height 'h' and penetrates into sand. The resistance force R of the sand is given
by R = kx2. If the cone penetrates upto a distance x = d where d <  , then find the value of 'k'.
COMPREHENSION
A solid, conducting sphere of radius 6 cm carries a charge 3nC. This sphere is located centrally inside
a thick, conducting sphere with an inner radius of 18 cm and an outer radius of 27 cm. The hollow
sphere is also given a charge 3nC.Three points A, B and C are marked on the surfaces as shown.
Conducting shell
27cm
18cm 6cm
A
B
C
7. Which one of the following figures shows a qualitatively accurate sketch of the electric field lines in
and around this system ?
(A) (B) (C) (D)
8. Suppose VA,VB and VC are potentials at points A,B and C respectively then values of potential differences
VC – VB and VB – VA respectively are :
(A) 0 V and – 300 V (B) 0 V and 300 V
(C) 450 V and 150 V (D) 0 V and – 150 V
9. Suppose the shell is given additional charge 3nC. The potential difference VB – VA will become :
(A) –100 V (B) –200 V (C) 300 V (D) –300 V
DPPS FILE # 68
Topics : Friction, Electrostatics, Geometrical Optics, Relative Motion, Rigid Body Dynamics, Newton’s Law
of Motion
1. A plank is held at an angle  to the horizontal (Fig.) on two fixed supports A and B. The plank can slide
against the supports (without friction) because of its weight Mg. With what acceleration and in what direction,
a man of mass m should move so that the plank does not move.
 m  M
(A) g sin   1   down the incline (B) g sin   1   down the incline
 M  m
 m  M
(C) g sin   1   up the incline (D) g sin   1   up the incline
 M  m 
2. Two small electric dipoles each of dipole moment p î are situated at (0, 0, 0) and (r, 0, 0). The electric
 r 3r 
potential at a point  2 , 2 , 0  is :
 
 
p p p
(A) (B) 0 (C) (D)
4 0 r 2 2 0 r 2 8 0 r 2
3. A mango tree is at the bank of a river and one of the branch of tree extends over the river. A tortoise lives
in river. A mango falls just above the tortoise. The acceleration of the mango falling from tree appearing
to the tortoise is (Refractive index of water is 4/3 and the tortoise is stationary)
3g 4g
(A) g (B) (C) (D) None of these
4 3
4. A balloon is ascending vertically with an acceleration of 0.4 m/s 2. Two stones are dropped from it at an
interval of 2 sec. Find the distance between them 1.5 sec. after the second stone is released.
(g = 10 m/sec 2)
DPPS FILE # 69
COMPREHENSION
In the given figure F=10N, R=1m mass of the body is 2kg and moment of inertia of the body about an axis
passing through O and perpendicular to plane of body is 4kgm2. O is the centre of mass of the body.
F F
O
R
2R
5. Find the frictional force acting on the body if it performs pure rolling.
20 10 5
(A) (B) (C) (D) None of these
3 3 3
6. The kinetic energy of the body in the above question after 3 seconds will be.
(A) 75J (B) 80J (C) 82J (D) 85J
7. If ground is smooth, then the total kinetic energy after 3 seconds will be :
(A) 105.5J (B) 112.5J (C) 115.5J (D) None of these
8. In the column-I, a system is described in each option and corresponding time period is given in the
column-II. Suitably match them.
Column-I Column-II
2
(A) A simple pendulum of length '' oscillating (p) T = 2 3g
with small amplitude in a lift moving down
with retardation g/2.

(B) A block attached to an end of a vertical (q) T = 2 g
spring, whose other end is fixed to the ceiling
of a lift, stretches the spring by length '' in
equilibrium. It's time period when lift moves
up with an acceleration g/2 is
2
(C) The time period of small oscillation of a (r) T = 2 g
uniform rod of length '' smoothly hinged at
one end. The rod oscillates in vertical plane.

(D) A cubical block of edge '' and specific (s) T = 2 2g
gravity 1/2 is in equilibrium with some volume inside

water filled in a large fixed container. Neglect viscous
forces and surface tension. The time period of small
oscillations of the block in vertical direction is
DPPS FILE # 70
Topics : Circular Motion, Gravitation, Rigid Body Dynamics, Work, Power and Energy, Center of Mass,
Electrostatics.
A
1. A particle is projected along a horizontal field whose coefficient of friction varies as  = where r is the
r2
distance from the origin in meters and A is a positive constant. The initial distance of the particle is 1 m from
the origin and its velocity is radially outwards. The minimum initial velocity at this point so that particle never
stops is :
(A)  (B) 2 gA (C) 2g A (D) 4 gA
2. An automobile enters a turn of radius R. If the road is banked at an angle of 450 and the coefficient of
friction is 1, the minimum and maximum speed with which the automobile can negotiate the turn
without skidding is:
rg rg
(A) and rg (B) and rg
2 2
rg
(C) and 2 rg (D) 0 and infinite
2
3. A hollow cylinder has mass M, outside radius R2 and inside radius R1. Its moment of inertia about an axis
parallel to its symmetry axis and tangential to the outer surface is equal to :
M M
(A) (R22 + R12) (B) (R22 – R12)
2 2
M M
(C) (R2 + R1)2 (D) (3R22 + R12)
4 2
4. In the Figure, the ball A is released from rest when the spring is at its natural length. For the block B,
of mass M to leave contact with the ground at some stage, the minimum mass of A must be:
(A) 2 M (B) M
(C) M/2 (D) A function of M and the force constant of the spring.
DPPS FILE # 71
5. Two blocks A and B each of mass m are connected to a massless spring of natural length L and spring
constant K. The blocks are initially resting on a smooth horizontal floor with the spring at its natural
length as shown in the figure. A third identical block C also of mass m moves on the floor with speed v
along the line joining A and B and collides elastically with A, then :
(A) the K.E. of the AB system at maximum compression of the spring is zero
(B) the K.E. of the AB system at maximum compression of the spring is mv2/4
(C) the maximum compression of the spring is v ( m / K)
(D) the maximum compression of the spring is v ( m / 2 K)
COMPREHENSION
The sketch below shows cross-sections of equipotential surfaces between two charged conductors
that are shown in solid black. Some points on the equipotential surfaces near the conductors are
marked as A,B,C,........ . The arrangement lies in air. (Take 0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2/N m 2]
6. Surface charge density of the plate is equal to

(A) 8.85 × 10–10 C/m 2 (B) –8.85 × 10–10 C/m 2
2
(C) 17.7 × 10 C/m
–10
(D) –17.7 × 10–10 C/m 2
7. A positive charge is placed at B. When it is released :

(A) no force will be exerted on it. (B) it will move towards A.
(C) it will move towards C. (D) it will move towards E.
8. How much work is required to slowly move a – 1C charge from E to D ?

(A) 2 × 10–5 J (B) –2 × 10–5 J
(C) 4 × 10 J
–5
(D) –4 × 10–5 J
DPPS FILE # 72
Topics : Center of Mass, Rigid Body Dynamics, String Wave, Fluid, Electromagnetic Induction, Rigid
Body Dynamics
Subjective Questions ('–1' negative marking) Q.4 (4 marks 5 min.) [4, 5]
Match the Following (no negative marking) (2 × 4) Q.8 (8 marks 10 min.) [8, 10]
1. Particle 'A' moves with speed 10 m/s in a frictionless circular fixed horizontal pipe of radius 5 m and
strikes with 'B' of double mass that of A. Coefficient of restitution is 1/2 and particle 'A' starts its
journey at t = 0. The time at which second collision occurs is :
 2 5
(A) s (B) s (C) s (D) 4  s
2 3 2
2. A solid cylinder is sliding on a smooth horizontal surface with velocity v 0 without rotation. It enters on
the rough surface. After that it has travelled some distance, select the correct statement:
v0
////////////////////
(A) Friction force increases its translational kinetic energy.

(B) Friction force increases its rotational kinetic energy.
(C) Friction force increases its total mechanical energy.
(D) Friction force increases its angular momentum about an axis passing through point of contact of
the cylinder and the surface.
3. Equation of a standing wave is generally expressed as y = 2A sint coskx. In the equation, quantity /k
represents
(A) the transverse speed of the particles of the string.
(B) the speed of either of the component waves.
(C) the speed of the standing wave.
(D) a quantity that is independent of the properties of the string.
4. A block of density 2000 kg/m3 and mass 10 kg is suspended by a spring of stiffness 100 N/m. The other end
of the spring is attached to a fixed support. The block is completely submerged in a liquid of density 1000
kg/m3 . If the block is in equilibrium position.
(A) the elongation of the spring is 1 cm.
(B) the magnitude of buoyant force acting on the block is 50 N.
(C) the spring potential energy is 12.5 J.
(D) magnitude of spring force on the block is greater than the weight of the block.
DPPS FILE # 73
COMPREHENSION
In a certain region, there are non-uniform electrical potential (Ve) as well as gravitational potential (Vg).
The electrical potential varies only with x as shown in figure (i), and the gravitational potential varies
only with y as shown in figure (ii).
Consider a particle of mass 200 kg and charge 20 C in this field.

5. If the particle is released from point (5cm, 15 cm), it will try to move toward
(A) +x direction and +y direction (B) +x direction and – y direction
(C) – x direction, +y direction (D) – x direction, – y direction
6. What will be acceleration of the particle at point (25, 35)
(A) (2 î  ĵ ) × 10–2 m/sec 2 (B) (2 î  ĵ ) × 10–2 m/sec 2
(C) ( 2 î  ĵ ) × 10–2 m/sec 2 (D) (3 î  2 ĵ ) × 10–2 m/sec 2
7. Minimum work required to bring the particle from (5, 15) to (25, 35) is :
(A) 0.2 J (B) 0.1 J (C) – 0.2 J (D) – 0.1 J
8. Match the columns : (All the rigid bodies lie on a smooth horizontal plane. No object is hinged. J is impulse
of an impulsive force. Initially system is at rest.)
Column-I Column-II
(A) l (p) Translation occurs

M rod is
mass less
J
(impulse)
(B) (uniform mass distribution) (q) Rotation occurs
M
rod is
(C) mass less (r) Angular momentum (about centre of mass )increases
M
(D) (uniform mass distribution) (s) Linear momentum increases

J
(t) Angular momentum will be conserved about more

than one points in space.
DPPS FILE # 74
Topics : Elasticity & Viscosity, Electrostatics, Geometrical Optics, String Wave, Rigid Body Dynamics

T
1. If  represents the coefficient of viscosity and T the surface tension, then the dimension of is same as that of:

(A) length (B) mass (C) time (D) speed
2. The elongation in a metallic rod hinged at one end and rotating in a horizontal plane becomes four
times of the initial value. The angular velocity of rotation becomes :
(A) two times the initial value (B) half of initial value
(C) one third of initial value (D) four times the initial value.
3. In the figure shown, blocks P and Q are in contact but do not stick to each other. The lower face of P
behaves as a plane mirror. The springs are in their natural lengths. The system is released from rest.
Then the distance between P and Q when Q is at the lowest point first time will be
2mg 4mg 3mg

(A) (B) (C) (D) 0
K K K
4. In the above question, the velocity of the image of Q in plane mirror of block P with respect to ground
when Q is at the lowest point first time is :
2mg2 4mg2 3mg2

(A) (B) (C) (D) 0
K K K
5. The length, tension, diameter and density of a wire B are double than the corresponding quantities for
another stretched wire A. Then (both are fixed at the ends)
1
(A) Fundamental frequency of B is times that of A.
2 2
1
(B) The velocity of wave in B is times that of velocity in A.
2
(C) The fundamental frequency of A is equal to the third overtone of B.
(D) The velocity of wave in B is half that of velocity in A.
DPPS FILE # 75
6. A sample of a liquid has an initial volume of 1.5 L. The volume is reduced by 0.2 mL, when the pressure
increases by 140 kPa. What is the bulk modulus of the liquid.
COMPREHENSION
A square frame of mass m is made of four identical uniform rods of length L each. This frame is placed
on an inclined plane such that one of its diagonals is parallel to the inclined plane as shown in figure, and
is released.
7. The moment of inertia of square frame about the axis of the frame is :
mL2 2mL2 4mL2 mL2

(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 3 3 12
8. The frictional force acting on the frame just after the release of the frame assuming that it does not slide
is :
mg sin  2mg sin  3mg sin  2mg sin 
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 7 5 5
9. The acceleration of the center of square frame just after the release of the frame assuming that it does
not slide is :
g sin  2 g sin  3 g sin  2 g sin 
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 7 5 5
DPPS FILE # 76
Topics : Elasticity & Viscosity, Geometrical Optics, String Wave, Friction, Simple Harmonic Motion, Rigid
Body Dynamics
1. A spherical ball of mass 4m, density and radius r is attached to a pulley-mass system as shown in figure.

The ball is released in a liquid of coefficient of viscosity and density (< ). If the length of the liquid column
2
is sufficiently long, the terminal velocity attained by the ball is given by (assume all pulleys to be massless
and string as massless and inextensible) :
2 r 2 ( 2  )g 2 r 2 (   2)g
(A) (B)
9  9 
2 r 2 (   4 )g 2 r 2 (   3)g
(C) (D)
9  9 
2. Which of the following relations is correct for a spherical mirror if a point object is kept on the principal axis.
[‘P’ is pole, ‘C’ is centre object is at point ‘O’, image is at point ‘’]
OP P OP P PC P O P
(A) = (B)  (C)  (D) 
OC C C OC PO PC CP CO
3. A travelling wave y = A sin (k x  t + ) passes from a heavier string to a lighter string. The reflected wave
has amplitude 0.5 A. The junction of the strings is at x = 0. The equation of the reflected wave is:
(A) y  = 0.5 A sin (k x +  t + ) (B) y  =  0.5 A sin (k x +  t + )
(C) y  =  0.5 A sin ( t  k x  ) (D) y  = – 0.5 A sin (k x +  t  )
DPPS FILE # 77
4. Figure shows an ideal pulley block of mass m = 1 kg, resting on a rough ground with friction coefficient µ =
1.5. Another block of mass M = 11 kg is hanging as shown. When system is released it is found that the
magnitude of acceleration of point P on string is a. Find value of 4a in m/s2. (Use g = 10 m/s2)
5. A 900 kg elevator hangs by a steel cable for which the allowable stress is 1.15 × 108 N/m2. What is the
minimum diameter required if the elevator accelerates upward at 1.5 m/s2. Take g = 10m/s2 and leave your
answer in terms of .
6. A 40 kg mass, hanging at the end of a rope of length , oscillates in a vertical plane with an angular amplitude
of 0. What is the tension in the rope, when it makes an angle  with the vertical ? If the breaking strength of
the rope is 80 kg f, what is the maximum angular amplitude  with which the mass can oscillate without the
rope breaking ?
COMPREHENSION
A uniform bar of length 6 a & mass 8 m lies on a smooth horizontal table. Two point masses m & 2 m
moving in the same horizontal plane with speeds 2 v andv respectively strike the bar as shown & stick
to the bar after collision.
7. Velocity of the centre of mass of the system is

v 2v
(A) (B) v (C) (D) Zero
2 3
8. Angular velocity of the rod about centre of mass of the system is
v v v v
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5a 15a 3a 10a
9. Total kinetic energy of the system, just after the collision is
3 3 3
(A) mv2 (B) mv2 (C) mv2 (D) 3 mv2
5 25 15
DPPS FILE # 78
Topics : Surface Tension, Elasticity & Viscosity, Geometrical Optics, Circular Motion, Rigid Body Dynamics
1. A capillary tube with inner cross-section in the form of a square of side a is dipped vertically in a liquid
of density  and surface tension  which wet the surface of capillary tube with angle of contact . The
approximate height to which liquid will be raised in the tube is : (Neglect the effect of surface tension at
the corners capillary tube)
2 cos  4 cos  8 cos 
(A) ag (B) ag (C) ag (D) None of these
2. Four uniform wires of the same material are stretched by the same force. The dimensions of wire are as
given below. The one which has the minimum elongation has :
(A) radius 3mm, length 3m (B) radius 0.5 mm, length 0.5 m
(C) radius 2mm, length 2m (D) radius 3mm, length 2m
3. A space 2.5 cm wide between two large plane surfaces is filled with oil. Force required to drag a very
thin plate of area 0.5 m 2 just midway the surfaces at a speed of 0.5 m/sec is 1N. The coefficient of
viscosity in kg–s/m 2 is :
(A) 5 × 10–2 (B) 2.5 × 10–2 (C) 1 × 10–2 (D) 7.5 × 10–2
4. A glass beaker has diameter 4cm wide at the bottom. An observer observes the edge of bottom when beaker
is empty as shown in figure. When the beaker is completely filled with liquid of refractive index n = 5 / 2 , he
can just see the centre of bottom, then the height of glass beaker is :
(A) 4 cm (B) 5 / 2 cm
(C) 16 cm (D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 79
5. The given figure shows a small mass connected to a string, which is attached to a vertical post. If the
mass is released from rest when the string is horizontal as shown, the magnitude of the total acceleration
of the mass as a function of the angle  is
(A) 2 g sin (B) 2 g cos (C) g 3 cos2   1 (D) g 3 sin2   1
6. A 40 cm long wire having a mass 3.2 gm and area of cross section 1 mm2 is stretched between the support
40.05 cm apart. In its fundamental mode, it vibrates with a frequency 1000/64 Hz. Find the young’s modulus
of the wire in the form X × 108 N/m2 and fill value of X.
COMPREHENSION
A uniform wheel is released on a rough horizontal floor after imparting it an initial horizontal velocity v0
and angular velocity 0 as shown in the figure below. Point O is the centre of mass of the wheel and point
P is its instantaneous point of contact with the ground. The radius of wheel is r and its radius of gyration
about O is k. Coefficient of friction between wheel and ground is . A is a fixed point on the ground.
7. Which of the following is conserved ?

(A) linear momentum of wheel
(B) Angular momentum of wheel about O
(C) Angular momentum of wheel about A
(D) none of these
8. If the wheel comes to permanent rest after sometime, then :
0 k 2 0 r 2  k2 
(A) v0 = 0r (B) v0 = (C) v0 = (D) V0 = 0  r  
r R  r 
9. In above question, distance travelled by centre of mass of the wheel before it stops is -
2 2
v 0  r 2  v0
2
v0  k2 
(A) 2g  1  2  (B) (C) 2g
1  
(D) None of these
 k  2g 
 r 2 
DPPS FILE # 80
Topics : Circular Motion, Rigid Body Dynamics, Surface Tension, Geometrical Optics, Gravitation
1. With keys k1 and k2 closed : if PS < QR then
B
P Q
k1
A C
G
R S
k2
D
(A) VB = VD (B) VB > VD


(C) VB < VD (D) VB V
 D
2. A ring of mass m and radius R has three particle attached to the ring and it is rolling on the surface as
shown in the figure. The ratio of kinetic energy of the system to the kinetic of the particle of mass 2m
will be (speed of centre of ring is V0 and slipping is absent) :
2 1 3 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 2 1 3
3. A soap film is created in a small wire frame as shown in the figure. The
sliding wire of mass m is given a velocity u to the right and assume that u
is small enough so that film does not break. Plane of the film is horizontal
and surface tension is T. Then time to regain the original position of wire is
equal to :
um T
(A) (B)
T um
mu2
(C) (D) It will never regain original position
T
DPPS FILE # 81
4. A tube of length  open at only one end is cut into two equal halves. The sixth overtone frequency of piece
closed at one end equals to sixth overtone frequency of piece open at both ends. The radius of cross–section
of tube is :
 5  5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
12 72 24 24
5
(E)
48
5. A ray of light is incident from air to a glass rod at point A the angle of incidence being 450. The minimum value
of refractive index of the material of the rod so that T.I.R. takes place at B is _____.
COMPREHENSION
Consider a star and two planet system. The star has mass M. The planet A and B have the same mass
m, radius a and they revolve around the star in circular orbits of radius r and 4r respectively (M > > m,
r > > a). Planet A has intelligent life, and the people of this planet have achieved a very high degree of
technological advance. They wish to shift a geostationary satellite of their own planet to a geostationary
orbit of planet B. They achieve this through a series of high precision maneuvers in which the satellite
never has to apply brakes and not a single joule of energy is wasted. S1 is a geostationary satellite of
planet A and S2 is a geostationary satellite of planet B. Neglect interaction between A and B, S1 and S2,
S1 and B & S2 and A.
S1
A
S2
B
star
6. If the time period of the satellite in geostationary orbit of planet A is T, then its time period in geostationary
orbit of planet B is :
(A) T (B) 4T (C) 8 T (D) Data insufficient
1/ 3
m
7. If the radius of the geostationary orbit in planet A is given by rG = r   , then the time in which the
M
geostationary satellite will complete 1 revolution is
I. 1 planet year = time in which planet revolves around the star
II. 1 planet day = time in which planet revolves about its axis.
(A) I (B) II (C) both I and II (D) neither I nor II.
8. If planet A and B, both complete one revolution about their own axis in the same time, then the energy
needed to transfer the satellite of mass m 0 from planet A to planet B is.
Gmm 0 GMm 0 3GMm 0
(A) 4r (B) 4r (C) 8r (D) Zero
DPPS FILE # 82
Topics : Gravitation, Elasticity & Viscosity, Geometrical Optics, Sound Wave, Rigid Body Dynamics,
Current Electricity
1. In a binary star system one star has thrice the mass of other. The stars rotate about their common centre of mass
then:
(A) Both stars have same angular momentum about common centre of mass.
(B) Both stars have angular momentum of same magnitude about common centre of mass.
(C) Both stars have same angular speeds.
(D) Both stars have same linear speeds.
2. A thin rod of negligible mass and area of cross-section 2 × 10–6 m2, suspended vertically from one end, has
a length of 0.5 m at 2000C. The rod is cooled to 00C, but prevented from contracting by attaching a mass at
the lower end. The value of this mass is : (Young's modulus = 1011 N/m2, Coefficient of linear expansion 10–
5
K–1 and g = 10 m/s2):
(A) 20 kg (B) 30 kg (C) 40 kg (D) 50 kg
3. A glass sphere with 10 cm radius has a 5 cm radius concentric spherical hole. A narrow beam of
parallel light from outside is incident on the sphere . Find the final image position with respect to the
last surface.The refractive index of the glass is 1.5 .
4. A sound wave propagating along x-axis, in medium  of density 1 = 1.5 kg/m 3 is transmitted to a
medium  of density 2 = 3kg/m 3 as shown. The equation of excess pressure developed by wave in
medium  and that in medium  respectively are
 x 
p1 = 4 × 10–2 cos   t   (in S units)
 400 
 x 
p2 = 3 × 10–2 cos   t   (in S units)
 1200 
If the intensity of transmitted wave is 2 (wave in medium ) and intensity of incident wave is 1 (wave in
61
medium ), then find the value of  .
2
DPPS FILE # 83
5. A uniform thin rod of mass 'm' and length '3' is released from rest from horizontal position as shown.
When it passes through the vertical line AD, it gets broken at point 'C' due to some reason. Find the
angle (in radian) rotated by rod BC till its centre of mass passes through the horizontal line PQ from the
instant of breakage. (g = 10 m/s 2) (hinge is smooth)
COMPREHENSION
Consider a battery with a large internal resistance (r )  10 k. If we
connect a light resistance R (R << r) across it, current will be

E E
 = constant (Independent from external resistance R)
r R r
So if we put any light resistance across it, current in it would not change,
E J
and will be constant ( ) A B
r
So a battery with a large internal resistance is equivalent to a constant
current source (A source providing a constant current)
This concept is used in potentiometer circuit for comparing two resistances

R and X, as shown in figure.
Here a battery with large internal resistance supply a cosntant current (i) to either R or X. If it is connected
to R = 10  potential drop across it will be iR, and the balance length is found to be 58.3 cm. If it is
connected to X (unknown), Potential drop across it will be iX and the balance length is
coming = 68.5 cm.
6. Estimate the unknown resistance X

(A) 11.25 (B) 11.75 (C) 12.25 (D) 12.50
7. If you fail to find any balanced point, as we slide the jocky along A B. What may be the reason.
(A) Resistance of potentiometer wire may be large.
(B) Emf of the primary cell (V) may be very high
(C) potential drop across R or X may exceed V
(D) Emf of the source (E), may be very large.
8. In the previous question, what can we do to get the balance point

(A) Increase V
(B) Reduce E
(C) Increase the internal resistance (r) connected with E
(D) Use a longer potentiometer wire
DPPS FILE # 84
Topics : Current Electricity, Elasticity & Viscosity, Geometrical Optics, Gravitation, Sound Wave, Rigid
Body Dynamics
1. In the given circuit all resistors are of R ohm each. If a wire is

connected between C and B, then the ratio of equivalent resistance
between AB of original circuit to new circuit formed is:
(A) 1 (B) 3 (C) 1/3 (D) 1/2
2. A sphere of mass m and radius r is projected in a gravity free space with speed v. If coefficient of viscosity is
1
, the distance travelled by the body before it stops is :
6
mv 2 mv mv
(A) 2 r (B) (C) (D) none of these
r r
3. An object AB is placed parallel and close to the optical axis between focus F and centre of curvature C of a
converging mirror of focal length f as shown in figure.
(A) Image of A will be closer than that of B from the mirror. A B
(B) Image of AB will be parallel to the optical axis.
(C) Image of AB will be straight line inclined to the optical axis. C F
(D) Image of AB will not be straight line.

4. A satellite is moving around the earth in a circular orbit and in this orbit magnitude of its acceleration is ‘a1’.
Now a rocket is fired in the direction of motion of satellite from the satellite due to which its speed instantaneously
becomes half of initial, just after the rocket is fired acceleration of satellite have magnitude ‘a2’ . Then fill the
a1
ratio a in answer sheet (Assume there is no external force other then the gravitational force of earth before
2
and after the firing of rocket from the satellite)
5. A bird is singing on a tree and a man is hearing at a distance ‘r’ from the bird. Calculate the displacement of
the man towards the bird so that the loudness heard by man increases by 20 dB. [ Assume that the motion
of man is along the line joining the bird and the man]
COMPREHENSION
A uniform rod AB of length '' is thrown upwards such that initially AB is
horizontal, velocity of centre is 'u' upwards and angular velocity '' is
such that velocity of 'B' at this moment is zero. The values of '' and 'u'
are also such that the rod becomes vertical first time at the moment
when the centre of rod reaches the highest point of its motion.
6. The value of '' in terms of 'u' and '' is equal to

u 2u u u
(A) (B) (C) (D)
  2 4
7. The value of 'u' is equal to
g g g
(A) (B) g (C) (D)
4 2 2
8. The angular acceleration of the rod during the motion is
g 2g u2
(A) (B) (C) 0 (D)
  
DPPS FILE # 85
Topics : Circular Motion, Relative Motion, Rectilinear Motion, Gravitation, Electrostatics, Geometrical
Optics
Match the Following (no negative marking) (2 × 4) Q. 8 (8 marks, 10 min.) [8, 10]
1. A section of fixed smooth circular track of radius R in vertical plane is

shown in the figure. A block is released from position A and leaves the
track at B. The radius of curvature of its trajectory when it just leaves the
track at B is:
R
(A) R (B)
4
R
(C) (D) none of these
2
2. A cyclist observes a passenger in a bus. He finds that the passenger

closed his glass window displacing 20 cm in forward direction with constant
speed in 1 sec. Bus overtakes the cyclist in 3 sec. Initially he was at the
middle of the bus as shown in the figure. Length of the bus is 18 m. Both
cyclist and bus are moving with constant speed in the same direction.
Then velocity of the glass window with respect to cyclist was:
(A) 0.2 m/s (B) 2.8 m/s (C) 3.2 m/s (D) 3 m/s
3. A particle is moving rectilinearly so that its acceleration is given as a = 3t2 + 1 m/s 2.Its initial velocity is
zero.
(A) The velocity of the particle at t=1 sec will be 2m/s.
(B) The displacement of the particle in 1 sec will be 2m.
(C) The particle will continue to move in positive direction.
(D) The particle will come back to its starting point after some time.
4. A particle is projected from point A, that is at a distance 4R from the centre of the earth, with speed V1
in a direction making 30° with the line joining the centre of the earth and point A, as shown. Find the
speed V1 if particle passes grazing the surface of the earth. Consider gravitational interaction only
GM X
between these two. (use = 6.4 × 107 m 2/s 2) Express you answer in the form m/s and fill value
R 2
of X. V
30° 1
4R
R
V2
DPPS FILE # 86
COMPREHENSION
A point charge q1 = +6e fixed at the origin of a coordinate system, and another point charge q2 = – 10e
is fixed at x = 8 nm , y = 0. The locus of all points in the xy plane for which potential V= 0 (other than
infinity) is a circle centered on the x-axis , as shown.
y
x
xc q1 q2
Circle
V=0
5. Radius R of the circle is

(A) 3nm (B) 6nm
(C) 7.5nm (D) 9nm
6. x-coordinate of the centre of the circle is -

(A) -2nm (B) -3nm (C) -4.5nm (D) -7.5nm
7. The potential at the centre of the circle is

(A) 0.32V (B) 0.77V (C) 1.2V (D) -1.2V
8. An object O (real) is placed at focus of an equi-biconvex lens as shown in

figure 1. The refractive index of lens is  = 1.5 and the radius of curvature of either surface of lens is R. The
lens is surrounded by air. In each statement of column I some changes are made to situation given above
and information regarding final image formed as a result is given in column-II. The distance between lens and
object is unchanged in all statements of column-I. Match
the statements in column-I with resulting image in column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) If the refractive index of the lens is (p) final image is real
doubled (that is, made 2 ) then
(B) If the radius of curvature is doubled (q) final image is virtual
(that is, made 2R) then
(C) If a glass slab of refractive index  = 1.5 (r) final image becomes smaller in
is introduced between the object size in comparison to size of image
and lens as shown, then before the change was made
R R
slab
(D) If the left side of lens is filled with a medium (s) final image is of same size of object.
of refractive index  = 1.5 as shown, then
R R
air
O
DPPS FILE # 87
Topics : Rectilinear Motion, Relative Motion, Circular Motion, Sound Wave, Electrostatics
1. A particle moves along x-axis with initial position x = 0. Its velocity

varies with x-coordinate as shown in graph. The acceleration 'a' of this
particle varies with x as
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2. A coin is released inside a lift at a height of 2 m from the floor of the lift. The height of the lift is
10 m. The lift is moving with an acceleration of 9 m/s2 downwards. The time after which the coin will strike
with the lift is : (g = 10 m/s2)
4 2
(A) 4 s (B) 2 s (C) s (D) s
21 11
3. A particle is projected from ground with an initial velocity 20 m/sec making an angle 60° with horizontal. If R1
and R2 are radius of curvatures of the particle at point of projection and highest point respectively, then find
R1
the value of R .
2
4. A point source of sound emiting sound of frequency 700 Hz and observer starts moving from a point along
mutually perpendicular directions with velocity 20 m/s and 15 m/s respectively. If change in observed frequency
by observer is 10x Hz then calculate 'x'. [speed of sound in 334 m/sec] y
+ –––
COMPREHENSION +++ ––
++
––
++
A thin ring of radius R metres is placed in x-y plane such that its
++++++++
––––––
centre lies on origin. The half ring in region x< 0 carries uniform linear x´ x
charge density +C/m and the remaining half ring in region x> 0
+ –
+
carries uniform linear charge density –C/m.

––
++
+
–
++
++++ ––
–––
R
5. Then the electric potential (in volts) at point P whose coordinates are (0m, + m) is y´
2
1  1 
(A) (B) 0 (C) 4 4 (D) cannot be determined
4 o 2 o
R
6. Then the direction of electric field at point P whose coordinates are (0m, + m) is
2
(A) Along positive x-direction (B) Along negative x-direction
(C) Along negative y-direction (D) None of these
7. Then the dipole moment of the ring in C–m is

(A) – (2R2) î (B) (2R2) î (C) – (4R2) î (D) (4R2) î
DPPS FILE # 88
8. Match the column :
(A) (p) Optical power will be positive
If 2 > 1
(B) (q) Optical power will be negative
If 2 > 1
(C) (r) System will converge a parallel beam of light incident on it
If 2 < 1
(D) (s) Focal length will be positive
(t) Focal length will be negative
DPPS FILE # 89
Topics : Electrostatics, Rectilinear Motion, Relative Motion, Simple Harmonic Motion

1. Two infinitely large charged planes having uniform surface charge density + and – are placed along x-
y plane and yz plane respectively as shown in the figure. Then the nature of electric lines of forces in
x-z plane is given by :
z –
+ x
z z z z
x x x x
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2. A point charge placed on the axis of a uniformly charged disc experiences a force f due to the disc. If the
charge density on the disc is  , the electric flux through the disc, due to the point charge will be :
2f f f2 f
(A) (B) (C) (D)
 2  
3. A particle moves along x-axis in positive direction. Its acceleration 'a' is given as a = cx + d, where x
denotes the x-coordinate of particle, c and d are positive constants. For velocity-position graph of
particle to be of type as shown in figure, the value of speed of particle at x = 0 should be.
4d 2 d2 2d2 8d2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
c c c c
4. P is a point moving with constant speed 10 m/s such that its velocity vector
always maintains an angle 60° with line OP as shown in figure (O is a fixed
point in space). The initial distance between O and P is 100 m. After what time
shall P reach O.
(A) 10 sec. (B) 15 sec. (C) 20 sec. (D) 20 3 sec
DPPS FILE # 90
COMPREHENSION
A solid cylinder attached with a horizontal massless spring (see figure) can roll without slipping along a
horizontal surface. If the system is released from rest at a position in which spring is stretched by 0.3 m.
5. Period of oscillation of c.o.m of cylinder is
M 3M 2M M
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D) 2
k 2k 3k 2k
6. If k = 20 N/m, Rotational K.E. of cylinder as it passes through mean position is

(A) 0.3 J (B) 0.45 J (C) 0.6 J (D) 0.9 J
7. Translation K.E. of cylinder as it passes through mean position is

(A) 0.3 J (B) 0.45 J (C) 0.6 J (D) 0.9 J
8. instruments are given. In column , there are results corresponding to a given situation. Match the optical
instrument of column  with the results in column .
Column I Column 
(A) concave mirror (p) Parallel rays can be obtained by using point source.
(B) convex mirror (q) Real image can be obtained for real object.
(C) concave lens (r) Virtual and diminished image can be obtained for real
object.
(D) convex lens (s) Real and magnified image can be obtained for real
object.
(t) For a point object moving along optical axis, the image also
moves in the same direction of motion of the object.
DPPS FILE # 91
Topics : Rectilinear Motion, Friction, Circular Motion, Gravitation, Relative Motion, Electrostatics

1. A particle moves along a path ABCD as shown in the figure. Then the magnitude ofnet displacement of the
particle from position A to D is :
(A) 10 m (B) 5 2 m
(C) 9 m (D) 7 2 m
2. A block of mass 20 kg is acted upon by a force F = 30 N at an angle 53° with the horizontal in downward
direction as shown. The coefficient of friction between the block and the horizontal surface is 0.2. The friction
force acting on the block by the ground is (g = 10 m/s2)
F
53°
(A) 40.0 N (B) 30.0 N (C) 18.0 N (D) 44.8 N
3. The wire of the potentiometer has resistance 4 ohms and length 1 m. It is connected to a cell of e.m.f.
2 volts and internal resistance 1 ohm. If a cell of e.m.f. 1.2 volts is balanced by it, the balancing length
will be:
(A) 90 cm (B) 60 cm (C) 50 cm (D) 75 cm
4. If the apparent weight of the bodies at the equator is to be zero, then the earth should rotate with
angular velocity
g 2g
(A) rad/sec (B) rad/sec
R R
g 3g
(C) rad/sec (D) rad/sec
2R 2R
DPPS FILE # 92
5. A particle ‘A’ is rotating in a circle of radius R with centre at O. Another particle B in the same plane is
resting at point Q which is at a distance d from O. The path of B as seen from A is :
(A) (B) (C) (D)
COMPREHENSION
Two uniformly charged fixed rings, each of radius R are separated by a distance of 3r (r > > R). Ring, 1 has
charge Q and ring 2 has net charge 4Q. A neutral point is a point in space at which the value of electric field
intensity is zero, while its value is non zero at any neighbouring point.
Ring 1 Ring 2
+Q +4Q
6. The position of a neutral point N is at a distance of

(A) r from the center of ring 1 towards right (B) 2r from the center of ring 1 towards right
(C) r from the center of ring 1 towards left (D) None of these
7. A negatively charged particle is projected from the center of ring 1 towards the neutral point N with just
enough energy to pass the neutral point. Its subsequent motion will be
(A) Oscillatory (B) SHM
(C) Unidirectional (D) Non oscillatory rectilinear but not unidirectional
8. A positively charged particle is released from the center of ring 2 by slightly pushing it towards left. Its
subsequent motion will be
(A) Oscillatory (B) SHM
(C) Unidirectional (D) Non oscillatory rectilinear but not unidirectional
DPPS FILE # 93
Topics : Electrostatics, Friction, Circular Motion, Current Electricity

1. The figure shows two large, closely placed, parallel, nonconducting
sheets with identical (positive) uniform surface charge densities, and a
sphere with a uniform (positive) volume charge density. Four points
marked as 1, 2, 3 and 4 are shown in the space in between. If E1, E2,
E3 and E4 are magnitude of net electric fields at these points respectively
then :
(A) E1 > E2 > E3 > E4 (B) E1 > E2 > E3 = E4
(C) E3 = E4 > E2 > E1 (D) E1 = E2 = E3 = E4
2. A particle of mass 5 kg is moving on rough fixed inclined plane (making an
angle 30 ° with horizontal) with constant velocity of 5 m/s as shown in the
figure. Find the friction force acting on a body by the inclined plane.
( take g = 10m/s 2)
(A) 25 N (B) 20 N (C) 30 N (D) none of these
3. AB is a potentiometer wire of length L, which is connected to an accumulator.
The potential gradient in AB can be decreased by:
(A) increasing the radius of AB (B) decreasing the radius of AB
(C) increasing a resistance in series with AB (D) all the above.
COMPREHENSION
A high tension wire is at a high potential with respect to a wire which is well grounded called ‘Earth wire’. You
must have seen such wires stretched parallel to roads. There is a high tension wire between two points A and
B, 1 km apart. The distance between HT wire and earth wire is 1 m. The resistance of the HT (and also the
earth wire) is 1 / m. This wire is at a potential of 11 KV at point A w.r. to earth wire., and its is carrying 1A
current which returns back to the generator by through the earth wire. This wire is quite a thick wire. There is
a sign board at a pole over which this wire is stretched reading ‘DANGER, 11 KV’. You might think what
would happen if one touched this wire. Will one feel a shock or not. Well ! it depends on whether the current
through our body exceeds a particular value, which we may call CRITICAL CURRENT.
4. Why is H.T. wire thick wire. Select the most appropriate option
(A) so that more current may flow
(B) so that resistance may be less thereby reducing power loss in the transmission line.
(C) so that it may bear high tension & therefore sag less.
(D) so that when in future population increases, the existing wire may serve the purpose.
5. Consider a bird having effective resistance 10 between its feet sitting on this high tension wire. The dis-
tance between its feet is 10 cm. Find the potential difference between the feet of the bird is approximately.
(A) 0.1 V (B) 1 V (C) 10 V (D) 0.05 V
6. In the above question find the current through the bird.
(A) 10 A (B) 1 A (C) 0.01 A (D) 0.005 A
7. If the potential difference between H.T. and earth wire is 11 kV at point A, find p.d. between these wires
at point B.
(A) 1 KV (B) 2 KV (C) 9 KV (D) 10 KV
8. If the ‘Critical Current’ for the bird is 0.1 A, find the maximum power at 11 KV can be transmitted at
point A so that the bird may not get shock. Assume that the distance between the feet is 10 cm.
(A) 111 KW (B) 11 KW AB (C) 101 KW (D) 110011 KW
DPPS FILE # 94
Topics : Electrostatics, Kinematics, Current Electrisity, Center of Mass, Newton’s Law of Motion
y
1. There exists a uniform electric field in the space as shown. Four points
A, B, C and D are marked which are equidistant from the origin. If B
VA,VB, VC and VD are their potentials respectively, then C A 30° x
E
D
(A) VB > VA > VC > VD (B) VA > VB > VD > VC
(C) VA = VB > VC = VD (D) VB > VC > VA > VD
2. The displacement time graphs of two bodies A and B are shown in figure. The ratio of velocity of A, vA to
velocity of B, vB is :
1
(A) (B) 3
3
1
(C) (D) 3
3
3. In the circuit shown, the galvanometer shows zero current.
The value of resistance R is :
(A) 1  (B) 2 
(C) 4  (D) 9 
4. A disc of mass ‘m’ and radius R is free to rotate in horizontal plane about
a vertical smooth fixed axis passing through its centre. There is a smooth
m
groove along the diameter of the disc and two small balls of mass each
2
are placed in it on either side of the centre of the disc as shown in fig. The
disc is given initial angular velocity 0 and released. The angular speed of
the disc when the balls reach the end of disc is :
0 0 2 0 0
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 3 4
5. A small block A is placed on a smooth inclined wedge B which is placed on a horizontal smooth surface. B
is fixed and A is released from top of B. A slide down along the incline and reaches bottom in time t1. In
second case A is released from top of B, but B is also free to move on horizontal surface. The block A takes
t2 time to reach bottom. Without actually calculating the values of t1 and t2 find which is greater.
COMPREHENSION
A car battery with a 12 V emf and an internal resistance of 0.04  is being charged with a current of 50 A.
6. The potential difference V across the terminals of the battery are
(A) 10 V (B) 12 V (C) 14 V (D) 16 V
7. The rate at which energy is being dissipated as heat inside the battery is :
(A) 100 W (B) 500 W (C) 600 W (D) 700 W
8. The rate of energy conversion from electrical form to chemical form is :
(A) 100 W (B) 500 W (C) 600 W (D) 700 W
DPPS FILE # 95
Topics : Current Electricity, Capacitance, Sound Wave, Kinematics

1. An ammeter and a voltmeter are initially connected in series to a battery of
zero internal resistance. When switch S1 is closed the reading of the
voltmeter becomes half of the initial, whereas the reading of the ammeter
becomes double. If now switch S2 is also closed, then reading of ammeter
becomes:
(A) 3/2 times the initial value
(B) 3/2 times the value after closing S1
(C) 3/4 times the value after closing S1
(D) 3/4 times the initial value
2. A circuit has a section AB shown in the figure. The emf of the source
equals  = 10V, the capacitance as of the capacitors are equal to C1 = 1.0
F and C2 = 2.0 F, the potential difference A  B = 5.0V. The voltage
across capacitor C1 & C2 is respectively :
(A) 10/3 V, 5/3 V (B) 10/3 V, 10/3 V (C) 5/3 V, 5/3 V (D) 0 V,0 V
3. Under similar conditions of temperature and pressure, In which of the following gases the
velocity of sound will be largest.
(A) H2 (B) N2 (C) He (D) CO2 B
4. A rigid body is made of three identical thin rods fastened together in L

the form of letter H. The body is free to rotate about a fixed horizontal
axis AB that passes through one of the legs of the H. The body is L
allowed to fall from rest from a position in which the plane of H is A
horizontal. What is the angular speed of the body when the plane of H L
is vertical. Top View of the figure in the initial position.
5. A man holding a flag is running in North-East direction with speed 10 m/s. Wind is blowing in east direction
with speed 5 2 m/s. Find the direction in which flag will flutter..
1 X
COMPREHENSION
AB is a uniform wire of meter bridge, across which an ideal 20 volt cell is E,r
connected as shown. Two resistor of 1  and X  are inserted in slots of
J
metre bridge. A cell of emf E volts and internal resistance r  and a A B
P
galvanometer is connected to jockey J as shown. 20V
6. If E = 16 volts, r = 4  and distance of balance point P from end A is 90 cm, then the value of X is :
(A) 3  (B) 6  (C) 9  (D) 12 
7. If E = 16 volts, r = 8  and X = 9 , then the distance of balance point P from end A is :

(A) 10 cm (B) 30 cm (C) 60 cm (D) 90 cm
8. If E = 12 volts, X = 9 , then distance of balance point P from end A is

(A) 20 cm (B) 50 cm (C) 70 cm (D) Data insufficient
DPPS FILE # 96
Topics : Current Electricity, Capacitance, Sound, Electrostatics

1. In the circuit shown, cells are of equal emf E but of different internal R
resistances r1 = 6W and r2 = 4W . Reading of the ideal voltmeter connected
across cell 1 is zero. Value of the external resistance R in ohm is equal to-
V
r1
(A) 2 (B) 2.4 (C) 10 (D) 24 E E
r2
Cell1 Cell2
2. The circuit was in the shown state for a long time. Now if the switch S is 50V
closed then the net charge that flows through the switch S, will be
4 F 2 F
400
(A) C (B) 100 C S
3
2 F 4 F
100
(C) C (D) 50 C
3
3. The equation of displacement due to a sound wave is s = s0 sin2 ( t  k x). If the bulk modulus of the medium
is B, then the equation of pressure variation due to that sound is
(A) B k s0 sin (2  t  2 k x) (B)  B k s0 sin (2  t  2 k x)
(C) B k s0 cos2 ( t  k x) (D)  B k s0 cos2 ( t  k x) y
4. Four point charges are fixed on y-axis as shown in figure. When a (0,2a) 2Q
positive test charge at origin is given a finite impulse along positive
(0,a) –Q
x-axis,
which of the following is/are correct option/options :
x
(A) Test charge may pass through origin with same momentum once again. (0,–a) –Q
(B) Test charge must return at origin at least once.
(C) Test charge may perform SHM on x-axis. (0,–2a) 2Q
(D) Test charge may reach upto infinite distance on positive x-axis.
15V
COMPREHENSION
A wire AB (of length 1m , area of cross section m 2) is used in
potentiometer experiment to calculate emf and internal resistance (r) of A B
E G
battery. The emf and internal resistance of driving battery are 15 V and 3 r
respectively. The resistivity of wire AB varies as =0x (where x is distance
from A in meters and 0 = 24 )
S
2 1
The distance of null point from A is obtained at m when switch 'S' is open and at m when switch is
3 2
closed.
5. The resistance of whole wire AB is -
(A) 6 (B) 12 (C) 18 (D) 24
6. The current through 15 V battery (with G = 0)
(A) is 1 A only when switch S is closed (B) is 1A only when switch S is open
(C) is 1A in both cases (D) can not be calculated.
7. The emf (E) of battery is -
(A) 4V (B) 6V (C) 8V (D) 10V
8. Internal resistance of battery E is -
(A) 4 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 1
DPPS FILE # 97
Topics : Current Electricity, Sound, Fluids, Capacitor, Rotation

1. An ammeter A of finite resistance and a resistor R are joined in series to an ideal cell C. A potentiometer
P is joined in parallel to R. The ammeter reading is I0 & the potentiometer reading is V0. P is now
replaced by a voltmeter of finite resistance. The ammeter reading now is I and the voltmeter reading is
V.
(A) I > I0, V > V0 (B) I > I0, V < V0

(C) I = I0, V < V0 (D) I < I0, V = V0.
2. The two pipes are submerged in sea water, arranged as shown in figure. Pipe A with length LA = 1.5 m
and one open end, contains a small sound source that sets up the standing wave with the second
lowest resonant frequency of that pipe. Sound from pipe A sets up resonance in pipe B, which has both
ends open. The resonance is at the second lowest resonant frequency of pipe B. The length of the pipe
B is :
(A) 1 m (B) 1.5 m (C) 2 m (D) 3 m
3. A body of density  is dropped from rest from a height 'h' (from the surface of water) into a lake of density of
water  ( >). Neglecting all dissipative effects, the acceleration of body while it is in the lake is:
 
(A) g 
  1 upwards  
(B) g 
  1 downwards
(C) g 
  upwards (D) g 
  downwards
4. In the above problem, the maximum depth the body sinks before returning is:
h h
(A) (B)
 
 
(C) h (D) h
 
DPPS FILE # 98
5. Find the potential difference between points A and B of the system shown in the figure, if the emf is equal to
C2
 = 110V and the capacitance ratio C1 =  = 2.0.
COMPREHENSION
A thin uniform rod having mass m and length 4 is free to rotate about horizontal axis passing through
a point distant  from one of its end, as shown in figure. It is released, from the horizontal position as
shown :
6. What will be acceleration of centre of mass at this instant

3g 2g 3g 2g
(A) (B) (C) (D)
7 7 5 5
7. What will be normal reaction due to hinge at the instant of release

mg 4mg 2mg
(A) mg (B) (C) (D)
2 7 7
8. What will be angular velocity of rod when it becomes vertical

6g 12g 3g 3g
(A) (B) (C) (D)
7 7 2 7
DPPS FILE # 99
Topics : Rotation, Capacitor, Center of Mass, Gravitation, Current Electricity, Electrostatics

1. A uniform thin rod is bent in the form of a closed loop ABCDEFA as shown in the figure.
(A) > 1 (B) < 1

(C) = 1 (D) = 1/2
2. An uncharged parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery. The electric field between the plates is
10V/m. Now a dielectric of dielectric constant 2 is inserted between the plates filling the entire space.
The electric field between the plates now is
(A) 5 V/m (B) 20 V/m
(C) 10 V/m (D) none of these
1
3. In the figure shown, coefficient of restitution between A and B is e = , then :
2
v
(A) velocity of B after collision is
2
3
(B) impulse on one of the balls during collision is mv
4
3
(C) loss of kinetic energy in the collision is mv2
16
1
(D) loss of kinetic energy in the collision is mv2
4
DPPS FILE # 100


4. A spherical planet has uniform density × 104 kg/m 3. Find out the minimum period for a satellite in a
2
20 N  m2
circular orbit around it in seconds. (Use G = × 10–111 ).
3 kg 2
5. Two potentiometer wires w1 and w2 of equal length  connected to a battery of emf P and internal
resistance ' r ' through two switches s 1 and s 2. A battery of emf  is balanced on these potentiometer
wires. If potentiometer wire w1 is of resistance 2r and balancing length on w1 is /2 when only s 1 is
 2 
closed and s 2 is open. On closing s 2 and opening s 1 the balancing length on w2 is found to be  ,
 3
then find the resistance of potentiometer wire w2.
COMPREHENSION
Two conducting spheres of radius R and 3R carry charges Q and –2Q. Between these spheres a neutral
conducting sphere of radius 2R is connected. The separation between the sphere is considerably large.
Charge flows through conducting wire due to potential difference.
6. The final charge on initially neutral conducting sphere is :

Q Q Q Q
(A)  (B)  (C) (D) 
6 3 3 2
7. The decrease in electric potential energy of sphere of radius R is :
KQ 2 35KQ 2 KQ 2
(A) (B) (C) (D) none
4R 72R 72R
8. The final electric potential of sphere of radius 3R will be :

KQ KQ 2KQ 3KQ
(A)  (B)  (C)  (D) 
6R 2R 3R R
DPPS FILE # 101

Topics : Center of Mass, Rotation, Current Electricity, Capacitor, Gravitation, Electrostatics

1. A projectile of range R bursts at its highest point in two fragments. Both pieces at the time of bursts have the
R
velocity in the horizontal direction. The heavier is double the mass of the lighter. Lighter fragment falls at
2
horizontal distance from the point of projection in the opposite side of projection. The distance, where other
part falls, from point of projection.
7R 5R 8R 6R
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 4 4 4
2. There are four arrangements of a cylinder and a plank as shown in the figures. Some surfaces are smooth
and some are rough as indicated. There is no slipping at each rough surface. String always remanse tight.
The plank and/or centre of cylinder are given a horizontal constant velocity as shown in each of the situations.
Using this information fill in the blanks.
plank V
rough
C
(i) smooth The speed of center of mass of the cylinder is ___________.
plank
V
C rough
(ii) The angular velocity of the cylinder is __________.
V
plank
(iii) C rough The speed of center of mass of the cylinder is _________ .
plank V
C
(iv) 3V Smooth The angular velocity of the cylinder is ___________ .
plank V
(a) V (b) V/R (c) 2V/R (d) 4V/R

(e) cannot be determined from the given information
(f) Zero.
(A) (i) d (ii) b (iii) f (iv) c (B*) (i) e (ii) b (iii) f (iv) c
(C) (i) e (ii) d (iii) f (iv) c (D) (i) e (ii) b (iii) f (iv) a
DPPS FILE # 102

3. In a practical wheat stone bridge circuit as shown, when one more resistance of 100  is connected in
parallel with unknown resistance ' x ', then ratio 1/2 become ' 2 '. 1 is balance length. AB is a uniform
wire. Then value of ' x ' must be:
(A) 50  (B) 100  (C) 200  (D) 400 
4. A parallel plate capacitor (without dielectric) is charged and disconnected from a battery. Now a dielectric
is inserted between the plates. The electric force on a plate of the capacitor will:
(A) decrease (B) increase
(C) remain same (D) depends on the width of the dielectric.
GMm
5. Assuming that the law of gravitation is of the form F = and attractive. A body of mass m revolves in a
r3
circular path of radius r around a fixed body of mass M. Find on what power of r will the square of time period
depend.
COMPREHENSION
Gravitational force is conservative and medium independent force. Its nature is attractive. Gravitational field
and gravitational potential are related as.
V
Eg = – where Eg is component of gravitational field along 'r'. Since gravitational force is attractive so
r
gravitational potential will always be zero or negative assuming potential to be zero at large distance. With
help of above discussions answer the following questions.
6. A person brings mass of 1 kg from infinity to a point 'A'. Initially the mass was at rest but it moves with speed
2 m/s as it reaches A. If the work done by the person on the mass is – 3J. The potential of A is :
(A) – 3 J/kg (B) + 3 J/kg (C) – 5 J/kg (D) 5 J/kg
7. The gravitational potential inside a hollow sphere of mass M (uniformly distributed), radius R at a distance r
from the centre is-
GM GM GM
(A) zero (B) – (C) – (D) –
r R r2
8. Gravitational potential V/s x graph is shown. The magnitude of field intensity is equal to
(A) 8 N/kg (B) 4 N/kg

(C) 6 N/kg (D) 2 N/kg
DPPS FILE # 103

Topics : Electrostatics, Current Electricity, Capacitor, Gravitation, Rotation, Center of Mass

1. Figure shows a solid metal sphere of radius a surrounded by a concentric thin metal shell of radius 2a.
Initially both are having charges Q each. When the two are connected by a conducting wire as shown
in the figure, then amount of heat produced in this process will be
Q
a
2a
KQ 2 KQ 2
(A) (B)
2a 4a
KQ2 KQ2
(C) (D)
6a 8a
2. Circuit for the measurement of resistance by potentiometer is shown. The galvanometer is first connected
at point A and zero deflection is observed at length PJ = 10 cm. In second case it is connect at point
C and zero deflection is observed at a length 30 cm from P. Then the unknown resistance X is
P J Q
G
C
A
R X
R
(A) 2R (B)
2
R
(C) (D) 3R
3
DPPS FILE # 104

3. In the figure shown P1 and P2 are two conducting plates having charges of equal magnitude and opposite
sign. Two dielectrics of dielectric constant K1 and K2 fill the space between the plates as shown in the figure.
The ratio of electrical energy in 1st dielectric to that in the 2nd dielectric is
(A) 1 : 1 (B) K1 : K2
(C) K2 : K1 (D) K22 : K12
4. The gravitational potential energy of a satellite revolving around the earth in circular orbit is – 4 MJ. Find the
additional energy (in MJ) that should be given to the satellite so that it escapes from the gravitational field of
earth. Assume earth's gravitational force to be the only gravitational force on the satellite and no atmospheric
resistance.
5. A uniform circular disc has radius R and mass m. A particle also of mass m is fixed at a point A on the
periphery of the disc as shown in figure. The disc can rotate freely about a fixed horizontal chord PQ that is
at a distance R/4 from the centre C of the disc. The line AC is perpendicular to PQ. Initially the disc is held
vertical with the point A at its highest position. It is then allowed to fall so that it starts rotating about PQ. Find
the linear speed of the particle when it reaches its lowest position. Acceleration due to gravity is g.
COMPREHENSION
Two friends A and B (each weighing 40 kg) are sitting on a frictionless platform some distance d apart.
A rolls a ball of mass 4 kg on the platform towards B which B catches. Then B rolls the ball towards A
and A catches it. The ball keeps on moving back and forth between A and B. The ball has a fixed speed
of 5 m/s on the platform.
6. Find the speed of A after he rolls the ball for the first time
(A) 0.5 m/s (B) 5m/s (C) 1 m/s (D) None of these
7. Find the speed of A after he catches the ball for the first time.
10 50 10
(A) m/s (B) m/s (C) m/s (D) None of these
21 11 11
8. Find the speeds of A and B after the ball has made 5 round trips and is held by A :
10 50 50 10 50
(A) m/s , m/s (B) m/s, m/s (C) m/s, 5 m/s (D) None of these
11 11 11 11 11
9. How many times can A roll the ball ?
(A) 6 (B) 5 (C) 7 (D) None of these
10. Where is the centre of mass of the system “ A + B + ball” at the end of the nth trip? (Give the distance
from the initail position of A)
10 10 50
(A) d (B) d (C) d (D) None of these
11 21 11
DPPS FILE # 105

Topics : Current Electricity, Heat, Kinematics, Simple Harmonic Motion, Capacitance

1. In the, Ohm's law experiment to find resistance of unknown resistor R, the arrangement is as shown.
V
The resistance measured is given by Rmeasured = , V = voltage reading of voltmeter, i = current
i
reading of ammeter. The ammeters and the voltmeter used are not ideal, and have resistances RA and
RV respectively. For arrangement shown , the measured resistance is
RRV RRV
(A) R + RV (B) R + RA (C) R  R (D) R  R + RA
V V
2. Two identical plates with thermal conductivities K and 3K are joined together to form a single plate of double
thickness. The equivalent thermal conductivity of one composite plate so formed for the flow of heat through
its thickness is:
(A) K (B) 1.5 K (C) 2.5K (D) 3K
3. The acceleration time graph of a particle moving along a straight line is as shown in the figure. At what
time the particle acquires its velocity equal to initial velocity ?
(A) 12 sec (B) 5 sec

(C) 8 sec (D) none of these
4. As the distance between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor is decreased

(A) chances of electrical break down will increase if potential difference between the plates is kept
constant.
(B) chances of electrical break down will decrease if potential difference between the plates is kept
constant.
(C) chances of electrical break down will increase if charge on the plates is kept constant.
(D) chances of electrical break down will decrease if charge on the plates is kept constant.
DPPS FILE # 106

5. All linear dimensions are doubled then the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor will
(A) Remain unchanged
(B) become double
(C) increase by eight times
(D) increases by four times
6. The x-coordinate of a particle moving on x-axis is given by x = 3 sin 100t + 8 cos2 50t, where x is in cm and
t is time in seconds. Which of the following is/are correct about this motion.
(A) the motion of the particle is not S.H.M.
(B) the amplitude of the S.H.M. of the particle is 5 cm
(C) the amplitude of the resultant S.H. M. is 73 cm
(D) the maximum displacement of the particle from the origin is 9 cm.
COMPREHENSION
Charges are concentrated exclusively on the external surface of a conductor. Therefore neither the
material of the conductor nor its mass are of any importance for its capacitance. Capacitance depends
on the shape and surface area of the conductor. Since a conductor liable to be electrified by induction,
its capacitance is influenced by other conductors in its vicinity and by the medium they are in.
To fulfil its function the capacitor must be able to store accumulated charges and energy for appreciable
time to obtain a definite capacitance. One can conveniently take two conductors and arrange them as
close to each other as possible and place a dielectric between them. The dielectric between the
conductors plays two fold role. Firstly, it increases the capacitance and secondly prevents the
neutralization of the charges, i.e. it prevents them from jumping from one conductor to the other. For
this reason electrical breakdown strength (The maximum electrical field which a dielectric can withstand,
also called dielectric strength of dielectric) should be high.
In order to keep the capacitance constant & independent of surrounding bodies the entire electric field
should be contained between the plates. For this reason the distance between the plates should be
small as compound to their linear dimensions. To protect the capacitor from external influences it is
housed in a shell. Mathematically we can relate q = CV and for a parallel plate capacitor fully filled with
r 0 A
a dielectric C = .
d
7. Capacitance does not depend on
(A) Area of plates (B) Separation between plates
(C) Surrounding bodies (D) Potential difference across plates
8. Two plates of a capacitor kept on insulating stand are fully charged. Now the ebonite plate between the
capacitor plates is removed then the capacitance of capacitor will
(A) Increase (B) Decrease
(C) Remains same (D) May increase or decrease
9. A table for parallel plate capacitors along with the properties of dielectrics used in these is given.
Choose the most appropriate capacitor.
(Assuming same potential difference across each capacitor)
Die le ctric Dista nce
Die le ctric Are a of
Ca pa citor stre ngth be tw e e n
Consta nt pla te s (m 2 )
(V /m ) pla te s (m )
A 2.8 3 × 10 7 0.01 0.125
B 3.3 6 × 10 7 0.01 0.125
C 2.2 7 0.01 0.25

7 × 10
D 4.4 1 × 10 7 0.01 0.125
(A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D
DPPS FILE # 107

Topics : Heat, Simple Harmonic Motion, Current Electricity, Kinematics, Capacitance

1. A wall has two layer A and B each made of different material, both the layers have the same thickness. The
thermal conductivity of the material A is twice that of B. Under thermal equilibrium the temperature difference
across the wall B is 360C. The temperature difference across the wall A for the flow of heat through its
thickness is
(A) 60C (B) 120C (C) 180C (D) 240C
2. If the length of a simple pendulum is doubled then the % change in the time period is :
(A) 50 (B) 41.4 (C) 25 (D) 100
3. In the circuit shown, the reading of the ammeter (ideal) is the same with both switches open as with
both closed. Find the value of resistance R in ohm.
100
A
R
50
E
+ –
300 1.5V
4. A particle moves along X axis. At t = 0 it was at x = – 1. It’s velocity varies with time as shown in the figure.
Find the number of times the particle passes through the origin in t = 0 to t = 10 sec.
COMPREHENSION
The circuit contains ideal battery E and other elements arranged as shown. The capacitor is initially
uncharged and switch S is closed at t = 0. (use e2 = 7.4)
5. Time constant of the circuit is

(A) 48 s (B) 28.8 s (C) 72 s (D) 120 s
6. The potential difference across the capacitor in volts, after two time constants, is approximately :
(A) 2 (B) 7.6 (C) 10.4 (D) 12

7. The potential difference across resistor R1 after two time constants, is approximately :
(A) 1.6 V (B) 7.6 V (C) 10 V (D) 12 V
8. The potential difference across resistor R2 after two time constants, is :
(A) 2V (B) 7.6V (C) 10V (D) 12 V
DPPS FILE # 108

Topics : Heat, Kinematics, Simple Harmonic Motion, Viscosity, Elasticity, Capacitance, Current Electricity
1. All the rods have same conductance ‘K’ and same area of cross section ‘A’. If ends A and C are
maintained at temperature 2T 0 and T 0 respectively then which of the following is/are correct:
(A) Rate of heat flow through ABC, AOC and ADC is same
(B) Rate of heat flow through BO and OD is not same
3 K A T0
(C) Total Rate of heat flow from A to C is
2a
(D) Temperature at junctions B, O and D are same
2. For which of the following graphs the average velocity of a particle moving along a straight line for time interval
(0, t) must be negative -
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3. In the figure shown a block of mass m is attached at ends of two

springs. The other ends of the spring are fixed. The mass m is released
in the vertical plane when the spring are relaxed. The velocity of the
block is maximum when:
(A) k 1 is compressed and k 2 is elongated (B) k 1 is elongated and k 2 is compressed
(C) k 1 and k 2 both are compressed (D) k 1 and k 2 both are elongated.
4. Rigidity modulus of steel is  and its young’s modulus is Y. A piece of steel of cross–sectional area ‘A’ is
changed into a wire of length L and area A/10 then :
(A) Y increases and  decrease (B) Y and  remains the same
(C) both Y and  increase (D) both Y and  decrease
DPPS FILE # 109

5. A container filled with viscous liquid is moving vertically downwards with constant speed 3v0. At the
instant shown, a sphere of radius r is moving vertically downwards (in liquid) has speed v0. The coefficient
of viscosity is . There is no relative motion between the liquid and the container. Then at the shown
instant, the magnitude of viscous force acting on sphere is
(A) 6r v0 (B) 12r v0

(C) 18  r v0 (D) 24r v0
6. Find the equivalent capacitance between terminals ‘A’ and ‘B’. The letters have their usual meaning.
COMPREHENSION
A galvanometer measures current which passes through it. A galvanometer can measure typically
current of order of mA. To be able to measure currents of the order of amperes of main current, a shunt
resistance 'S' is connected in parallel with the galvanometer.
7. The resistance of the shunt 'S' and resistance 'G' of the galvanometer should have the following relation.
(A) S = G (B) S >> G (C) S << G (D) S < G
8. If resistance of galvanometer is 10 and maximum current ig is 10mA then the shunt resistance
required so that the main current '' can be upto 1A is (in )
99 10 99
(A) (B) (C) 990 (D)
10 99 1000
DPPS FILE # 110

Topics : Elasticity, Work, Power and Energy, Rotation, Heat, Current Electricity

1. A steel rod (Young’s modulus = 2 x 10–11 Nm –2) has an area of corss-section 3 x 10–4 m 2 and length 1 m.
A force of 6 x 10 N stretches it axially. The elongation of the rod is
(A) 10-4 m (B) 5 x 10-3 m (C) 10-3 m (D) 5 x 10-2 m
2. Which of the following statement is not true?

(A) Work done by conservative force on an object depends only on the initial and final states and not on
the path taken.
(B) The change in the potential energy of a system corresponding to conservative internal forces is equal to
negative of the work done by these forces.
(C) If some of the internal forces within a system are non-conservative, then the mechanical energy of the
system is not constant.
(D) If the internal forces are conservative, the work done by the internal forces is equal to the change in
mechanical energy.
3. A uniform rod of mass m and length L lies radially on a disc rotating with angular speed  in a horizontal
plane about its axis. The rod does not slip on the disc and the centre of the rod is at a distance R from the
centre of the disc. Then the kinetic energy of the rod is :
1  2 L2  1 1
R  
(A) m2  12  (B) m2 R2 (C) m2 L2 (D) None of these
2  2 24
4. The upper end of the string of a simple pendulum is fixed to a vertical z - axis and set in motion such
that the bob moves along a horizontal circular path of radius 2 m , parallel to the x y plane, 5 m above the
origin. The bob has a speed of 3 m/s. The string breaks when the bob is vertically above the x - axis, and
it lands on the xy plane at a point (x, y)
(A) x = 2 m (B) x > 2 m

(C) y = 3 m (D) y = 5 m
5. The rate of heat energy emitted by a body at an instant depends upon

(A) area of the surface
(B) difference of temperature between the surface and its surroundings
(C) nature of the surface
(D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 111

COMPREHENSION
AB is a uniform wire of length 70 cm and resistance 7. Part AC is 20 cm long.Two resistors and two
ideal cells are connected as shown.
2V
C
A B
1V
6. Potential gradient of the part CB of the wire is :

(A) 2.5V/m (B) 2V/m
10
(C) V/m (D) 7.5V/m
3
7. Potential gradient of the part AC is :

5
(A) V/m (B) 2V/m
6
(C) 5 V/m (D) 7.5V/m
8. Of the points A, B and C the potential is maximum at point:

(A) A (B) B
(C) C (D) same at all of these three points
DPPS FILE # 112

Topics : Heat, Work, Power and Energy, Rotation, Elasticity, Current Electricity
1. The energy radiated per unit area per sec. by a spherical black body will be doubled if its
(A) radius is increased by nearly 41.5% (B) radius is doubled
(C) temp. (T) is increased by nearly 41.5% (D) T is increased by nearly 19%.
t2
2. A body of mass 6 kg is acted upon by a force which causes a displacement in it given by x = metre where
4
t is the time in second. The work done by the force is 2 seconds is:
(A) 12 J (B) 9 J
(C) 6 J (D) 3 J
3. In the figure shown, a small ball of mass 'm' can move without sliding in a fixed semicircular track of
radius R in vertical plane. It is released from the top. The resultant force on the ball at the lowest point
of the track is
10mg 17 mg
(A) (B)
7 7
3 mg
(C) (D) zero
7
4. An elastic rod will change its length, if

(A) the rod is suspended at one end
(B) The rod is allowed to fall freely under gravity
(C) the rod is rotated about one end on a frictionless horizontal table
(D) the rod is given a horizontal acceleration by a force applied at one end
5. A charged particle X moves directly towards another charged particle Y. For the 'X + Y' system, the
total momentum is p and the total energy is E.
(A) p & E are conserved if both X & Y are free to move
(B) (A) is true only if X and Y have similar charges
(C) If Y is fixed, E is conserved but not p
(D) If Y is fixed, neither E nor p is conserved.
DPPS FILE # 113

COMPREHENSION
V
Resistance value of an unknown resistor is calculated using the formula R  where V and I be the
I
readings of the voltmeter and the ammeter respectively. Consider the circuits below. The internal
resistances of the voltmeter and the ammeter (Rv and RG respectively) are finite and non zero.
V V
A A
R R
E E
r r
Figure (A) Figure (B)
Let RA and RB be the calculated values in the two cases A and B respectively.
6. The relation between RA and the actual value R is

(A) R > RA (B) R < RA
(C) R = RA (D) dependent upon E and r.
7. The relation between RB and the actual value R is :

(A) R < RB (B) R > RB
(C) R = RB (D) dependent upon E and r.
8. If the resistance of voltmeter is Rv = 1 k  and that of ammeter is RG = 1 , the magnitude of the

percentage error in the measurement of R (the value of R is nearly 10 ) is :
(A) zero in both cases (B) non zero but equal in both cases
(C) more in circuit A (D) more in circuit B
DPPS FILE # 114

Topics : Elasticity, Rotation, Heat, Newton’s Law of Motion, Work, Power and Energy, Capacitance
1. Two steel wires, where one has twice diameter and three times the length of the other, are stretched by
the same force. The ratio of the elastic strain energy stored in them is
(A) 2 : 3 (B) 3 : 4 (C) 3 : 2 (D) 6 : 1
2. Two men of equal masses stand at opposite ends of the diameter of a turntable disc of a certain mass,
moving with constant angular velocity. The two men make their way to the middle of the turntable at
equal rates. In doing so
(A) kinetic energy of rotation has increased while angular momentum remains same.
(B) kinetic energy of rotation has decreased while angular momentum remains same.
(C) kinetic energy of rotation has decreased but angular momentum has increased.
(D) both, kinetic energy of rotation and angular momentum have decreased.
3. A straight nicrome wire is initially at room temperature 20ºC. It is connected to an ideal battery of 500 volt.
Jusr after switching on, the current detected is 5 amp. Due to heating effect its temperature increases, and
dQ loss
is also loosing heat to the environment according to newton's cooling law as = 45(T – 20ºC)J/sec. At
dt
steady state, the current detected is 4.5 amp.
(A) staedy state temperature of the wire is 70 ºC

(B) steady state temperature of the wire is 75.5ºC
(C) temperature co–efficient of resistance of the wire is nearly 2.2 × 10–3 /ºC
(D) temperature co–efficient of resistance of the wire is nearly 1.57 × 10–3 /ºC
4. A painter is applying force himself to raise him and the box with an acceleration of 5 m/s2 by a massless
rope and pulley arrangement as shown in figure. Mass of painter is 100 kg and that of box is 50 kg. If
g = 10 m/s 2, then:
(A) tension in the rope is 1125 N

(B) tension in the rope is 2250 N
(C) force of contact between the painter and the floor is 375 N
(D) none of these
DPPS FILE # 115

5. A block of mass 60 kg is released from rest when compression in the spring is 2m (natural length of spring
is 8m). Surface AB is smooth while surface BC is rough. Block travels x distance before coming to complete
rest. Value of x is : [g = 10 m/s2]
COMPREHENSION
The circuit consists of two resistors (of resistance R1  20and R2 = 10 ) , a capacitor ( of capacitance
C = 10F) and two ideal cells. In the circuit shown the capacitor is in steady state and the switch S is
open
6. The current through the resistor R2 just after the switch S is closed is:
(A) 1 ampere (B) 2 ampere (C) 3 ampere (D) 4 ampere
7. The charge on capacitor in steady state with switch S closed.

(A) 100C (B) 200C (C) 300C (D) 400C
8. The circuit is in steady state with switch S closed. Now the switch S is opened. Just after the switch
S is opened, the current through resistance R1 is
(A) 1ampere (B) 2 ampere (C) 3 ampere (D) 4 ampere
DPPS FILE # 116

Topics : Heat, Current Electricity, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/current,
Rotation, Kinamatics, Center of Mass
1. A rod of length  and cross section area A has a variable thermal conductivity given by k =  T, where  is a
positive constant and T is temperature in kelvin. Two ends of the rod are maintained at temperatures T1 and
T2 (T1 > T2). Heat current flowing through the rod will be
A  (T12  T22 ) A  (T12  T22 ) A  (T12  T22 ) A  (T12  T22 )

(A) (B) (C) (D)
  3 2
2. A potentiometer wire of length 10 m and resistance 10 ohm is connected in series with an ideal cell of
E.M.F. 2 V. If a rheostat having range 0 –10 ohm is used in series with the cell then maximum potential
gradient of the wire will be :
(A) 2 V/m (B) 0.2 V/m (C) 2 V/m (D) 0.2 V/m
3. A charge particle A of charge q = 2 C has velocity v = 100 m/s . When it
passes through point A & has velocity in the direction shown . The strength
of magnetic field at point B due to this moving charge is (r = 2 m):
(A) 2.5  T (B) 5.0  T (C) 2.0  T (D) none of these

4. Two like parallel forces P and 3 P are 40 cm apart. If the direction of P is reversed, then the point of
application of their resultant shifts through a distance of :
(A) 30 cm (B) 40 cm (C) 50 cm (D) 60 cm
5. The engine of a futuristic nuclear powered car for which power and speed can have fantastic values (say
600 kph) can produce a maximum acceleration of 5 m/s 2 and its brakes can produce a maximum
retardation of 10 m/s 2. The minimum time in which a person can reach his workplace, located 1.5 km
away from his home using this car is
(A) 5 sec. (B) 10 sec. (C) 15 sec. (D) 30 sec.
COMPREHENSION
Two small balls of same size having masses m and M with a slight separation are released from rest
simultaneously on a smooth fixed inclined plane of inclination  = 53° and length L. There is a fixed wall
at the bottom of the incline such that wall is perpendicular to inclined plane as shown. The collision of
both balls takes place only after the collision of mass M with wall is over. Initially M is at a distance
L0 = 9 m from the wall. If M comes to stop just after its collision with m answer the following three
4
questions. (All collisions are perfectly elastic and g = 10 m/s 2 and sin 53° = )
5
L
m
L 0 M
6. Just after collision of both balls, velocity of ball having mass m up the incline is:
(A) 20 m/s (B) 22 m/s (C) 24 m/s (D) 12 m/s
7. The ratio m : M is :
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 3 : 1 (C) 1 : 3 (D) 1 : 2
8. The minimum value of L (in meter) so that m does not leave the incline.
(A) 12 (B) 24 (C) 36 (D) 48
DPPS FILE # 117

Topics : Heat, Current Electricity, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/current,
Rotation, Kinematics, Center of Mass
1. Two identical long, solid cylinders are used to conduct heat from temp T 1 to temp T 2. Originally the
cylinder are connected in series and the rate of heat transfer is H. If the cylinders are connected in
parallel then the rate of heat transfer would be :
(A) H /4 (B) 2H (C) 4H (D) 8H
2. In a metre bridge experiment null point is obtained at 20 cm from one end of the wire when resistance X
is balanced against another resistance Y. If X < Y, then where will be the new position of the null point
from the same end, if one decides to balance a resistance of 4X against Y ?
(A) 50 cm (B) 80 cm (C) 40 cm (D) 70 cm
3. An electron (charge  e, mass ' m ' ) is revolving around a fixed proton in circular path of radius ' r '. The
magnetic field at the centre due to electron is:
 0 e2 0 e 0 e
(A) 0 (B) 2
(C) (D) 2
8r  m0 r 8  r  m0 r 4r  m0 r
4. A weightless rod is acted on by upward parallel forces of 2 N and 4 N ends A and B respectively. The
total length of the rod AB = 3 m. To keep the rod in equilibrium a force of 6 N should act in the following
manner: (A) Downwards at any point between A and B
(B) Downwards at mid point of AB
(C) Downwards at a point C such that AC = 1 m
(D) Downwards at a point D such that BD = 1
5. Two cars A and B are travelling towards each other on a single-lane road at 24 m/s and 21 m/s respectively.
They notice each other when 180 m apart and apply brakes simultaneously. They just succeed in avoiding
collision, both stopping simultaneously at the same position. Assuming constant retardation for each car,
the distance travelled by car A while slowing down is
COMPREHENSION
Two identical masses are as shown in figure. One is thrown upwards with velocity 20 m/s and another is
just dropped simultaneously. [g = 10 m/s²]
6. The masses collide in air and stick together. After how much time the combined mass will fall to the ground
(Calculate the time from the starting when the motion was started).
(A) (1+ 2 ) second (B) 2 2 second

(C) (2+ 2 ) second (D) none of these
7. In the above problem, to what maximum height (from ground) will the combined mass rise .
(A) 25 m (B) 18 m (C) 15 m (D) 20 m
8. If collision between them is elastic, find the time interval between their striking with ground.
(A) zero (B) 2 sec (C) 1 sec (D) 3 sec
DPPS FILE # 118

Topics : Heat, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/current, Rotation, Current Electricity,
Center of Mass
1. Two identical rectangular rods of metal are welded end to end in series
between temperature 0°C and 100°C and 10 J of heat is conducted (in
steady state process) through the rod in 2.00 min. If 5 such rods are
taken and joined as shown in figure maintaining the same temperature
difference between A and B, then the time in which 20 J heat will flow
through the rods is :
(A) 30 sec. (B) 2 min. (C) 1 min. (D) 20 sec.

2. An  particle is moving along a circle of radius R with a constant angular velocity . Point A lies in the same
plane at a distance 2R from the centre. Point A records magnetic field produced by  particle. If the minimum
time interval between two successive times at which A records zero magnetic field is ‘t’, the angular speed ,
in terms of t is -
2 2  
(A) (B) (C) (D)
t 3t 3t t
3. When a person throws a meter stick it is found that the centre of the stick is moving with speed 10 m/
s and left end of stick with speed 20 m/s. Both points move vertically upwards at that moment. Then
angular speed of the stick is:
(A) 20 rad/ sec (B) 10 rad/sec (C) 30 rad/sec (D) none of these
4. AB and CD are two uniform resistance wires of lengths 100 cm and 80 cm respectively . The connections
are shown in the figure. The cell of emf 5 V is ideal while the other cell of emf E has internal resistance
2 .A length of 20 cm of wire CD is balanced by 40 cm of wire AB. Find the emf E in volt, if the reading
of the ideal ammeter is 2 A. The other connecting wires have negligible resistance.
5V
40 cm
A B
D
Ammeter
(ideal)
E 2
2
5. Figure shows v/s s curve for a particle of mass 2 kg moving in a straight line. If the time (in seconds)
v
taken by the particle to achive a displacement of 10 m is t. (v = velocity, s = displacement), then find the
value of (t – 20).
DPPS FILE # 119

COMPREHENSION
There are two blocks A and B placed on a smooth surface. Block A has mass 10 kg and it is moving with
velocity 0.8 m/s towards stationary B of unknown mass. At the time of collision, their velocities are given by
the following graph :
1
0.8
6. Coefficient of restitution of the collision is

(A) 1.5 (B) 1 (C) 0.5 (D) 0.8
7. Impulse of deformation is :
(A) 1 Ns (B) 3 Ns (C) 6 Ns (D) 5 Ns
8. Maximum deformation potential energy is:

(A) 1.2 J (B) 3.2 J (C) 2.0 J (D) 1.6 J
DPPS FILE # 120

Topics : Center of Mass, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/current, Gravitation,
Heat, Rotation
1. A man of mass M stands at one end of a plank of length L which lies at rest on a frictionless horizontal
surface . The man walks to the other end of the plank. If the mass of the plank is M/3, the distance that
the man moves relative to the ground is
(A) 3 L/4 (B) 4 L/5 (C) L/4 (D) none of these
 
2. A particle is moving with velocity v  î  3 ĵ and it produces an electric field at a point given by E  2k̂ .
It will produce magnetic field at that point equal to (all quantities are in S.. units and speed of light is
c)
6 î  2 ĵ 6 î  2 ĵ
(A) (B)
c2 c2
(C) zero (D) can not be determined from the given data
3. Maximum height reached by a rocket fired with a speed equal to 50% of the escape velocity from earth's
surface is:
(A) R/2 (B) 16R/9 (C) R/3 (D) R/8
4. Figure shows three different arrangements of materials 1, 2 and 3 (identical in shape) to form a wall. The
thermal conductivities are K1, K2 and K3 respectively and K1 > K2 > K3. The left side of the wall is 20°C higher
than the right side.
1 2 3 1 3 2 3 2 1
() () ()
(A) In steady state, rate of energy conduction through the wall III is greatest.
(B) In steady state, rate of energy conduction through all the walls (I), (II) and (III) are same.
(C) In steady state, temperature difference across material 1 is greatest in wall II.
(D) In steady state, temperature difference across material 1 is same in all the walls.
5. Find the moment of inertia (in kg.m 2) of a thin uniform square sheet of mass M = 3kg and side a = 2m
about the axis AB which is in the plane of sheet :
DPPS FILE # 121

COMPREHENSION
A small ball (uniform solid sphere) of mass m is released from the top of a wedge of the same mass m.
The wedge is free to move on a smooth horizontal surface. The ball rolls without sliding on the wedge.
The required height of the wedge are mentioned in the figure.
m
h
P
m
h
Q
6. The speed of the wedge when the ball is just going to leave the wedge at point 'P' of the wedge is
5gh 5gh
(A) (B) gh (C) (D) None of these
9 6
7. The total kinetic energy of the ball just before it falls on the ground
13
(A) 2 mgh (B) mgh (C) mgh (D) None of these
18
8. The horizontal separation between the ball and the edge 'PQ' of wedge just before the ball falls on
the ground is
3 10 2 10
(A) h (B) h (C) 2 h (D) None of these
2 3
DPPS FILE # 122

Topics : Center of Mass, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/current, Gravitation,
Heat, Rotation
1. Two identical rods are joined at one of their ends by a pin. Joint is smooth and rods are free to rotate about
the joint. Rods are released in vertical plane on a smooth surface as shown in the figure. The displacement
of the joint from its initial position to the final position is (i.e. when the rods lie straight on the ground) :
L 17 5L
(A) (B) L (C) (D) none of these
4 4 2
2. A conducting cylindrical rod of uniform cross-sectional area is kept between two large chambers which
are at temperatures 100°C and 0°C respectively. The conductivity of the rod increases with x, where x
is distance from 100°C end. The temperature profile of the rod in steady-state will be as :
100°C 0°C
(A) (B)
100°C 0°C 100°C 0°C
(C) (D)
100°C 0°C 100°C 0°C
3. Two observers moving with different velocities see that a point charge produces same magnetic field at
 
the same point A . Their relative velocity must be parallel to r , where r is the position vector of point A
with respect to point charge. This statement is :
(A) true
(B) false
(C) nothing can be said
(D) true only if the charge is moving perpendicular to the r
DPPS FILE # 123

4. Suppose the earth suddenly shrinks in size, still remaining spherical and mass unchanged (All
gravitational forces pass through the centre of the earth).
(A) The days will become shorter.
(B) The kinetic energy of rotation about its own axis will increase
(C) The duration of the year will increase.
(D) The magnitude of angular momentum about its axis will increase.
5. A symmetric lamina of mass M consists of a square shape with a semicircular section over each of the
edge of the square as in figure. The side of the square is 2 a. The moment of inertia of the lamina about
an axis through its centre of mass and perpendicular to the plane is 1.6 Ma2. The moment of inertia of
the lamina about the tangent AB in the plane of lamina is _______________.
COMPREHENSION
Uniform rod AB is hinged at the end A in a horizontal position as shown in the figure (the hinge is frictionless,
that is, it does not exert any friction force on the rod). The other end of the rod is connected to a block through
a massless string as shown. The pulley is smooth and massless. Masses of the block and the rod are same
and are equal to ' m '.
6. Then just after release of block from this position, the tension in the thread is
mg 5 mg 11mg 3 mg
(A) (B) (C) (D)
8 8 8 8
7. Then just after release of block from this position, the angular acceleration of the rod is
g 5g 11g 3g
(A) 8  (B) 8  (C) 8  (D) 8 
8. Then just after release of block from this position, the magnitude of reaction exerted by hinge on the rod is
3 mg 5 mg 9 mg 7 mg
(A) (B) (C) (D)
16 16 16 16
DPPS FILE # 124

Topics : Rotation, Center of Mass, Heat, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/
current, Gravitation, Rotation
1. Moment of inertia of uniform triangular plate about axis passing through sides AB, AC, BC are IP, IB & IH
respectively & about an axis perpendicular to the plane and passing through point C is IC. Then :
(A) IC > IP > IB > IH (B) IH > IB > IC > IP

(C) IP > IH > IB > IC (D) none of these
2. Two men ‘A’ and ‘B’ are standing on a plank. ‘B’ is at the middle of the plank and ‘A’ is at the left end
of the plank. System is initially at rest and masses are as shown in figure. ‘A’ and ‘B’ start moving such
that the position of ‘B’ remains fixed with respect to ground then‘A’ meets ‘B’. Then the point where A
meets B is located at :
(A) the middle of the plank (B) 30 cm from the left end of the plank
(C) the right end of the plank (D) None of these
3. The wall of a house is made of two different materials of same thickness. The temperature of the outer wall
is T2 and that of inner wall is T1 < T2. The temperature variation inside the wall as shown in the figure. Then :
(A) thermal conductivity of inner wall is greater than that of outer.

(B) thermal conductivity of outer wall is greater than that of inner
(C) thermal conductivities of the two are equal
(D) no conclusion can be drawn about thermal conductivities
DPPS FILE # 125

4. A uniformly charged ring of radius R is rotated about its axis with constant linear speed v of each of its
particles. The ratio of electric field to magnetic field at a point P on the axis of the ring distant x = R from
centre of ring is (c is speed of light)
c2 v2 c v
(A) (B) (C) (D)
v c v c
5. A satellite is revolving around earth in a circular orbit. At some instant the speed of the satellite is increased
2 times its orbital speed keeping its direction unchanged. Then, the new path of the satellite is :
(A) circular (B) straight line (C) elliptical (D) parabolic
COMPREHENSION
A thin uniform rod of length  and mass m lies on a frictionless fixed horizontal surface. It is struck with
a quick horizontal blow (directed perpendicular to the rod) at a distance x from the center of rod. A dot
is painted on the horizontal surface at a distance d from the initial position of the center of the rod.
Top view
m dot
d
x
strike
6. Let v be the speed of centre of mass and  be the angular speed of the rod just after the blow. Then the

value of is :
v
x 3x 4x 12x
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D)
   2
7. For the rod to make one complete revolution by the time the center reaches the dot, the value of x (in
terms of  and d) should be :
 2  2  2  2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2d 3d 6d 12d
8. For x as asked in previous question to exist, the minimum value of d (in terms of ) should be :
   
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 4 6
DPPS FILE # 126

Topics : Heat, Emf, Rotation, Center of Mass, Visosity, Geometrical Optics, Current Electricity

Match the Following (no negative marking) (2 × 4) Q.8 (8 marks, 10 min.) [8,10]
Assertion and Reason (no negative marking) Q. 9 (3 marks, 3 min.) [3, 3]
1. A simple microscope has a focal length of 5 cm. The magnification at the least distance of distinct vision is-
(A) 1 (B) 5 (C) 4 (D) 6
2. Two identical solid spheres have the same temperature. One of the sphere is cut into two identical pieces.
The intact sphere radiates an energy Q during a given small time interval. During the same interval, the two
hemispheres radiate a total energy Q'. The ratio Q'/Q is equal to :
2
(A) 2.0 (B) 4.0 (C) (D) 1.5
3
3. A ring of radius 5 m is lying in the x-y plane and is carrying current of 1 A in anti-clockwise sense. If a

uniform magnetic field B = 3 î  4 ˆj is switched on, then the co-ordinates of point about which the loop
will lift up is:
(A) (3, 4) (B) (4, 3)

(C) (3, 0) (D) (0, 3)
4. A ring of radius R rolls without slipping on a rough horizontal surface with a constant velocity. The radius
of curvature of the path followed by any particle of the ring at the highest point of its path will be :
(A) (B) 2 R
(C) 4 R (D) none of these
DPPS FILE # 127

5. A small bob of mass ‘m’ is suspended by a massless string from a cart of the same mass ‘m’ as shown in
the figure.The friction between the cart and horizontal ground is negligible. The bob is given a velocity V0 in
horizontal direction as shown. The maximum height attained by the bob is,
2 2 2 2
2 V0 V0 V0 V0
(A) (B) (C) (D)
g g 4g 2g
6. Two identical spherical drops of water are falling (vvertically downwards) through air with a steady velocity of
5 cm/sec. If both the drops coalesce ( combine) to form a new spherical drop, the terminal velocity of the new
drop will be- (neglect bouyant force on the drops.)
5
(A) 5 × 2 cm/sec (B) 5 × 2 cm/sec (C) 5 × (4) 1/3 cm/sec (D) cm/sec.
2
7. A steel wire of length l has a magnetic moment M. It is then bent into a semicircular arc. What is the new
magnetic moment ?
8. In each situation of column-I a statement regarding a point object and its image is given. In column-II four
optical instruments are given which form the image of that object. Match the statement in column-I with the
optical instruments in column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) Real image of a real point object may be formed by (p) concave mirror
(B) Virtual image of a real point object may be formed by (q) convex mirror
(C) Real image of a virtual point object may be formed by (r) convex lens (surrounded by air)
(D) Virtual image of a virtual point object may be formed by (s) concave lens (surrounded by air)
9. STATEMENT-1 : Two cells of unequal emf E1 and E2 having internal resistances r1 and r2 are connected as
shown in figure. Then the potential difference across any cell cannot be zero.
E1, r1 E2, r2
STATEMENT-2 : If two cells having nonzero internal resistance and unequal emf are connected across each
other as shown, then the current in the circuit cannot be zero.
E1, r1 E2, r2
(A) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1
(B) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-1
(C) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is False
(D) Statement-1 is False, Statement-2 is True.
DPPS FILE # 128

Topics : Heat, Rotation, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/current, Center of
Mass, Geometrical Optics, Current Electricity

Multiple choice objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.4 (4 marks, 4 min.) [4,4]
Subjective Questions ('–1' negative marking) Q.5 to Q.Q.7 (4 marks, 5 min.) [12,15]
Assertion and Reason (no negative marking) Q. 9 (3 marks, 3 min.) [3,3]
1. In a compound microscope, the intermediate image is -

(A) virtual, erect and magnified (B) real, erect and magnified
(C) real, inverted and magnified (D) virtual, erect and reduced
2. The resolving power of a telescope is more when its objective lens has
(A) greater focal length (B) smaller focal length
(C) greater diameter (D) smaller diameter
E
3. Three separate segments of equal area A1, A2 and A3 are shown in the
energy distribution curve of a blackbody radiation. If n1, n2 and n3 are
number of photons emitted per unit time corresponding to each area
segment respectively then :
A1 A2 A3 
(A) n2 > n1 > n3 (B) n3 > n1 > n2 (C) n1 = n2 = n3 (D) n3 > n2 > n1

(B) A rigid body rolls up an inclined plane without sliding. The friction force on it will be up the incline.
(C) A rigid body rolls down an inclined plane without sliding. The friction force on it will be up the incline.
(D) A rigid body is left from rest and having no angular velocity from the top of a rough inclined plane. It
moves down the plane with slipping. The friction force on it will be up the incline.
5. The given fig. shows a coil bent with AB=BC=CD=DE=EF=FG=GH=HA =

1 m and carrying current 1 A. There exists in space a vertical uniform
magnetic field of 2 T in the y-direction. Then find out the torque (in vector
form) on the loop.
6. A bar magnet or magnetic moment M is aligned parallel to the direction of a uniform magnetic field B. What
is the work done to turn the magnet, so as to align its magnetic moment (i) opposite to the field direction and
(ii) normal to the field direction ?
7. Two blocks of mass m1 and m2 are connected with an ideal spring on a smooth horizontal surface as shown
in figure. At t = 0 m1 is at rest and m2 is moving with a velocity v towards right. At this time spring is in its
natural length. Prove that if m1 < m2 block of mass m2 will never come to rest.
v
m1 m2
DPPS FILE # 129

8. Match the Column if deviation in the Column–II is the magnitude of total deviation (between incident ray and
finally refracted or reflected ray) to lie between 0º and 180º. Here n represents refractive index of medium.
(A) (p) deviation in the light ray is greater than 90º
(B) (q) deviation in the light ray is less than 90º
(C) (r) deviation in the light ray is equal to 90°
(D) (s) Speed of finally reflected or refracted light is same

as speed of incident light.
9. STATEMENT-1 : For calculation of current in resistors of resistance R1, R2 and R3 in the circuit shown in
figure 1, the circuit can be redrawn as shown in figure 2 (this means that circuit shown in figure 2 is
equivalent to circuit shown in figure 1). All the cells shown are ideal and identical.
STATEMENT-2 : Whenever potential difference across two resistors is same, both resistors can be
assumed as a combination of two resistors in parallel.
(A) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1.
(D) Statement-1 is False, Statement-2 is True
DPPS FILE # 130

Topics : Heat, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/current, Rotation, Center of Mass,
Geometrical Optics, Current, Electricity
Assertion and Reason (no negative marking) Q. 9 (3 marks, 3 min.) [3 , 3]
1. A Galileo telescope has an objective of focal length 100 cm & magnifying power 50. The distance
between the two lenses in normal adjustment will be
(A) 150 cm (B) 100 cm (C) 98 cm (D) 200 cm
2. Let the wavelength at which the the spectral emissive power of a black body (at a temperature T ) is
maximum, be denoted by  max .As the temperature of the body is increased by 1 K ,  max decreases by
1 percent .The temperature T of the black body is
(A) 100K (B) 200K (C) 400K (D) 288K
3. In the above question, the emissive power of the black body at temperature T is :
(A) 17 Watt/m 2 (B) 12 Watt/m 2 (C) 6 Watt/m 2 (D) 24 Watt/m 2
2 2
4. A current carrying ring, carrying current Amp., radius 1m, mass kg
 3
and having 10 windings is free to rotate about its tangential vertical axis. A
uniform magnetic field of 1 tesla is applied perpendicular to its plane. How
much minimum angular velocity (in rad/sec.) should be given to the ring in
the direction shown, so that it can rotate 270º in that direction. Write your
answer in nearest single digit in rad/sec.
5. A uniform disc of mass 2 kg and radius 50 mm rolls from rest on a fixed rough incline. If the length of
incline is 1 m the time taken by the disc to arrive at bottom equals _______.
6. Horizontal and vertical components of earth’s magnetic field at a place are 0.22 tesla and 0.38 tesla respec-
tively. Find the resultant intensity of earth’s magnetic field.
7 A special wedge of mass m is kept on a smooth horizontal surface as shown in figure. Another smooth block
of mass m is projected towards the wedge with a horizontal velocity u0 which then climbs up the wedge and
leaves the wedge at the top most point. After this when block of mass m falls on horizontal surface distance
between block and wedge is ‘x’. If the maximum height attained by the mass m from ground is 125m then
find x.
37°
u0 A 105m
m m
Smooth Smooth
DPPS FILE # 131

8. Match the Column :
For light passing from different surfaces shown, graph between deviation () versus angle of incidence (i) is
drawn. Choose appropriate graph.
(A) Light goes from denser to rarear medium through plane surface (p)
(B) Light goes from rarear to denser medium through plane surface (q)
(C) Light goes through prism placed in air (r)
(D) Light pass through slab placed in air (s)
9. Statement–1: If potential difference between two points is non zero in an electric circuit, electric current
between those two points may be zero.
Statement–2: Current always flows from high potential to low potential
DPPS FILE # 132

Topics : Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/current, Electromagnet Induction, Rotation,
Center of Mass, Geometrical Optics, Current Electricity
1. The direction of the field B at P is :
The V shaped wire is in x-y plane.
(A) along + x-axis

(B) along + z-axis
(C) along (–x)–axis
(D) along + y-axis

2. If the magnetic field at 'P' can be written as K tan   then K is :
2
[Refer to the figure of above question ]
0 0  0 2 0 
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4d 2d d d
3. A circular loop of radius r is moved with a velocity v as shown in the diagram. The work needed to
maintain its velocity constant is :
 0i v r  0i v r  0i v r  2r  a 
(A) (B) (C) n   (D) zero
2a 2(a  r ) 2  a 
4. The magnifying power of a simple microscope can be increased if an eyepiece of :

(A) shorter focal length is used (B) longer focal length is used
(C) shorter diameter is used (D) longer diameter is used
5. A rod of negligible mass and length  is pivoted at its centre. A particle of mass m is fixed to its left end
& another particle of mass 2 m is fixed to the right end. If the system is released from rest,
(a) what is the speed v of the two masses when the rod is vertical.
(b) what is the angular speed  of the system at that instant.
DPPS FILE # 133

6. A ball is given velocity 3g as shown. If the ratio of centripital acceleration to tangential acceleration is
1 : y 2 at the point where the ball leaves circular path then write the value of y. [Neglect the size of ball]
vertical plane
(string)
ball
COMPREHENSION
A fixed cylindrical tank having large cross-section area is filled with two liquids of densities  and 2 
2
and in equal volumes as shown in the figure. A small hole of area of crosssection a = 6 cm is made
at height h/2 from the bottom.
h
2
area = 6 cm
h
h/2
R
7. Velocity of efflux will be :

(A) 2gh (B) 3gh (C) gh (D) 2 gh
8. Distance (R) of the point at which the liquid will strike from container is :
h
(A) 2h (B) h (C) (D) 2h
2
9. Area of cross section of stream of liquid just before it hits the ground.
(A) 2 cm 2 (B) 3 cm 2 (C) 1 cm 2 (D) 5 cm 2
DPPS FILE # 134

Topics : Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/current, Electromagnet Induction, Rotation,
Current Electricity, Fluid, Center of Mass

1. The magnetic field at the origin due to the current flowing in the wire is
0  0
(A)  ( î  k̂ ) (B) ( î  k̂ )
8 a 2 a
 0 0
(C) (  î  k̂ ) (D) ( î  k̂ )
8 a 4a 2
2. A U-shaped conducting frame is fixed in space. A conducting rod CD lies at rest on the smooth frame
as shown. The frame is in uniform magnetic field B0, which is perpendicular to the plane of frame. At
B0
time t = 0, the magnitude of magnetic field begins to change with time t as, B = , where k is a
1  kt
positive constant. For no current to be ever induced in frame, the speed with which rod should be pulled
starting from time t = 0 is (the rod CD should be moved such that its velocity must lie in the plane of
frame and perpendicular to rod CD)
(A) ak (B) bk
(C) a(1 + kt) (D) b(1 + kt)
3. A uniform smooth rod is placed on a smooth horizontal floor is hit by a particle moving on the floor, at

a distance from one end. Then the distance travelled by the centre of the rod after the collision when
4
it has completed three revolution will be:
[ e  0 & '' is the length of the rod ]
(A) 2 (B) can't be determined
(C)  (D) none of these
DPPS FILE # 135

4. The convex lens is used in-
(A) Microscope (B) Telescope (C) Projector (D) All of the above
5. A small block of mass m is released from rest from point A inside a smooth hemisphere bowl of radius R,
which is fixed on ground such that OA is horizontal. The ratio (x) of magnitude of centripetal force and normal
reaction on the block at any point B varies with  as :
(A) (B) (C) (D)
6. A solid ice block (of any shape) is floating remaining in equilibrium in water. Some part of it is outside water
because its density is less than the density of water. Prove that the level of water does not ascend or
descend if the ice melts completely. Neglect the changes in volume due to temperature changes.
COMPREHENSION

Two small spheres of mass m 1 and m 2 are moving towards each other with constant velocities u1 and

u 2 respectively and undergo head on inelastic collision. If the coefficient of restitution is e and
 
m1 u1  m 2 u 2  0 ,
7. The velocity of sphere of mass m 1 after collision is :

  
(A) – eu2 (B) – eu1 (C) eu1 (D) None of these
8. The velocity of sphere of mass m 2 after collision is :

  
(A) – eu1 (B) – eu 2 (C) eu2 (D) None of these
9. For the given situation, pick up the incorrect statement :

(A) During the collision, least kinetic energy of system of both spheres is non-zero.
(B) During the collision, least kinetic energy of system of both spheres is zero.
 
(C) Velocity of separation of both spheres after collision has magnitude = e | u1  u 2 |
(D) At the instant of maximum deformation during collision, speed of each sphere is zero.
DPPS FILE # 136

Topics : Rotation, Fluid, Current Electricity, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/
current, Electromagnet Induction

1. A uniform disc of mass m and radius R is free to rotate about its fixed
horizontal axis without friction. There is sufficient friction between the
M,R
inextensible light string and disc to prevent slipping of string over disc.
3mg
At the shown instant extension in light spring is , where m is
K
mass of block, g is acceleration due to gravity and K is spring constant. m
K
Then at the shown moment, magnitude of acceleration of block is :
2g 4g g g
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 3 3 4
2. The focal length of the objective of a microscope is

(A) arbitrary (B) less than the focal length of eyepiece
(C) equal to the focal length of eyepiece (D) greater than the focal length of eyepiece
3. For a fluid which is flowing steadily, the level in the vertical tubes is best represented by
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
4. In the motorcycle stunt called "the well of death" the track is a vertical cylindrical surface of 18 m
radius. Take the motorcycle to be a point mass and  = 0.8. The minimum angular speed of the
motorcycle to prevent him from sliding down should be:
(A) 6/5 rad/s (B) 5/6 rad/s (C) 25/3 rad/s (D) none of these
5. In the figure shown a conducting rod of length , resistance R & mass

m can move vertically downward due to gravity. Other parts are kept
fixed. B = constant = B0. MN and PQ are vertical, smooth, conducting
rails. The capacitance of the capacitor is C. The rod is released from
rest. Find the maximum current in the circuit
DPPS FILE # 137

COMPREHENSION
Tangent Galvanometer : In case of tangent galvanometer (Figure) a magnetic compass needle is placed
horizontally at the centre of a vertical fixed current-carrying coil whose plane is in the magnetic meridian (the
plane in which the earth’s magnetic field is present in vertical and horizontal directions). So if the needle in
equilibrium subtends an angle  with the earth’s horizontal magnetic field, then for equilibrium we have
   
| M  BH | = | M  B C | … (1)
(direction of the torque on the needle due to field of the earth (BH) and due to field of the coil (BC) must be
opposite) 
Here M is the magnetic moment of the needle

B H is the earth’s horizontal magnetic field

BC is the magnetic field at centre due to coil
Now from equation-(1), we have
or, MBH sin  = MBC sin (90 – ) or, BC = BH tan 

 0 N
or, = BH tan  here R is the radius of the coil and N is the number of turns.
2R
2RBH
i.e.,  = K tan  with K =  N  Reduction factor of the tangent galvanometer, i.e., in case of a tangent
0
galvanometer when the plane of coil is in magnetic meridian, current in the coil is directly proportional to the
tangent of deflection of magnetic needle.
Current
carrying
coil (fixed in
Compass vertical plane)
needle
Compass
Tangent Galvanometer
6. If at a place horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field is BH = 2 × 10–5 T, No. of turns in the coil N = 100,
current I = 10 mA, coil radius =  cm. The angle of dip at this position will be :
  
(A) (B) (C) (D) Data insufficient
6 4 3
7. If no. of turns in coil are doubled, the reduction factor of tangent galvanometer will be :
(A) 0.001 (B) 0.002 (C) 0.005 (D) None of these
8. If at an instant in equilibrium after doubling the number of turns compass needle points in the direction 30º
north of east then current in coil is :
3 3 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
200 500 200 3 500 3
DPPS FILE # 138

Topics : Electromagnet Induction, Rotation, Center of Mass, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic
Force on Charge/current
1. In the circuit shown switch S is connected to position 2 for a long time
and then joined to position 1. The total heat produced in resistance R1
is :
L E2 L E2
(A) 2 (B) 2
2R 2 2R1
L E2 L E2 (R1  R 2 )2
(C) (D) 2 2
2R1R 2 2R1 R 2
2. A tugsten bulb radiates 2 W of energy.The filament of the bulb has surface area 2 mm2 and an emissivity of
0.9.The temperature of the bulb is: (Stefan’s Constant  = 5.6 × 10–8 S.I. units)
(A) 3500K (B) 4210K (C) 2110K (D) 211K
3. A person with a defective sight is using a lens having a power of +2D. The lens he is using is
(A) concave lens with f = 0.5 m (B) convex lens with f = 2.0 m
(C) concave lens with f = 0.2 m (D) convex lens with f = 0.5 m
4. A uniform solid cylinder is given an angular speed  and placed on a 
rough plate of negligible thickness. The horizontal surface below the m
plate is smooth. Then the angular speed of the cylinder when it starts
m'
pure rolling on the plate will be: [ Assume sufficient length of plate ] ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
  2
2 3 3
5. Four blocks of masses M1, M2, M3 and M4 are placed on a
smooth horizontal surface along a straight line as shown. It is M1
given that M1 >> M2 >> M3 >> M4. All the blocks are initially at
M2
rest. M1 is given initial velocity v0 towards right such that it will M3
collide with M2. Consider all collisions to be perfectly elastic. M4
The speed of M4 after all collision are over is
(A) v0 (B) 4 v0 (C) 8 v0 (D) 16 v0
COMPREHENSION

A uniform and constant magnetic field B  (20 î  30 ĵ  50 k̂ ) Tesla exists in space. A charged particle with
 q  10 3 
charge to mass ratio    C/kg enters this region at time t = 0 with a velocity V  (20 î  50 ĵ  30 k̂ ) m/
m
  19
s. Assume that the charged particle always remains in space having the given magnetic field. (Use 2 = 1.4)

6. During the further motion of the particle in the magnetic field, the angle between the magnetic field B and
velocity of the particle
(A) remains constant (B) increases
(C) decreases (D) may increase or decrease.
7. The frequency of the revolution of the particle in cycles per second will be
103 10 4 10 4 10 4
(A) (B) (C) (D)
 19  38  19 2 19
8. The pitch of the helical path of the motion of the particle will be
   
(A) m (B) m (C) m (D) m
100 125 215 250
DPPS FILE # 139
Topics : Heat, Center of Mass, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/current, Rotation,
Geometrical Optics
1. The graph shown gives the temperature along an x axis that
extends directly through a wall consisting of three layers A, B
and C. The air temperature on one side of the wall is 150°C
t(ºC)
and on the other side is 80°C. Thermal conduction through the
wall is steady. Out of the three layers A, B and C, thermal 150
conductivity is greatest of the layer 140
120
80
(A) A B C
A
(B) B
40 60 70 x(cm)
(C) C
(D) Thermal conductivity of A = Thermal conductivity of B.
2. Which of the following statements is true concerning the elastic collision of two objects ?
(It is given that no net external force acts on the system of two object; and the objects do not exert
force on each other except during collision)
(A) No net work is done on any of the two objects, since there is no external force on the system of
given two object.
(B) The net work done by the first object on the second is equal to the net work done by the second on
the first.
(C) The net work done by the first object on the second is exactly the opposite of the net work done by
the second on the first.
(D) The net work done on the system depends on the angle of collision.
3. Choose the correct statements :

(A) For a closed surface, the surface integration  B.ds is always zero, where B is magnetic field
(B) A current carrying circular loop is in a uniform external magnetic field and is free to rotate about its diametrical
axis will be in stable equilibrium when flux of total magnetic field (external field + field due to the loop itself) is
maximum.
(C)
Spectral energy distributed graph of a black body is shown in figure. If temperature (in K) of the black body is
doubled and surface area is halved, the area under the graph will be eight times.
T2
(D) In keplers III law, depends on the mass of the Sun, around which a planet is revolving.
R3
DPPS FILE # 140

4. A cylinder and a variable mass M are arranged on a fixed wedge using a light string and a massless pulley.
There is enough friction between cylinder and the wedge to prevent any slipping.
Mass less pulley
Cylinder
M
Fixed Wedge
(A) Only one value of M is possible for which cylinder can remain in equilibrium.
(B) There is a range of value of M for which cylinder can remain in equilibrium.
(C) For a certain value of M, the cylinder starts to roll up the plane. In this situation, magnitude of friction force
on the cylinder by the wedge will be greater than tension in the string
(D) For a certain value of M, the cylinder starts to roll down the plane. In this situation, magnitude of friction
force on the cylinder by the wedge will be greater than tension in the string
5. In the circuit shown S1 & S2 are switches. S2 remains closed for a long time and S1 open. Now S1 is also
di
closed. Just after S1 is closed, find the potential difference (V) across R and (with sign) in L.
dt
COMPREHENSION
Figure shows a plano-convex lens of refractive index 3 placed in air. The maximum thickness of the lens
is 3 mm and its aperture diameter is 8 mm. Point A lies on the curved surface on the principal axis. A light ray
is incident at the point A as shown in the figure making 60° with the normal.
A
60°
6. The angle of deviation caused by the lens is :

(A) 60° (B) 30° (C) 0° (D) 15°
7. The lateral displacement of the light ray in passing through the lens is :
(A) 3 mm (B) 3 3 mm (C) 3 mm (D) Zero
8. The focal length of the lens if treated as a thin lens is :

5 5 25 5
(A) cm (B) cm (C) ( 3  1) cm (D) ( 3  1) cm
12 24 12 24
DPPS FILE # 141

Topics : Electromagnet Induction, Geometrical Optics, Center of Mass, Heat, Magnetic Effect of Current
and Magnetic Force on Charge/current,

1. The current through the solenoid is changing in such way that flux through it is given by  = t. Then the
reading of the two voltmeters V1 and V2 differ by :
(A) zero (B) 
(R1  R 2 ) R1R 2
(C) R1  R 2 (D) R  R
1 2
2. A car is fitted with a convex side–view mirror of focal length 20 cm. A second car 2.8 m behind the first car is
overtaking the first car at a relative speed of 15 m/s. The speed of the image of the second car as seen in the
mirror of the first one is :
1 1
(A) m/s (B) m/s (C) 10 m/s (D) 15 m/s
10 15
3. In the figure shown of a block A moving with velocity 10m/s on a horizontal surface collides with another block
1
B at rest initially. The coefficient of restitution is . Neglect friction every where. The distance between the
2
blocks at 5s after the collision takes place is :
10m/s
A B
(A) 20 m (B) 10 m
(C) 25 m (D) Cannot be determined because masses are not given.
4. The ends of a rod of uniform thermal conductivity are maintained at different (constant) temperatures. After
the steady state is achieved :
(A) heat flows in the rod from high temperature to low temperature even if the rod has nonuniform cross
sectional area.
(B) temperature gradient along length is same even if the rod has non uniform cross sectional area.
(C) heat current is same even if the rod has non-uniform cross sectional area.
(D) if the rod has uniform cross sectional area the temperature is same at all points of the rod.
DPPS FILE # 142

5. Figure shows the path of an electron in a region of uniform magnetic field. The path consists of two
straight sections, each between a pair of uniformly charged plates, and two half circles. The electric
field exists only between the plates.


Pair-A


Pair-B
(A) Plate I of pair A is at higher potential than plate-II of the same pair.
(B) Plate I of pair B is at higher potential than plate II of the same pair.
(C) Direction of the magnetic field is out of the page [ ].
(D) Direction of the magnetic field in to the page [ ].
COMPREHENSION
A uniform rod is hinged at the ceiling of a cart and is free to rotate as shown in diagram. Hinge is smooth.
Initially the cart is at rest. Mass of the rod is 'M' and length 'L'. Now the cart starts moving with constant
acceleration in forward direction.
6. The minimum acceleration of the cart for which rod will become horizontal at some moment during motion is
(A) g
g
(B)
2
(C) 2g
(D) Rod cannot become horizontal whatever may be acceleration
7. The normal reaction on the hinge at the initial instant when the cart starts moving with above minimum
acceleration is
Mg Mg
(A) Mg (B) 2 Mg (C) (D) 17
4 4
8. If the mass of the cart is '2M' (without rod) then for the above condition the frictional force acting on the wheels
of the cart at initial instant will be
5Mg 9Mg
(A) 2Mg (B) 3 Mg (C) (D)
4 4
DPPS FILE # 143

Topics : Kinematics, Electromagnet Induction, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/
current, Center of Mass, Rotation
1. For a particle moving along x-axis, which of the velocity versus position graphs given in options below
is/are possible : (position is represented by x-coordinate of the particle)
2. A uniform magnetic field B increasing with time exists in a cylindrical region of centre O and radius R. The
direction of magnetic field is inwards the paper as shown. The work done by external agent in taking a unit
positive charge slowly from A to C via paths APC, AOC and AQC be WAPC, W AOC and W AQC respectively. Then-
(A) W APC = W AOC = W AQC (B) W APC > W AOC > W AQC
(C) W APC < W AOC < W AQC (D) W APC = W AQC< W AOC
3. A semi–circular current carrying wire having radius R is placed in x–y plane with its centre at origin O. There
 B x
is a position x dependent non–uniform magnetic field B  0 k̂ (here B0 is positive constant) existing in the
2R
region. The force due to magnetic field acting on the semi–circular wire will be along :
(A) negative x-axis (B) positive x-axis

(C) negative y-axis (D) positive y-axis
DPPS FILE # 144

4. A ball is rolling without slipping in a spiral path down the inner surface of a hollow fixed cone whose axis is
vertical. The work done by the inner surface of the cone on the ball is
(A) positive (B) zero (C) negative (D) Impossible to determine
5. Two blocks of mass m and 2m are fixed to the ends of a spring. The spring is initially compressed &
then the system is released in air (neglecting the air resistance). After time t
(A) the momentum of the system will be zero
(B) the momentum of the system will be 3 m g t
(C) the momentum of the system will be m g t
(D) the momentum of the system will not depend on the value of spring constant.
COMPREHENSION
A disc of mass ‘m’ and radius R is free to rotate in horizontal plane about a vertical smooth fixed axis passing
m
through its centre. There is a smooth groove along the diameter of the disc and two small balls of mass
2
each are placed in it on either side of the centre of the disc as shown in fig. The disc is given initial angular
velocity 0 and released.
m
2
•
6. The angular speed of the disc when the balls reach the end of the disc is :
0 0 2 0 0
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 3 4
7. The speed of each ball relative to ground just after they leave the disc is :
m
2
•
R0 R0 2R0

3 2 3
8. The net work done by forces exerted by disc on one of the ball for the duration ball remains on the disc is
2mR 2 02 mR 2 20 mR 2 20 mR 2 20

(A) (B) (C) (D)
9 18 6 9
DPPS FILE # 145

Topics : Center of Mass, Electromagnet Induction, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on
Charge/current, Rotation
1. Ball A of mass m after sliding from an inclined plane, strikes elastically another ball B of same mass at
rest. Find the minimum height H so that ball B just completes the circular motion.
5R
(A) H = 3R (B) H = 2R (C) H = (D) H = 4R
2
2. The velocity time graph of a linear motion is shown in the figure. The distance from the starting point
after 8 seconds will be:
(A) 18 m (B) 6 m (C) 8 m (D) none of these
3. Figure shows three regions of magnetic field, each of area A, and in each region magnitude of magnetic
  
field decreases at a constant rate . If E is induced electric field then value of line integral E . d r

along the given loop is equal to
X X X X
X XX X XX
X X X X
(A) A (B) –A (C) 3A (D) –3A
4. Wire bent as ABOCD as shown, carries current  entering at A and leaving at D. Three uniform magnetic
fields each B0 exist in the region as shown. The force on the wire is
(A) 3  R B0 (B) 5  R B0 (C) 8  R B0 (D) 6  R B0
DPPS FILE # 146

5. As shown in figure, S is a point on a uniform disc rolling with uniform angular velocity on a fixed rough
horizontal surface. The only forces acting on the disc are its weight and contact forces exerted by
horizontal surface. Which graph best represents the magnitude of the acceleration of point S as a
function of time
(A) (B) (C) (D)
COMPREHENSION
A uniform disc of mass M and radius R initially stands vertically on the right end of a horizontal plank
of mass M and length L, as shown.The plank rests on smooth horizontal floor and friction between disc
and plank is sufficiently high such that disc rolls on plank without slipping. The plank is pulled to right
with a constant horizontal force of magnitude F.
6. The magnitude of acceleration of plank

F F 3F 3F
(A) (B) (C) (D)
8M 4M 2M 4M
7. The magnitude of angular acceleration of the disc

F F F 3F
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4mR 8mR 2mR 2mR
8. The distance travelled by centre of disc from its initial position till the left end of plank comes vertically
below the centre of disc is
L L L
(A) (B) (C) (D) L
2 4 8
DPPS FILE # 147

Topics : Rotation, Electromagnet Induction, Simple Harmonic Motion

1. A sphere of mass ' m ' is given some angular velocity about a horizontal
axis through its centre and gently placed on a plank of mass ' m '. The co-
efficient of friction between the two is . The plank rests on a smooth
horizontal surface. The initial acceleration of the centre of sphere relative
to the plank will be:
(A) zero (B) g (C) (7/5) g (D) 2 g
2. All electrons ejected from a surface by incident light of wavelength 200 nm can be stopped before travelling
1 m in the direction of uniform electric field of 4 N/C. The work function of the surface is:
(A) 4 eV (B) 6.2 eV (C) 2 eV (D) 2.2 eV
3. Both the inductors and the cell are ideal. Find the current (in Amperes) 2H
inductance in steady state.
(A) zero (B) 1A

(C) 2A (D) 3A
4. A system is shown in the figure. The time period for small oscillations of the two blocks will be.
3m 3m 3m 3m
(A) 2  (B) 2  (C) 2  (D) 2 
k 2k 4k 8k
5. A spherical cavity is formed from a solid sphere by removing mass from it. The
resultant configuration is shown in figure. Find out the moment of inertia of this
configuration about the axis through centre of the solid sphere as shown. Take
mass M (uniform) for the configuration and radius R for solid sphere and radius
R/2 for cavity.
COMPREHENSION
A tank of height 'H' and base area 'A' is half filled with water and there is a very small orifice at the bottom and
A
there is a heavy solid cylinder having base area . The water is flowing out of the orifice. Here cylinder is put
3
into the tank to increase the speed of water flowing out. It is given that height of the cylinder is same as that
of the tank.
6. The speed of water flowing out of the orifice before the cylinder kept inside the tank
gh gh
(A) gH (B) 1.414 gH (C) (D)
2 2
7. The speed of water flowing out of orifice after the cylinder is kept inside it
3gH gH
(A) 3gH (B) 2gH (C) (D)
2 2
H
8. After long time, when the height of water inside the tank again becomes equal to . The solid cylinder is
2
taken out. Then the velocity of liquid flowing out of orifice will be
H H gH 3gH
(A) 2g   (B) 2g   (C) (D)
2 3 3 2
DPPS FILE # 148

Topics : Rotation, Simple Harmonic Motion, Electromagnet Induction, Alternating Current

1. A plank P is placed on a solid cylinder S, which rolls on a horizontal surface. The two are of equal
mass. There is no slipping at any of the surfaces in contact. The ratio of the kinetic energy of P to the
kinetic energy of S is:
(A) 1: 1 (B) 2: 1 (C) 8: 3 (D) 1: 4
2. There is a uniform solid hemisphere. On its upper plane x and y axis are drawn which are mutually perpendicular
as shown. Z–axis is perpendicular to the upper plane and passing through the centre O. If moment of inertia
of the hemisphere about x, y and z-axis are Ix, Iy and Iz respectively then :
(A) Iz = Ix + Iy (B) Iz = Ix – Iy
Ix  I y Ix – I y
(C) Iz = (D) Iz =
2 2
3. A block of mass ‘m’ is suspended from a spring and executes vertical SHM of time period T as shown in
figure. The amplitude of the SHM is A and spring is never in compressed state during the oscillation. The
magnitude of minimum force exerted by spring on the block is
4 2 4 2
(A) mg  mA (B) mg  mA
T2 T2
2 2
(C) mg  mA (D) mg  mA
T2 T2
DPPS FILE # 149

4. Photons of energy 5 eV are incident on cathode. Electrons reaching the anode have kinetic energies varying
from 6eV to 8eV.
(A) Work function of the metal is 2 eV

(B) Work function of the metal is 3 eV
(C) Current in the circuit is equal to saturation value.
(D) Current in the circuit is less than saturation value.
5. An ideal inductor, (having initial current zero) a resistor and an ideal battery are connected in series at
time t = 0. At any time t, the battery supplies energy at the rate PB, the resistor dissipates energy at
the rate PR and the inductor stores energy at the rate PL.
(A) PB = PR + PL for all times t. (B) PR < PL for all times t.
(C) PR < PL only near the starting of the circuit. (D) PR > PL only near the starting of the circuit.
COMPREHENSION
A steady current 4 A flows in an inductor coil when connected to a 12 V dc source as shown in figure
1. If the same coil is connected to an ac source of 12 V, 50 rad/s, a current of 2.4 A flows in the circuit
1
as shown in figure 2. Now after these observations, a capacitor of capacitance F is connected in
50
series with the coil and with the same AC source as shown in figure 3 :
6. The inductance of the coil is nearly equal to

(A) 0.01 H (B) 0.02 H (C) 0.04 H (D) 0.08 H
7. The resistance of the coil is :

(A) 1  (B) 2  (C) 3  (D) 4 
8. The average power supplied to the circuit after connecting capacitance in series is approximately equal
to:
(A) 24 W (B) 72 W (C) 144 W (D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 150

Topics : Fluid, Electromagnet Induction, Rotation, Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetic Force on
Charge/current
1. A container of a large uniform cross-sectional area A resting on a horizontal surface holds two immiscible,
non-viscous and incompressible liquids of densities ' d ' and ' 2 d ' each of height (1/2)H as shown. The
smaller density liquid is open to atmosphere. A homogeneous solid cylinder of length L  1 H cross-
 
2
sectional area (1/5) A is immersed such that it floats with its axis vertical to the liquid-liquid interface with
length (1/4) L in denser liquid. If D is the density of the solid cylinder then :
3d d 2d 5d
(A) D = (B) D = (C) D = (D) D =
2 2 3 4
2. In an L-R circuit connected to a battery of constant e.m.f. E switch S is closed at time t = 0. If e denotes the
induced e.m.f. across inductor and i the current in the circuit at any time t. Then which of the following
graphs shows the variation of e with i ?
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3. The effective value of current i = 2 sin 100  t + 2 cos (100  t + 30º) is:
(A) 2 A (B) 2 A (C) 4 A (D) 2 2 A
DPPS FILE # 151

4. The angular momentum of an electron in first orbit of Li++ ion is :
3h 9h h h
(A) 2  (B) 2  (C) 2  (D) 6 
COMPREHENSION
A horizontal uniform rod of mass 'm' has its left end hinged to the fixed
incline plane, while its right end rests on the top of a uniform cylinder of
mass 'm' which in turn is at rest on the fixed inclined plane as shown. The
coefficient of friction between the cylinder and rod, and between the cylinder
and inclined plane, is sufficient to keep the cylinder at rest.

mg mg mg 2 mg
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 3 2 3
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 3 (C) 2 : 1 (D) 2 :1
3 mg 5 mg
(A) mg (B) (C) 2mg (D)
2 4
8. STATEMENT-1 : A pendulum made of an insulated rigid massless rod of length is attached to a small
sphere of mass m and charge q. The pendulum is undergoing oscillations of small amplitude having time

period T. Now a uniform horizontal magnetic field B out of plane of page is switched on. As a result of this
change, the time period of oscillations does not change.
STATEMENT-2 : A force acting along the string on the bob of a simple pendulum (such that tension in string
is never zero) does not produce any restoring torque on the bob about the hinge.
DPPS FILE # 152

Topics : Fluid, Electromagnet Induction, Alternating Current, Morden Physics, Rotation, Magnetic Effect of
Current and Magnetic Force on Charge/current
1. A block of silver of mass 4 kg hanging from a string is immersed in a liquid of relative density 0.72. If relative
density of silver is 10, then tension in the string will be:[ take g = 10 m/s2 ]
(A) 37.12 N (B) 42 N
(C) 73 N (D) 21 N
2. In the circuit switch S is closed at time t = 0, the current through C and L would be equal after a time 't' equal
L
to : (Given : R = ):
C
(A) RC (B) RL
(C) RC n2 (D) R/L n2
3. Current in an A.C. circuit is given by i = 2 2 sin (t + /4), then the average value of current during
time t = 0 to t = 1 sec is:
4
(A) 0 (B) A

4 2
(C) A (D) 2 2 A

4. A hydrogen atom is in the 4th excited state, then:

(A) the maximum number of emitted photons will be 10.
(B) the maximum number of emitted photons will be 6.
(C) it can emit three photons in ultraviolet region.
(D) if an infrared photon is generated, then a visible photon may follow this infrared photon.
DPPS FILE # 153

COMPREHENSION
A uniform solid cylinder of mass M and radius R is placed on two fixed wedges as shown. The inclined
surface of each wedge makes an angle = 45o with horizontal. The coefficient of friction between
cylinder and each wedge is  (< 1). The angular velocity of cylinder at shown instant is non zero and
sense of rotation of cylinder about its axis is clockwise.( g is acceleration due to gravity)
fixed fixed
wedge wedge
A B
5. At the shown instant, magnitude of frictional force on cylinder exerted by left wedge A is :
Mg(1   ) Mg(1   ) Mg(1   )

(A) (B) (C) (D)none of these
2 (1   2 ) 2 (1   2 ) 2(1   2 )
6. At the shown instant, magnitude of frictional force on cylinder exerted by right wedge B is -
Mg(1   ) Mg(1   ) Mg(1   )

(A) 2 (B) (C) (D) none of these
2 (1   ) 2 (1   2 ) 2(1   2 )
7. At the shown instant, magnitude of angular acceleration of cylinder is :
4 2 g 2 2 g
(A) 0 (B) 2 (C) (D)none of these
R(1   ) R(1   2 )
8. STATEMENT–1 : No electric current will be present within a region having uniform and constant magnetic
field.

STATEMENT–2 : W ithin a region of uniform and constant magnetic field B , the path integral of
   
magnetic field B  d  along any closed path is zero. Hence from Ampere circuital law B  d    o I
 
(where the given terms have usual meaning), no current can be present within a region having
uniform and constant magnetic field.
DPPS FILE # 154

DPP NO. - 1 DPP NO. - 10
1. (C) 2. (C) 3. (D) 4. (A) 1. (C) 2. (C) 3. (D) 4. (C)
5. (A) 6.(A)(B)(C)(D) 7. (A)(B)(C)(D) 5. (C) 6. (C) 7. Will not change
8. (C) 9. (B) 10. (C) 8. (C) 9. (C) 10. (C)

1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (C) 4. (C)
1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (D) 4. (A) 5. (A)
5. (C) 6. (D) 7. (C) 8. (D)
9. (C) 10. (A) p,q (B) q,r (C) q,r (D) s 6. (B), (C) 7. (A) 8. R = 75 cm. 9. (B)
10. (C)
DPP NO. - 3
DPP NO. - 12
1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (D)
5. (BC 6. (ABD) 7. (BC) 8. 56 J 1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (D)
9. (A) s, (B) p, (C) s, (D) q
125
5. h = m above point of projection
3
DPP NO. - 4
6. 2 F2b/ma 7. 8 cm 8. (C)
1. (A) 2. (A) 3. (A) 4. (A,D) 9. (B) 10. (C)
5. 70 cm 6. (A) 7. (C) 8. (D)
DPP NO. - 13
DPP NO. - 5
1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (A)
1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (AC) 4. 4 5. zero
6. 1 7. (A) 8. (D) 9. (B) 5. (C) 6. (C) 7. (A), (B), (D)
10. (A) p (B) q (C) p,q (D) s 8. 25 cm. 9. (B) 10. (A) 11. (C)

1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (C) 4. (D) 5. (A) 1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (D) 4. (A)
6. 5 cm 7. (B) 8. (D) 9. (A) 5. (B), (C), (D) 6. (A), (C)
10. (A) s (B) q (C) r (D) q
2A H
7. t =
3a
 2 1  g
DPP NO. - 7
 3 5   3 5 
125 8. sin  x   t  + sin  x   t
 2 4 2   2 4 2 
1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (C) 4. (D) 5. m
4 9. (D) 10. (C)
6. d = 4000 mm 7. (D) 8. (A) 9. (D)
DPP NO. - 15
DPP NO. - 8
1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (C)
1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (C) 4. (A) 5. (A) 4. (B), (C) 5. (A), (C), (D) 6. 90 J
6. On the object itself 7. 13 3
8. (B) 9. (D) 10. (D) 10 30
7. a1= m/s2, a2 = m/s2
7 7
DPP NO. - 9 8. (C) 9. (C) 10. (A)
1. (D) 2. (B) 3. (A,C) 4 11 cm
5. 3 6. (D) 7. (C) 8. (A) DPP NO. - 16
9. (B) 1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (D) 4. (B) 5. (C)
6. (A), (C), (D) 7. 1:1 8. (D) 9. (D)
10. (D)
DPPS FILE # 155

1. (D) 2. (B) 3. (A), (B), (C), (D) 1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (D) 4. (B)
4. (A), (D) 5.  = /3 5. (A) 6. (C) 7. (A,C) 8. 8
9. 300 gm
6 q2
6. 7. (C) 8. (A) 10. (A) – p,r,t, ; (B) – q, s ; (C) – p,s,t ; (D) – p,s,t
4 0 a 2
9. (B) 10. (A) p, s ; (B)r ; (C) r ; (D) p, s
DPP NO. - 25
DPP NO. - 18 1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (B) 4. (B)
16 7
1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (B) 5. (B) 6. (B,C,D) 7. V = m/s
5. (B) 6. 6 7. (C) 8. (A) 3
8. (B) 9. (D) 10. (C)
9. (A) 10. (A)  (p, r, s), (B)  (p, s),
(C)  (r, s), (D)  (q, s)
DPP NO. - 26
DPP NO. - 19 1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (D) 4. (A)
5. (C) 6. (D) 7. (A, B, C, D)
1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (B)
8. (B) 9. (B) 10. (C)
5. (B), (C), (D) 6. a 7. (B)
8. (B) 9. (B)
DPP NO. - 27
10. (A) q,r (B) p,s (C) p,s (D) p,s
1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (B) 4. (A)
DPP NO. - 20 5. (A, B, C, D) 6.  = v/3R
1. (C) 2. (D) 3. (D) 7. (B) 8. (A) 9. (D)
4. (B) 5. (B), (D) 10. (A) p,r (B) q,s (C) p,r (D) q,s
6. (a) 6m, 0.25 Hz, 1.5m/s
(b) 1.5 mm/s,0.752mm/s (c) × 10–3
DPP NO. - 28
1. (A) 2. (D) 3. (B, D) 4. (A, C)
3QR 2
7. 5. (i) uy = 5 m/s (ii) ux = 4 m/s
8  0 x 4 6. 4 py  y2 + 4 x2)1/2 7. (C) 8. (A)
8. (A) 9. (A) 10. (B) 9. (B) 10. (A) p (B) q,s (C) q,s (D) q,s

1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (B) 4. (A), (B), (C) 1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (D) 4. (D)
5. (A), (C) 6. (B), (D) 7. (A) 8. (B) 5. (A), (C), (D) 6. (C) 7. (D)
9. (A) 10. (A) p (B) q,s (C) p (D) q,s 8. (A)

1. (C) 2. (A) 3. (C) 4. (D) 1. (D) 2. (B) 3. (A), (D) 4. 0.3 m
5. (C) 6. (A) 7. (C) 8. (A), (B), (D) 5. (a) 4.5 m/s (b) 1.5 m/s (c) 3.75 cm
9. (A), (B), (D) 10. (A), (C) 6. (B) 7. (C) 8. (D)

1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (D) 4. (C) 1. (C) 2. 5
5 VP 5V K(qa  qb ) K ( q a  qb )
5. (A) 6. (a) VP = V (b) = = 3. (i) (a) v = ; E=
4 R 4R r r2
7. (A) 8. (B) 9. (C)
10. (A) p (B) q (C) p,r (D) q,s Kqb  qb
(b) E = (ii) b = (iii) 0
r 2
4 b 2
DPPS FILE # 156

1 DPP NO. - 39
4. (a)  = 2av2, R = (b)  =  bv2 / a2, R = a2 / b
2a
1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (D)
5. (A) 6. (B) 7. (B)
8. (A) p,q (B) p,q (C) q,r (D) q,r 6  10 2
4. [13] 5. m
10 
DPP NO. - 32
6. (a) T = 40 (3 cos  – 2 cos 0) kg f. (b) 0 = 60°
1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (C) 7. (D) 8. (A) 9. (A)
2GM  1 
4. 1   DPP NO. - 40
a  2
Q 1. (B) 2. (D) 3. (B) 4. (A)
5. ,which is same as that before earthing 5. (D) 6. 1  109 N/m2 7. (C)
3
8. (B) 9. (B)
6. 2 7. (A) 8. (D) 9. (B)

1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (A) 1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (B)
5. (A) 6. (C) 7. (B) 5. 3 / 2 6. (D) 7. (C) 8. (C)
8. 27.04 N 9. (A) p,s (B) p,s (C) q,s (D) r
DPP NO. - 42
DPP NO. - 34 1. (C) 2. (C)
AC x 3. v1 =30, v2 = – 25, v3 = -35/3, v4 = -25 cm
1. (C) 2. (A,B,C) 3. = = ( 2 – 1) 4. 64 5. 4 radians 6. (B)
PC x
7. (C) (D) 8. (A)(B) (C)
9 3mg
4. 5. x + 2y = 4 6. (h  d)
11 d3
DPP NO. - 43
7. (D) 8. (A) 9. (D)
1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (A) (C) 4. 1
DPP NO. - 35 9r
5. 6. (B) 7. (A) 8. (C)
10
1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (C) 4. 52 m
5. (B) 6. (A) 7. (B) DPP NO. - 44
8. (A) p (B) q (C) p (D) s
1. (C) 2. (A) 3. (A) (C) 4. 8000
5. (C) 6. (C) 7. (B)
DPP NO. - 36
8. (A) p,r (B) q, r (C) q, r (D) q, r
1. (C) 2. (D) 3. (D) 4. (C)
5. (B)(D) 6. (A) 7. (B) 8. (D) DPP NO. - 45
DPP NO. - 37 1. (A) 2. (B) 3. 8 4. x = 5
5. (B) 6. (A) 7. (C)
1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (B) 4. (B)(C) 8. (A) – q,t; (B) – p,r,s ; (C) – p,r,s ; (D) – q,r,t
5. (C) 6. (A)
7. (D) 8. (A) p, q, r, s,t; (B) p, q, r, s,t; DPP NO. - 46
(C) p, s,t; (D) p, q, r, s,t
1. (C) 2. (D) 3. (B) 4. (C)
DPP NO. - 38 5. (B) 6. (A) 7. (C)
1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (A) 4. (D) 8. (A) – p,q,s, (B) – r, (C) – r,t ; (D) – p,q,s,t.
5. (C) (D) 6. 1.05 × 109 Pa.
7. (A) 8. (D) 9. (C)
DPPS FILE # 157

1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (D) 4. (A) 1. (C) 2. (B) 3. 600 4. 4 times
5. (C) 6. (A) 7. (A) 8. (C) 5. (A) 6. (C) 7. (A) 8. (D)

1. (C) 2. (A) 3. (A,C) 4. (B) 1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (B) 4. (B)
5. (A) 6. (C) 7. (C) 8. (A) 13 0 A

5. (B) 6. 7. (C)
10 d
DPP NO. - 49 8. (B)
1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (B)
5. t1 > t2 6. (C) 7. (A) 8. (C)
DPP NO. - 59
1. (C) 2. (D) 3. (A) 4. (A) (C)
DPP NO. - 50 5. (A) (C) 6. (C) 7. (A) 8. (C)
9g
1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (A) 4. = DPP NO. - 60
4
5. Flag will flutter in south direction. 6. (C) 1. (D) 2. (D) 3. (A) 4. (A) (C) (D)
7. (D) 8. (C)
5. (A) (C) 6. (A) 7. (A) 8. (D)

1. (A) 2. (D) 3. (A) 4. (A) (C) (D) 1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (A) (C) 4. (A) (C)
5. (B) 6. (C) 7. (C) 8. (D) 5. x = 3 m 6. (C) 7. (B) 8. (A)

1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (A) 1. (D) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (A)
 5. (D) 6. (C) 7. (C) 8. (C)
5. VAB =
1  3    = 10V
2 6. (A)
7. (C) 8. (A) DPP NO. - 63
1. (C) 2. (A) 3. (B) 4. (D)
DPP NO. - 53
5. 96 m 6. (D) 7. (C) 8. (B)
1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (B) (C) 4. 3000
5. R = r 6. (B) 7. (B) 8. (A) DPP NO. - 64
1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. 12
DPP NO. - 54
5. 1 6. (B) 7. (B) 8. (A)
1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (B) 4. (C)
5. 04 6. (C) 7. (C) 8. (A) DPP NO. - 65
1. (C) 2. (A) 3. (C) 4. (B) (D)
DPP NO. - 55
5. 7 6. (A) 7. (D) 8. (B)
1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (C) 4. 2
5. v= 5gR 6. (A) 7. (C) DPP NO. - 66
8. (C) 9. (A) 10. (B) 1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (A) (B)
5. 4.8 Ma2 6. (B) 7. (D)
DPP NO. - 56 8. (C)
1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (C) 4. (A)
5. (B) 6. (B,D) 7. (D) 8. (B)
9. (C)
DPPS FILE # 158

1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (A) 1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (A)(B) (D) 4. (A) (D)
5. (D) 6. (D) 7. (C) 8. (B) 
5. 6. (C) 7. (C) 8. (C)
3
DPP NO. - 68
1. (D) 2. (D) 3. (A) 4. (C) DPP NO. - 76
M 2l 2M 1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (C) 4. (A) (C)
5. (C) 6. (C) 7. M'  m  2r   
l   5. (A) (B) (C) 6. (A) 7. (D)
8. (A) p,r (B) p,q,r,s (C) p,q,r,s (D) q,s 8. (D)
9. (B)
DPP NO. - 77
DPP NO. - 69
1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (B)
1. (C) 2. (C) 3. (D) 5. (B) (D) 6. (B) 7. (C) 8. (D)
4. (A)(B)(C)(D) 5. 2 K̂ 6. 2 M B, M B
8. (A) p, s; (B) q; (C) r, s; (D) q 9. (C)
DPP NO. - 78
1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (B) 4. (D)
DPP NO. - 70 5. (C) 6. (D) 7. (C) 8. (A)
1. (C) 2. (A) 3. (C) 4. 9
DPP NO. - 79
6
5. t = g sec. 6. 0.44 T 7. 105 m 1. (D) 2. (D) 3. (D) 4. (C)
57
8. (A) – (q) ; (B) – (r) ; (C) – (s) ; (D) – (p) 5.  = MR2 6. (A) 7. (C)
140
9. (C) 8. (B)

1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (D) 4. (A) 1. (C) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (A) (D)
5. (a) V = g / 3 ,  = 4g / 3 ] 5. (A) (C) 6. (D) 7. (C)
6. y = 2 7. (A) 8. (D) 9. (A)

DPP NO. - 81
DPP NO. - 72
1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (A)
1. (C) 2. (A) 3. (A) 4. (D)
4. (C) 5. (C) 6. (A)
5. (A) 7. (B) 8. (B) 9. (A)
7. (B) 8. (A)
DPP NO. - 73
1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (B)
DPP NO. - 82
m gB  c 1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (B)
5. imax = 2 2
6. (D) 7. (C)
m B  c 4. (D) 5. (B) 6. (A)
8. (A) 7. (C) 8. (A)
DPP NO. - 74
1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (D) 4. (D)
5. (C) 6. (A) 7. (B) 8. (D)
DPPS FILE # 159

Index
DPP File- Physics
XII Standard
S.NO Topics Page No
1 DPPs- Physics 001-154
2 Answer Key- Physics 155-159

Topic : Mathematical Tools

1. sin 300º is equal to
3 3
(A) 1/2 (B) –1/2 (C)  (D)
2 2
2. Value of tan225º is :
1
(A) 3 (B) (C) 1 (D) –1
3
3. Value of sin15º. cos15º is :
3
(A) 1 (B) 1/2 (C) 1/4 (D)
2
4. Value of sin (37°) cos (53°) is -
9 12 16 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
25 25 25 5
1
5. If sin  = , then cos  will be -
3
8 4 2 2 3
(A)  (B)  (C)  (D) 
9 3 3 4
6. Which of the following has value 1 :

(A) tan 45° (B) sin 90° (C) cos 90° (D) cos 0°
COMPREHENSION
Following are three equations of motion
1 2
S(t) = ut + at v(s) = u 2  2 a s v(t) = u + at
2
Where ; S, u, t, a, v are respectively the displacement (dependent variable), initial velocity (constant),
time taken (independent variable), acceleration (constant) and final velocity (dependent variable) of the
particle after time t.
7. Find displacement of a particle after 10 seconds starting from rest with a uniform acceleration of 2m/s2.
(A) 10 m (B) 100 m (C) 50 m (D) 200 m
8. Find the velocity of the particle after 100 m –
(A) 10 m/s (B) 20 m/s (C) 30 m/s (D) 0 m/s
9. Find the velocity of the particle after 10 seconds if its acceleration is zero in interval (0 to 10 s) –
(A) 10 m/s (B) 20 m/s (C) 30 m/s (D) 0 m/s
10. Find the displacement of the particle when its velocity becomes 10 m/s if acceleration is 5 m/s 2 all
through–
(A) 50 m (B) 200 m (C) 10 m (D) 100 m
DPPS FILE # 1

dy
1. y = x 3 + 2x 2 + 7x + 8 then will be -
dx
(A) 3x 2 + 2x + 15 (B) 3x 2 + 4x + 7 (C) x 3 + 2x 2 + 15 (D) x 3 + 4x + 7
2. Differentiation of 2x 2 + 3x w.r.t. x is :
(A) 4x + 3 (B) 4x (C) 3 (D) 4x + 1
3. Equation of straight line is 2x + 3y = 5. Slope of the straight line is :

(A) 3/2 (B) 2/3 (C) –2/3 (D) –3/2
dy
4. y = x 4 + 3x 2 + + 2. Find :
dx
dy
5. y = 4 + 5x + 7x 3. Find :
dx
6. Find slope of a straight line 2x – 5y + 7 = 0
2 1 1 dy
7. y= xx   3 . Find
x x dx
1 dy
8. y = x2 + 2 . Find
x dx
COMPREHENSION
1 2
If S = ut + at
2
Where ; S is displacement, u - initial velocity (constant) , v - final velocity , a - acceleration(constant)
& t - time taken then -
9. Differentiation of 'S' w.r.t. 't' will be -
at ut 2 at 3
(A) u + (B) u + at (C) u + 2at (D) +
2 2 6
10. Differentiation of above result w.r.t. 't' will be -

(A) a (B) u + a (C) u (D) none
DPPS FILE # 2

Comprehension Questions ('–1' negative marking) Q.9 to Q.10 (3 marks, 3 min.) [6, 6]
dy
1. If y = sin(x) + ln(x 2) + e2x then will be :
dx
2 2 2 2
(A) cos x + + e2x (B) cos x + + 2e2x (C) – cos x + 2 + e2x (D) – cos x – + 2e2x
x x x x2
dy
2. If y = ex . cot x then will be
dx
(A) excot x – cosec2x (B) ex cosec2x (C) ex[cot x – cosec 2x] (D) excot x
dy
3. If y = x nx then will be
dx
(A) nx + x (B) 1 + n x (C) nx (D) 1
nx dy
4. If y = then will be :
x dx
1  nx 1  nx 1  nx nx  1

(A) (B) 2 (C) 2 (D)
x x x x2
5. Differentiation of sin(x 2 + 3) w.r.t. x is -
(A) cos (x 2 + 3) (B) 2x cos(x 2 + 3) (C) (x 2 + 3) cos(x 2 + 3) (D) 2x cos(2x + 3)
dy
6. If y = x 2 sin x , then will be -
dx
(A) x 2 cos x + 2x sin x (B) 2x sin x (C) x 2 cos x (D) 2 x cos x
dy
7. If y = tan x . cos2x then will be -
dx
(A) 1 + 2sin2x (B) 1 – 2sin2x (C) 1 (D) 2 sin2x
2 4 dy
8. y = (2x +3 )4 – (7x –1)2 + 3 + 2 . Find
(3 x  1) ( 4x  3) dx
COMPREHENSION
If a function is written as :
y1 = sin(4x 2) & another function is y 2 = ln(x 3) then :
dy 1
9. , will be :
dx
(A) 8x cos (4x 2) (B) cos (4x 2) (C) – cos(4x 2) (D) –8x cos(4x 2)
dy 2
10. will be
dx
1 3 1 3
(A) 3 (B) (C)  3 (D)
x x x x2
DPPS FILE # 3

Multiple choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.8 (4 marks, 4 min.) [4, 4]
1. Double differentiation of displacement w.r.t. time is :

(A) acceleration (B) velocity (C) force (D) none
d2 y
2. If y = x 3 then is -
dx 2
(A) 6x 2 (B) 6x (C) 3x 2 (D) 3x
3. If Q = 4v 3 + 3v 2 , then the value of 'v' such that, there exist maxima of 'Q' -
1 1
(A) 0 (B)  (C) (D) none
2 2
dy
4. If y = 2 sin2  + tan  then will be -
d
(A) 4 sin  cos  + sec  tan  (B) 2 sin 2  + sec2 
(C) 4 sin  + sec2  (D) 2 cos2  + sec2 
3
5.  x dx is equal to :
x4 x4
(A) 3x 2 (B) C (C) (D) 4x 3
4 4
6.  2 sin( x)dx is equal to :

(A) –2cos x + C (B) 2 cosx + C (C) –2 cos x (D) 2 cosx
d2 y
7. If y = sinx, then will be :
dx 2
(A) cos x (B) sin x (C) – sin x (D) sin x + C
8. Which of the following has value zero ?

(A) Sin 0° (B) tan 0° (C) cos 0° (D) cot 0°
9. y = x(c – x) where c is a constant. Find maximum value of y.
10. If y = 4cos4x find  y dx
DPPS FILE # 4

Subjective Questions ('–1' negative marking) Q.5 to Q. 6 (4 marks, 5 min.) [8, 10]
1. Maximum value of f(x) = sin x + cos x is :
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C)

1 (D)
2 2
2. The displacement of a body at any time t after starting is given by s = 15t – 0.4t 2. The velocity of the
body will be 7 ms–1 after time :
(A) 20 s (B) 15 s (C) 10 s (D) 5 s
3. For the previous question, the acceleration of the particle at any time t is :
(A) –0.8 m/s2 (B) 0.8 m/s2 (C) –0.6 m/s2 (D) 0.5 m/s2
4. A particle is moving in a straight line. Its displacement at time t is given by s (in m) =  4t 2 + 2t, then
its velocity and acceleration at time t = 1

2 second are
(A)  2 m/s,  8 m/s2 (B) 2 m/s, 6 m/s2 (C)  2 m/s , 8 m/s2 (D) 2 m/s, 8 m/s2
5. A stone thrown upwards from ground level, has its equation of height h = 490 t - 4.9 t 2 where 'h' is in
metres and t is in seconds respectively. What is the maximum height reached by it ?
6. If  (x  1)dy
COMPREHENSION
If a man has a velocity varying with time given as v = 3t 2 , v is in m/s and t in sec then :
7. Find out the velocity of the man after 3 sec.

(A) 18 m/s (B) 9 m/s (C) 27 m/s (D) 36 m/s
8. Find out his displacement after 2 seconds of his start :

(A) 10 m (B) 6 m (C) 12 m (D) 8 m
9. Find out his acceleration after 3 seconds :

(A) 9 m/s2 (B) 18 m/s2 (C) 12 m/s2 (D) 6 m/s2
DPPS FILE # 5

dy
1. If y = 2x 3 + 3x 2 + 6x + 1 , then will be -
dx
(A) 6(x 2 + x + 1) (B) 6(x 2 + x + 2) (C) 6x 2 + 3x (D) (x 2 + 6x + 1)
2. If x = (6y + 4) (3y 2 + 4y + 3) then  x dy will be :
1 (3 y 2  4 y  3)2 (6y  4)
(A) 2 (B) + C (C) (3y2 + 4y + 3) (D)
3y  4 y  3 2 (3 y 2  4 y  3 )
x 1
3. If f(x) = , then the value of f(f(f(x))) is :
x –1
x 1 x 1
(A) (B) 1 (C) (D) x
x 1 x 1
 1/ 3 1 
4.  (x) – 1/ 3
(x)
 dx is equal to :

4 2/3 2 2/3 3 4/3 2 1/3 3 3

(A) x 4/3 – x 2/3 + c (B) x – x + c (C) x – x + c (D) (x)4/3 – (x)2/3 + c
3 3 4 3 4 2
5. Integrate the following :  (sin4t + 2t) dt

6. Integrate the following :  (2t – 4)–4 dt
dt
7. Integrate the following :  (6 t  1)
COMPREHENSION
If charge flown through a cross section of wire in one direction during 0 to t is given by q = 3 sin (3t) then

8. Find out the amount of charge flowing through the wire till t =   seconds.
6
(A) 3 coulombs (B) 6 coulombs (C) 1 coulomb (D) Zero coulomb

9. Find out the current flowing through the wire at t = second.
9
(A) 4.5 Amp (B) 4.5 3 Amp (C) 3 /2 Amp (D) 9 Amp.
 
10. Find out the area under i – t curve from t = to t = seconds :
9 6
2  3  2  3  2  3  2  3 
(A) 3  2  (B) 3  2  (C)  2  (D)  2 
       
DPPS FILE # 6

dy
1. If y = sin x , then is :
dx
1 cos x 1 1 cos x 1
(A)  (B)  tan x cos x (C) (D) cot x  cos x
4 x sin x 4 x 4 x sin x 4 x
2. A particle moves along a straight line such that its displacement at any time t is given by :
s = t 3 – 6t 2 + 3t + 4 metresThe velocity when the acceleration is zero is :
(A) 3 ms–1 (B) – 12 ms–1 (C) 42 ms–1 (D) – 9 ms–1
 
3. The area of region between y = sinx and x–axis in the interval 0,  will be :
 2
1
(A) 1 (B) 0 (C) 2 (D)
2
/2
2
4. The value of x dx will be :
 sin
0
 
(A) 1 (B) 0 (C) (D)
4 2
Evaluate : -
1
2
5.  (3 x
0
 4)dx
/2
6.  (sin x  cos x) dx
0
COMPREHENSION
If a = (3t 2 + 2t + 1)m/s2 is the expression according to which the acceleration of a particle varies moving
along a straight line . Then -
7. The expression for instantaneous velocity at any time 't' will be (if the particle was initially at rest) -
(A) t 3 + 2t + 1 (B) t 3 + t + 1 (C) t 3 + t 2 + t (D) t 3 + t 2 + t + C
8. The change in velocity after 3 seconds of its start is :
(A) 30 m/s (B) 39 m/s (C) 3 m/s (D) 20 m/s
9. Find displacement of the particle after 2 seconds of start -

(A) 26 m (B) 26/3 m (C) 30/7 m (D) 26/7 m
DPPS FILE # 7

 
1. If A is 2 î  9 ĵ  4 k̂ , then 4 A will be :
(A) 8 î  16 ĵ  36 k̂ (B) 8 î  36k̂  16 ĵ (C) 8 î  9 ĵ  16 k̂ (D) 8 î  36 ĵ  16 k̂

2. Which of the following vector is equal as that of
1m
(A) 1m (B) 2m (C) (D) 1m

1m
x
3. The point for the curve, y = xe ,
(A) x = - 1 is minima (B) x = 0 is minima (C) x = - 1 is maxima (D) x = 0 is maxima
4. The function x 5 - 5x 4 + 5x 3 - 10 has a maxima, when x =
(A) 3 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 0

5. The unit vector along A = 2 î  3 ĵ is :
2 î  3 ĵ 2 î  3 ĵ 2 î  3 ĵ
(A) 2 î  3 ĵ (B) (C) (D)
2 3 13
6. Which of the following represents a vector ?

(A) (B) (C) 
A (D) 
A (E) Â
7. The x-component of a certain vector in x-y-plane is 2 units and y-component is + 2 3 units. What is the
magnitude of the vector.
COMPREHENSION y

Position vector A is 2 î

Position vector B is 3 ĵ x
î, ĵ, k̂ are along the shown x,y and z axes : z

8. Geometrical representation of A is
(A)   (B) 2 units (C)  

 (D)
2 units 2 units 2 units

9. Geometrical representation of B is :
(A) (B) 3 units (C)  

 (D)
3 units 3 units 3 units

10.  4 A can be represented as
 
(A) 8 units (B) 8 units (C) A (D) A
DPPS FILE # 8

 
1. Given : A = 2 î  3 ĵ and B = 5 î  6 ĵ
 
The magnitude of ( A  B) is :
(A) 120 units (B) 130 units (C) 58 units (D) 65 units
2. Unit vector along 3 î  3 ĵ is
î  ĵ 3 î  3 ĵ î  ĵ
(A) (B) (C) î  ĵ (D)
2 2 3
3. For the figure shown.
           
(A) A  B  C (B) B  C  A (C) C  A  B (D) A  B  C  0
4. Parallelogram law of vectors is applicable to the addition of :

(A) Any two vectors (B) Two scalars
(C) A vector and a scalar (D) Two vectors representing same physical quantity.
 
    | A B|  
5. If A and B are two non–zero vectors such that | A  B | = and | A | = 2 | B | then the angle
2
 
between A and B is :
(A) 37º (B) 53º (C) cos–1(–3/4) (D) cos–1(–4/3)
 
6. Vectors A  î  ĵ  2k̂ and B  3 î  3 ĵ  6k̂ are :
(A) Parallel (B) Antiparallel (C) Perpendicular (D) at acute angle with each other

7. A particle is moving with speed 6 m/s along the direction of A = 2 î + 2 ĵ – k̂ , then its velocity is :
(A) (4 î + 2 ĵ – 4 k̂ ) units (B) (4 î + 4 ĵ – 2 k̂ ) units
(C) (4 î + 4 ĵ – 4 k̂ ) units (D) (2 î + 4 ĵ – 2 k̂ ) units

   
8. If P = î  ĵ – k̂ and Q = î – ĵ  k̂ , then unit vector along ( P – Q ) is :
1 1 2 ĵ – 2 k̂ ĵ – k̂ 2 ĵ – 2 k̂
(A) î – k̂ (B) (C) (D)
2 2 2 2 2 4
     
9. If a  b  a  b then angle between a and b may be
(A) 50° (B) 90° (C) 60° (D) 120°
10. Find the magnitude of the unknown forces X and Y if sum of all forces is zero.
DPPS FILE # 9
Topics : Rectilinear Motion, Vector, Mathematical Tools

1. A particle is moving in a straight line with initial velocity u and uniform acceleration f. If the sum of the
distances travelled in t th and (t + 1)th seconds is 100cm, then its velocity after t seconds, in cm/s, is
(A) 20 (B) 30 (C) 50 (D) 80
      
2. If A,B & A  B are three non–zero vector. Such that A  B is perpendicular to B then which of one is
correct :
B B
(A) A  B (B) A  (C) A > B (D) A >
2 2
3. A car covers a distance of 2 km in 2.5 minutes. If it covers half of the distance with speed 40 km/hr, the
rest distance it shall cover with a speed of:
(A) 56 km/hr (B) 60 km/hr (C) 48 km/hr (D) 50 km/hr
4. The displacement of a body is given by r = a 2  t 2 + t cos t 2, where t is the time and a is constant.
Its velocity is:
t t
(A) + cos t 2  t sin 2t (B) + cos t 2  2 t 2 sin t 2
a 2 t2 a 2 t 2
a
(C) 2 + 2 t cos t 2 sin t + sin t (D) a  t 2  t sin t 2
(a  t2 )
5. A body goes 30 km south and then 40 km east. What will be the displacement from initial point ?
(A) 50 km, 37º South of East (B) 30 km, 37º South of East
(C) 40 km, 53º South of East (D) 70 km, 53º South of East
6. The displacement of a body from a reference point is given by, x = 2 t  3, where ' x ' is in metres and
it is non negative number, t in seconds. This shows that the body :
(A) is at rest at t = 3/2 (B) is speeding up for t > 3/2
(C) is retarded for t < 3/2 (D) is in uniform motion
7. Pick the correct statements:

(A) Average speed of a particle in a given time interval is never less than the magnitude of the average
velocity.

d d 
(B) It is possible to have a situation in which  0 but  0.
dt dt
(C) The average velocity of a particle is zero in a time interval. It is possible that the instantaneous
velocity is never zero in the interval.
(D) The average velocity of a particle moving on a straight line is zero in a time interval. It is possible that
the instantaneous velocity is never zero in the interval. (Infinite acceleration are not allowed)
8. A body moves with uniformly accelerated motion and travels 200 cm in the first two seconds and 220
cm in the next four seconds. What will be the velocity at the end of 7 seconds from start?
DPPS FILE # 10
Topic : Rectilinear Motion

1. A ball is thrown vertically upwards from the ground. It crosses a point at the height of 25 m twice at an
interval of 4 secs. The ball was thrown with the velocity of
(A) 20 m/sec. (B) 25 m/sec.
(C) 30 m/sec. (D) 35 m/sec.
2. The distance travelled by a freely falling body is proportional to

(A) the mass of the body (B) the square of the acceleration due to gravity
(C) the square of the time of fall (D) the time of fall
3. The acceleration–time graph of a particle moving on a straight line is as shown in figure. The velocity of the
particle at time t = 0 is 2m/s. The velocity after 2 seconds will be
(A) 6 m/s (B) 4 m/s

(C) 2 m/s (D) 8 m/s
4. A parachutist drops freely from an aeroplane for 10 s before the parachute opens out. Then he descends with
a net retardation of 2.5 ms–2. If he bails out of the plane at a height of 2495 m and g = 10 ms–2, his velocity on
reaching the ground will be
(A) 2.5 ms–1 (B) 7.5 ms–1
–1
(C) 5 ms (D) 10 ms–1
5. The displacement of a body is given to be proportional to the cube of time elapsed. Acceleration of the body
is proportional to :
(A) t4 (B) t3
2
(C) t (D) t
6. A ball is thrown vertically up with a certain velocity. It attains a height of 40 m and comes back to the thrower.
Then the:(g = 10m/s2)
(A) total distance covered by it is 40 m (B) total displacement covered by it is 80 m
(C) total displacement is zero (D) the average velocity for round trip is zero
DPPS FILE # 11
COMPREHENSION
A particle moves along x-axis. It’s velocity is a function of time according to relation V = (3t2–18t + 24) m/s
assume at t = 0 particle is at origin.
7. Distance travelled by particle in 0 to 3 second time interval is :

(A) 18 m (B) 20 m (C) 22 m (D) 24 m
8. Time interval in which particle speed continuous decreases?

(A) 0 – 3 sec (B) 0 – 2 sec (C) 2–4 sec (D) 2–3 sec
9. Which of the following graph may be correct for the motion of particle
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
DPPS FILE # 12

1. A bird flies for 4 seconds with a velocity of |t – 2| m/sec. in a straight line, where t = time in seconds. It
covers a distance of
(A) 4 m (B) 6 m (C) 8m (D) none of these
2. The velocity - time graph of a particle is as shown in figure
(A) It moves with a constant acceleration throughout

(B) It moves with an acceleration of constant magnitude but changing direction at the end of every
two second
(C) The displacement of the particle is zero
(D) The velocity becomes zero at t = 4 second
3. The graph shown in the figure shows the velocity v versus time t of a body. Which of the graphs shown
in figure represents the corresponding acceleration versus time graphs?
(A) (B) (C) (D)

4. The position vector of a particle is given as r = (t 2 – 4t + 6) î + (t 2 ) ĵ . The time after which the velocity
vector and acceleration vector becomes perpendicular to each other is equal to
(A) 1sec (B) 2 sec (C) 1.5 sec (D) not possible
5. A car starts from rest and moves with constant acceleration. The ratio of the distance covered in the nth
second to distance covered in n seconds is :
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
(A) 2 – (B) 2 + (C) – 2 (D) + 2
n n n n n n n n
DPPS FILE # 13
6. An ant is at a corner of a cubical room of side ' a '. The ant can move with a constant speed u. The
minimum time taken to reach the farthest corner of the cube is:
(A)
3a
(B)
3a
(C)
5a
(D)
 2  1a
u u u u
7. A person starts from origin and for his linear motion velocity is given as shown in figure. Draw displacement
and acceleration graph with respect to time. Also find maximum displacement of the person.
8. Are the following velocity–time graph and speed–time graphs possible ?
(i) (ii) (iii)
DPPS FILE # 14

1. A lift starts from rest. Its acceleration is plotted against time in the following graph. When it comes to
rest its height above its starting point is:
(A) 20 m (B) 64 m (C) 32 m (D) 128 m
2. A particle moves through the origin of an xy-cordinate system at t = 0 with initial velocity u = 4i - 5 j m/s. The
particle moves in the xy plane with an acceleration a = 2i m/s2. Speed of the particle at t = 4 second is :
(A) 12 m/s (B) 8 2 m/s (C) 5 m/s (D) 13 m/s
3. The instantaneous velocity of a particle is equal to time derivative of its position vector and the
instantaneous acceleration is equal to time derivative of its velocity vector. Therefore:
(A) the instantaneous velocity depends on the instantaneous position vector
(B) instantaneous acceleration is independent of instantaneous position vector and
instantaneous velocity
(C) instantaneous acceleration is independent of instantaneous position vector but depends on the
instantaneous velocity
(D) instantaneous acceleration depends both on the instantaneous position v ector and the
instantaneous velocity.
4. The velocity of a car moving on a straight road increases linearly according to equation,
v = a + b x, where a & b are positive constants. The acceleration in the course of such motion: (x is the
displacement)
(A) increases (B) decreases (C) stay constant (D) becomes zero
5. A point moves in a straight line under the retardation a v 2 , where ‘a’ is a positive constant and v is
speed. If the initial velocity is u , the distance covered in ' t ' seconds is :
1 1
(A) a u t (B) ln (a u t) (C) ln (1 + a u t) (D) a ln (a u t)
a a
COMPREHENSION
The velocity 'v' of a particle moving along straight line is given in terms of time t as v = 3(t2 – t) where t is in
seconds and v is in m/s.
6. The distance travelled by particle from t = 0 to t = 2 seconds is :
(A) 2 m (B) 3 m (C) 4 m (D) 6 m
7. The displacement of particle from t = 0 to t = 2 seconds is

(A) 1 m (B) 2 m (C) 3 m (D) 4 m
8. The speed is minimum after t = 0 second at instant of time

(A) 0.5 sec (B) 1 sec. (C) 2 sec. (D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 15

Multiple choice objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.7 to Q9 (4 marks, 4 min.) [12, 12]

1. A particle of mass 2 kg moves in the xy plane under the action of a constant force F where

F  î  ĵ . Initially the velocity of the particle is 2 î . The velocity of the particle at time t is
1 1 1 1 1
(A) (t + 4) î – t ĵ (B) t ( î – ĵ ) (C) t ( î – ĵ ) (D) t î + (t + 4) ĵ
2 2 2 2 2
2. A point moves rectilinearly. Its position x at time t is given by , x 2 = t 2 + 1. Its acceleration at time t is:
1 1 1 t
(A) 3 (B)  (C)  (D) none of these
x x x2 x2
3. A man moves on his motorbike with speed 54 km/h and then takes a U turn (180°) and continues to move
with same speed. The time of U turn is 10 s. Find the magnitude of average acceleration during U turn .
(A) 0 (B) 3 ms–2 (C) 1.5 2 ms–2 (D) none of these
4. Distance between a frog and an insect on a horizontal plane is 10 m. Frog can jump with a maximum speed
of 10 m/s. g =10 m/s2. Minimum number of jumps required by the frog to catch the insect is :
(A) 5 (B) 10 (C) 100 (D) 50
5. A clock has a minute-hand 10 cm long. Find the average velocity between 6.00 AM to 6.30 AM for the tip of
minute-hand.
22 2 12 2
(A) cm min–1 (B) cm min–1 (C) cm min–1 (D) cm min–1
21 21 21 3
6. A stone is dropped from the top of a tower. When it has fallen by 5m from the top, another stone is dropped
from a point 25m below the top. If both stones reach the ground at the same moment, then height of the tower
from ground is : (take g = 10m/s2)
(A) 45 m (B) 50m (C) 60m (D) 65m
7. Angle made by vector 3 î  2 ĵ  2k̂ with –ve y-axis is :
 
1 2 

1 2   
1 2 

1 2 
(A) cos  3  (B) cos   3  (C)   cos  3  (D)   cos   3 
       
DPPS FILE # 16
8. A particle is dropped from a finite height H above the ground level under gravity. Due to air resistance
acceleration of particle become a = g – kv in the direction of velocity. Where k = positive constant & v = speed
of particle. Then which of the following graph(s) is/are possible (t0 = time when particle touches the ground):
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
9. A particle moves with an initial velocity v0 along straight line and retardation v, where v is its velocity
at any time t ( is a positive constant).
(A) the particle will cover a total distance of v0/
(B) the particle will continue to move for a very long time
(C) the particle will stop shortly
(D) the velocity of particle will become v0/2 after time 1/.
10. A particle moving along a straight line with a constant acceleration of – 4 m/s2 passes through a point A on
the line with a velocity of + 8 m/s at some moment. Find the distance travelled by the particle in 5 seconds
after that moment.
DPPS FILE # 17
Topic : Projectile Motion

1. A particle travels according to the equation x = at 3, y = bt 3. The equation of the trajectory is

ax 2 bx 2 bx bx 3
(A) y  (B) y  (C) y  (D) y 
b a a a
2. Speed at the maximum height of a projectile is half of its initial speed u. Its range on the horizontal
plane is:
2u 2 3 u2 u2 u2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3g 2g 3g 2g
3. A cricket ball is hit for a six leaving the bat at an angle of 45º to the horizontal with kinetic energy k. At
the top of trajectory the kinetic energy of the ball is :
k k
(A) zero (B) k (C) (D)
2 2
4. A particle is projected from a horizontal floor with speed 10 m/s at an angle 30º with the floor and striking the
floor after sometime. State which is correct.
(A) Velocity of particle will be perpendicular to initial direction two seconds after projection.
(B) Minimum speed of particle will be 5 m/sec.
(C) Displacement of particle after half second will be 35/4 m.
(D) Noneofthese
5. A body is projected with a speed u at an angle to the horizontal to have maximum range. At the highest
point the speed is :
u
(A) zero (B) u 2 (C) u (D)
2
6. Ratio of the ranges of the bullets fired from a gun (of constant muzzle speed) at angle , 2 & 4 is found in
the ratio x : 2 : 2, then the value of x will be (Assume same muzzle speed of bullets)
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) none of these
7. A particle is projected with a speed 10 2 m/s making an angle 45º with the horizontal. Neglect the
effect of air friction. Then after 1 second of projection. Take g=10 m/s2
(A) the height of the particle above the point of projection is 5 m.
(B) the height of the particle above the point of projection is 10 m.
(C) the horizontal distance of the particle from the point of projection is 5 m.
(D) the horizontal distance of the particle from the point of projection is 15 m.
 
8. A particle has initial velocity, v = 3 î  4 ĵ and a constant force F = 4î 3 ĵ acts on the particle. The path of the
particle is :
(A) straight line (B) parabolic (C) circular (D) elliptical
DPPS FILE # 18
Topics : Projectile Motion, Rectilinear Motion

1. For ground to ground projectile motion equation of path is y = 12 x – 3/4 x2. Given that g = 10 ms–2. What is
the range of the projectile?
(A) 36m (B) 30.6 m (C) 16 m (D) 12.4 m
2. The vertical height of the projectile at time t is given by y = 4t – t 2 and the horizontal distance covered
is given by x = 3t. What is the angle of projection with the horizontal?
(A) tan–1 3/5 (B) tan–1 4/5 (C) tan–1 4/3 (D) tan–1 3/4
3. A particle A is projected with speed VA from a point making an angle 60º with the horizontal. At the same instant,
second particle B (lie in the same horizontal plane) is thrown vertically upwards from a point directly below the
maximum height point of parabolic path of A , with velocity VB. If the two particles collide then the ratio of VA/VB
should be ;
(A) 1 (B) 2 / 3 (C) 3 /2 (D) 3
4. A car accelerates from rest at a constant rate  for some time after which it decelerates at a constant
rate  to come to rest. If total time taken by car is t, then maximum velocity V will be :
  2   2    
(A) V  t (B) V  t   (C) V  t   (D) V  t  
       
5. A lift is moving in upward direction with speed 20 m/s and having acceleration 5 m/s 2 in downward
direction. A bolt drops from the ceiling of lift at that moment. Just after the drop, the :
(A) velocity of bolt with respect to ground is zero
(B) velocity of bolt with respect to ground is 20 m/s in upward direction
(C) acceleration of bolt with respect to ground is 5 m/s2
(D) none of these
6. A balloon is moving with constant upward acceleration of 1 m/s2. A stone is thrown from the balloon downwards
with speed 10 m/s with respect to the balloon. At the time of projection balloon is at height 120 m from the
ground and is moving with speed 20 m/s upward. The time required to fall on the ground by the stone after the
projection will be-
(A) 4 sec. (B) 5 sec.

(C) 6 sec. (D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 19
7. A particle is projected under gravity at an angle of projection 45° with horizontal. Its horizontal range is 36 m.
Find maximum Height attained by particle.
8. A bullet is fired with speed 50 m/s at 45° angle with horizontal. Find the height of the bullet when its direction
of motion makes angle 30° with the horizontal.
9. In the column-, the path of a projectile (initial velocity 10 m/s and angle of projection with horizontal 60° in all
cases) is shown in different cases. Rangle 'R' is to be matched in each case from column-. Take g = 10 m/
s2. Arrow on the trajectory indicates the direction of motion of projectile.
Column-I Column-II
15 3
(A) (p) R = m
2
40
(B) (q) R = m
3
(C) (r) R = 5 3 m
20
(D) (s) R = m
3
DPPS FILE # 20
Topics : Projectile Motion, Rectilinear Motion, Mathematical Tools

1. A stone projected at angle ‘’ with horizontal from the roof of a tall building falls on the ground after three
second. Two second after the projection it was again at the level of projection. Then the height of the building
is -
(A) 5 m (B) 25 m (C) 20 m (D) 15 m
2. The maximum height attained by a projectile thrown over a horizontal ground is increased by 5%, keeping
the angle of projection constant. What is the percentage increase in the horizontal range?
(A) 20% (B) 15% (C) 10% (D) 5%
3. A stone is projected from point A with speed u making an angle 60° with horizontal as shown. The fixed
inclined surface makes an angle 30° with horizontal. The stone lands at B after time t. Then the
distance AB is equal to .
ut 3ut
(A) (B) (C) 3ut (D) 2 ut
3 2
4. The velocity of a particle moving on the x-axis is given by v = x2 + x (for x > 0) where v is in m/s and x is in
m. Find its acceleration in m/s2 when passing through the point x = 2m
(A) 0 (B) 5 (C) 11 (D) 30
5. A particle is moving in a circle of radius r with constant speed v as shown in the figure. The magnitude
of change in velocity in moving from P to Q is :
(A) 2 v cos 40º (B) 2 v sin 20º

(C) 2 v cos 20º (D) none of these
DPPS FILE # 21
6. Initially car A is 10.5 m ahead of car B. Both start moving at time t = 0 in the same direction along a straight
line. The velocity time graph of two cars is shown in figure. The time when the car B will catch the car A, will
be
(A) t = 21 sec (B) t = 2 5 sec

(C) 20 sec. (D) None of these
7. Two particles, one with constant velocity 50m/s and the other start from rest with uniform
acceleration 10m/s 2, start moving simultaneously from the same position in the same direction.
They will be at a distance of 125m from each other after
(A) 5 sec. (B) 5(1 +  2) sec.
(C) 10sec. (D) 10( 2 + 1)sec.
COMPREHENSION
A bus is moving rightward with a velocity of 15 m/sec and on the bus a monkey is running oppositely
with a velocity of 5 m/sec (with respect to the bus). Nearby a helicopter is rising vertically up with a
velocity of 10 m/sec.
10m/s
5m/s
15m/s
8. Find out the direction of the helicopter as seen by the monkey.
9. Find out the direction of the bus as seen by the helicopter's pilot.
DPPS FILE # 22
Topics : Relative Motion, Rectilinear Motion, Projectile Motion

1. Person A observes B moving in east direction with speed 10 m/s, B observes C moving in south direction with
speed 20 m/s, C observes D moving in west direction with speed 30 m/s & D observes a tree moving with
speed 40 m/s in north direction. Then the actual direction of motion of person ‘A’ (with respect to ground) will
be -
(A) north - west (B) north - east (C) south - east (D) none of these
2. A boat has a velocity 4 m/s towards east with respect to river and river is flowing towards north with velocity 2 m/
s. Wind is blowing towards north with velocity 6 m/s. The direction of the flag blown over by the wind hoisted on
the boat is:
1
(A) north-west (B) south-east (C) tan1 with east (D) north
2
3. For a particle undergoing rectilinear motion with uniform acceleration, the magnitude of displacement is one
third the distance covered in some time interval. The magnitude of final velocity is less than magnitude of
initial velocity for this time interval. Then the ratio of initial speed to the final speed for this time interval is :
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 3
4. A man is sitting inside a moving train and observes the stationary objects outside of the train. Then choose
the single correct choice from the following statements -
(A) all stationary objects outside the train will move with same velocity in opposite direction of the train with
respect to the man.
(B) stationary objects near the train will move with greater velocity & object far from train will move with lesser
velocity with respect to the man.
(C) large objects like moon or mountains will move with same velocity as that of the train.
(D) all of these.

5. A particle is projected in such a way that it follows a curved path with constant acceleration a . For finite
interval of motion. Which of the following option(s) may be correct :
  
u = initial velocity a = acceleration of particle v = velocity at t > 0
      
(A) | a  u | 0 (B) | a  v | 0 (C) | u  v | 0 (D) u.v  0
6. A particle is projected vertically upwards in vacuum with a speed u.

(A) When it rises to half its maximum height, its speed becomes u/2.
(B) When it rises to half its maximum height, its speed becomes u / 2 .
(C) The time taken to rise to half its maximum height is half the time taken to reach its maximum
height.
(D) The time taken to rise to three-fourth of its maximum height is half the time taken to reach its maximum
height.
DPPS FILE # 23
7. When two bodies move uniformly towards each other, the distance between them diminishes by 16 m
in every 10 s. If bodies move with velocities of the same magnitude (as before )and in the same
direction then distance between them will decrease 3 m every 5 s. Calculate the velocity of each body.
8. Two particles A and B moving in x-y plane are at origin at t = 0 sec. The initial velocity vectors of A and
  
B are u A = 8 î m/s and uB = 8 ĵ m/s. The acceleration of A and B are constant and are a A = –2 î m/s2

and a B = – 2 ĵ m/s2. Column  gives certain statements regarding particle A and B. Column  gives
corresponding results. Match the statements in column  with corresponding results in Column .
Column I Column II
(A) The time (in seconds) at which velocity (p) 16 2

of A relative to B is zero
(B) The distance (in metres) between A and B (q) 8 2

when their relative velocity is zero.
(C) The time (in seconds) after t = 0 sec, (r) 8

at which A and B are at same position
(D) The magnitude of relative velocity of A and B (s) 4
DPPS FILE # 24
Topics : Rectilinear Motion, Projectile Motion

1. For a given acceleration - time graph , there exist _______ velocity - time graph.
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) many
2. For which of the following graphs the average velocity of a particle moving along a straight line for time interval
(0, t) must be negative -
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3. Variation of displacement x of a particle moving on a straight line

with time t is shown in following figure. The figure indicates :
(A) the particle starts with a certain speed but the motion is retarded
(B) the velocity of particle is constant throughout motion
(C) the acceleration of the particle is constant throughout motion
(D) the particle starts with certain speed and moves with increasing speed .
4. A particle is projected at angle 60º with speed 10 3 m/s from the

point ' A ' as shown in the figure. At the same time the wedge is made to
move with speed 10 3 m/s towards right. Then the time after which
particle will strike with
wedge is (g = 10 m/sec 2) :
4
(A) 2 sec (B) 2 3 sec (C) sec (D) none of these
3
5. Two cars A and B are racing along straight line. Car A is leading, such that their relative velocity is directly
proportional to the distance between the two cars. When the lead of car A is 1 = 10 m, its running 10 m/s
faster than car B. Determine the time car A will take to increase its lead to 2 = 20 m from car B.
COMPREHENSION
A particle which is initially at rest at the origin, is subjected to an acceleration with x- and y-components
as shown. After time t = 5 , the particle has no acceleration.
6. What is the magnitude of velocity of the particle at t = 2 seconds ?

(A) 10 5 m/s (B) 5 10 m/s (C) 5 5 m/s (D) None of these
7. What is the magnitude of average velocity of the particle between t = 0 and t = 4 seconds?
5 5
(A) 13 m/s (B) 17 m/s (C) 30 m/s (D) None of these
2 2
8. When is the particle at its farthest distance from the y-axis?
DPPS FILE # 25
Topics : Rectilinear Motion, Relative Motion, Newton’s Law of Motion

1. Mark the correct statement(s).

(A) if speed of a body is varying, its velocity must be varying and it must have zero acceleration
(B) if velocity of a body is varying, its speed must be varying
(C) a body moving with varying velocity may have constant speed
(D) a body moving with varying speed may have constant velocity if its direction of motion remains constant.
2. At a harbour, a boat is standing and wind is blowing at a speed of 2 m/sec. due to which, the flag on the
boat flutters along north–east. Now the boat enters in to river, which is flowing with a velocity of 2 m/sec. due
north. The boat starts with zero velocity relative to the river and its constant acceleration relative to the river
is 0.2 m/sec2 due east. In which direction will the flag flutter at 10 seconds ?
(A) south-east (B) south–west (C) 30º south of west (D) west
3. A point moves in a straight line under the retardation a v 2 , where ‘a’ is a positive constant and v is
speed. If the initial speed is u , the distance covered in ' t ' seconds is :
1 1
(A) a u t (B) ln(a u t) (C) ln (1 + a u t) (D) a ln (a u t)
a a
4. The velocity of a car moving on a straight road increases linearly according to equation, v = a + b x,
where a & b are positive constants. The acceleration in the course of such motion: (x is the distance
travelled)
(A) increases (B) decreases (C) stay constant (D) becomes zero
5. Which one of the following cannot be explained on the basis of Newton's third law of motion?
(A) rowing of boat in a pond (B) motion of jet in the sky
(C) rebounding of a ball from a wall (D) returning back of body thrown above
6. At a particular instant velocity and acceleration of a particle are (  î  ĵ  2k̂ )m/s and ( 3 î  ĵ  k̂ )m/s2
respectively at the given instant particle's speed is :
(A) increasing (B) decreasing (C) constant (D) can't be say
7. In the figure the top view of a compartment of a train is shown. A man is sitting at a corner ‘B’ of the
compartment. The man throws a ball (with respect to himself) along the surface of the floor towards the
corner ‘D’ of the compartment of the train. The ball hits the corner ‘A’ of the compartment, then find the time
at which it hits A after the ball is thrown. Assume no other collision during motion and floor is smooth. The
length of the compartment is given as ‘’ and the train is moving with constant acceleration ‘a’ in the direction
shown in the figure.
8. A balloon is ascending vertically with an acceleration of 0.4 m/s 2. Two stones are dropped from it at an
interval of 2 sec. Find the distance between them 1.5 sec. after the second stone is released.
(g = 10 m/sec2)
DPPS FILE # 26
Topics : Relative Motion, Projectile Motion, Newton’s Law of Motion

1. Two points P and Q move in same plane such that the relative acceleration of P with respect to Q is zero.
They are moving such that the distance between them is decreasing. Pick the correct statement for P and Q
to collide
(A) The line joining P and Q should not rotate.
(B) The line joining P and Q should rotate with constant angular speed
(C) The line joining P and Q should rotate with variable angular speed
(D) All the above statement are correct
2. A stone projected at an angle of 60º from the ground level strikes at an angle of 30º on the roof of a building
of height ‘h’. Then the speed of projection of the stone is :
(A) 2gh (B) 6gh (C) 3gh (D) gh
3. A man is on ship which is moving in east direction with speed 60 km/hr. Waves of ocean is taking ship
towards west with speed 20 km/hr. Man start running on ship with flag in his hand in north direction with
speed 30 km/hr and wind is blowing with 50 km/hr, 37º towards south of west then find the direction of flutter
the flag as seen by man on ground.
(A) 37º south of west (B) 53º south of west
(C) 37º west of north (D) flag will not flutter
4. (i) (ii)
(iii) (iv)
(v)
In all the given cases blocks are in contact and the forces are applied as shown. All the surfaces are smooth.
Then in which of the following cases, normal reaction between the two blocks is zero :
(A) (i) , (iv) (B) (ii) , (iii) (C) (iii) (D) (v)
DPPS FILE # 27
5. A body of mass 1 kg lies on smooth inclined plane. A force F = 10N is applied horizontally on the block
as shown. The magnitude of normal reaction by inclined plane on the block is:
10
(A) 10 2 N (B) N (C) 10 N (D) none of these
2
6. A frictionless wire is fixed between A and B inside of a hollow sphere of radius R as shown. A bead slips along
the wire starting from the rest at point A. The time taken by the bead to slip from A to B will be
2 gR 2 gR cos 
(A) 2 R / g (B) gR / g cos  (C) (D)
g cos  g
7. At t = 0, a particle at (1,0,0) moves towards point (4,4,12) with a constant velocity of magnitude 65 m/s. The
position of the particle is measured in metres and time in sec. Assuming constant velocity, the position of the
particle at t = 2 sec is :
(A) (13 î  120 ĵ  40 k̂ ) m (B) (40 î  31 ĵ  120 k̂ ) m
(C) (13 î  40 ĵ  12 k̂ ) m (D) (31 î  40 ĵ  120 k̂ ) m
8. A constant force acts on a mass m at rest. Velocity acquired in travelling a fixed distance is directly
proportional to :
1
(A) m (B) m (C) (D) none
m
DPPS FILE # 28
Topics : Newton’s Law of Motion, Rectilinear Motion,Projectile Motion

1. A uniform sphere of weight w and radius 3 m is being held by a string of length 2 m. attached to a
frictionless wall as shown in the figure. The tension in the string will be:
(A) 5 w/4 (B) 15 w/4 (C) 15 w/16 (D) none of these
2. Two weights W 1 and W 2 in equillibrium and at rest, are suspended as shown in figure. Then the ratio
W1
W2
is:
(A) 5/4 (B) 4/5 (C) 8/5 (D) none of these
3. If v = x 2  5 x + 4, find the acceleration of the particle when velocity of the particle is zero.
4. Three weights are hanging over a smooth fixed pulley as shown in the figure. What is the tension in the
string connecting weights B and C?
(A) g (B) g/9 (C) 8g/9 (D) 10g/9
DPPS FILE # 29
5. A ball is shot in a long hall having a roof at a height of 10 m with 25 m/s at an angle of 37° with the floor. The
ball lands on the floor at a distance of .............. from the point of projection. (Assume elastic collisions if
any)
10m
37°
(A) 40 m (B) 60 m (C) 45/4 m (D) 20 m
6. Two smooth spheres each of radius 5 cm and weight W is in equilibrium inside a fixed smooth cylinder
of radius 8 cm as shown in the figure. The reactions between the spheres and the vertical side of the
cylinder are:
(A) W/4 & 3W/4 (B) W/4 & W/4

(C) 3W/4 & 3W/4 (D) W & W
7. A cart of mass 0.5 kg is placed on a smooth surface and is connected by a string to a block of mass 0.2 kg.
At the initial moment the cart moves to the left along a horizontal plane at a speed of 7 m/s. (Use g = 9.8 m/
s2)
0.5 kg
0.2 kg
2g
(A) The acceleration of the cart is towards right.
7
(B) The cart comes to momentary rest after 2.5 s.
(C) The distance travelled by the cart in the first 5s is 17.5 m.
(D) The velocity of the cart after 5s will be same as initial velocity.
8. Three blocks are connected by light strings as shown in figure and pulled by a force F = 60 N.
If m A = 10 kg, m B = 20 kg and m C = 30 kg, then :
(A) acceleration of the system is 2 m/s2 (B) T 1 = 10 N

(C) T 2 = 30 N (D) T 1 = 20 N & T 2 = 40 N
DPPS FILE # 30
Topics : Newton’s Law of Motion, Relative Motion

1. A man of mass m stands on a platform of equal mass m and pulls himself by two ropes passing over
pulleys as shown. If he pulls each rope with a force equal to half his weight, his upward acceleration
would be :
(A) g/2 (B) g/4

(C) g (D) zero
2. Two blocks of masses m 1 and m 2 are connected as shown in the figure. The acceleration of the block
m 2 is (pullyes and strings are ideal) :
m2 g m1g
(A) (B)
m1 m 2 m1 m 2
4m 2 gm1 g m2 g
(C) m1 m 2
(D)
m1 4m 2
3. In the system shown in figure assume that cylinder remains in contact with the two wedges. The
velocity of cylinder is -
u 13 u
(A) 19  4 3 m/s (B) m/s
2 2
(C) 3 u m/s (D) 7 u m/s
DPPS FILE # 31
4. A system is as shown in the figure. All speeds shown are with respect to ground. Then the speed of
Block B with respect to ground is :
(A) 5 m/s (B) 10 m/s (C) 15 m/s (D) 7.5 m/s
5. A wedge of height 'h' is released from rest with a light particle P placed
on it as shown. The wedge slides down an incline which makes an
angle  with the horizontal. All the surfaces are smooth, P will reach
the surface of the incline in time:
2h 2h 2h 2h
(A) (B) (C) (D)
gsin 2  g sin  cos g tan g cos 2 
6. A block of weight 9.8N is placed on a table. The table surface exerts an upward force of 10 N on the
block. Assume g = 9.8 m/s2.
(A) The block exerts a force of 10N on the table

(B) The block exerts a force of 19.8N on the table
(C) The block exerts a force of 9.8N on the table
(D) The block has an upward acceleration.
7. A block of mass M1 = 3 kg on a smooth fixed inclined plane of angle 300 is connected by a cord over a
small frictionless pulley to a second block of mass 2 kg hanging vertically. The tension in the cord and
the acceleration of each block are _______ and _______ respectively.
8. In which of the following cases the magnitude of acceleration of the block A will be maximum (Neglect
friction, mass of pulley and string)
(i) (ii)
m A 2m m A 2mg
m
smooth A m A
(iii) (iv)
2mg B 2m
DPPS FILE # 32
Topics : Relative Motion, Newtons’s Law of Motion, Projectile Motion

True or False (no negative marking) Q.7 (2 marks, 2 min.) [2, 2]
1. System is shown in the figure. Velocity of sphere A is 9 m/s. Then speed of sphere B will be:
5
(A) 9 m/s (B) 12 m/s (C) 9  m/s (D) none of these
4
2. A boy and a block, both of same mass, are suspended at the same horizontal level, from each end of a light
string that moves over a frictionless pulley as shown. The boy starts moving upwards with an acceleration
2.5 m/s2 relative to the rope. If the block is to travel a total distance 10 m before reaching at the pulley, the
time taken by the block in doing so is equal to :
10
(A) 8 s (B) 4s (C) s (D) 8s
2
3. In the figure shown neglecting friction and mass of pulleys, what is the acceleration of mass B ?
g 5g
(A) (B)
3 2
2g
(C) g (D)
5
DPPS FILE # 33
4. A wire is bent in a parabolic shape followed by equation x = 4y2. Consider origin as vertex of parabola. A wire
parallel to y axis moves with constant speed 4 m/s along x-axis in the plane of bent wire. Then the acceleration
of touching point of straight wire and parabolic wire is (when straight wire has x coordinate = 4 m) :
1 1
(A) (B) – ĵ (C) 2 ĵ (D) 4 î
2 î 4
5. Blocks of mass M1 and M2 are connected by a cord which passes over the pulleys P1 and P2 as shown
in the figure. If there is no friction, the acceleration of the block of mass M 2 will be:
M2 g 2M2 g 2M1g 2M1g

(A) (B) (C) (M  4M ) (D)
(4M1M2 ) (4M1M2 ) 1 2 (M1M2 )
6. In the figure, at the free end of the light string, a force F is applied to keep
the suspended mass of 18 kg at rest. Then the force exerted by the ceiling
on the system (assume that the string segments are vertical and the pulleys
are light and smooth) is: (g= 10m/s2)
(A) 60 N (B) 120 N

(C) 180 N (D) 240 N
(E) 200 N
7. True/False
(i) Two particles are in projectile motion. The path of one particle as seen by another particle will be a
straight line.
(ii) In order to cross a river of uniform width (flow is also uniform) in shortest time, swimmer must swim
in perpendicular direction of river flow.
8. A lift is moving upwards with an acceleration of 2 m/sec2. Inside the lift a 4 kg block is kept on the floor.
On the top of it, 3 kg block is placed and again a 2 kg block is kept on the 3 kg block. Calculate:
(i) contact force between 2 kg block and the 3 kg block.

(ii) contact force between 4 kg block and floor of the lift.
Draw the free body diagrams properly & take g = 10 m/sec 2.
DPPS FILE # 34
Topic : Newtons’s Law of Motion

1. Two blocks ‘A’ and ‘B’ e!ach of mass ‘m’ are placed on a smooth horizontal surface. Two horizontal
force F and 2F are applied on the two blocks ‘A’ and ‘B’ respectively as shown in figure. The block A
does not slide on block B. Then the normal reaction acting between the two blocks is : (A and B are
smooth)
(A) F (B) F/2

F
(C) (D) 3F
3
2. In the figure shown, a person wants to raise a block lying on the ground to a height h. In both the cases
if time required is same then in which case he has to exert more force. Assume pulleys and strings
light.
(A) (i) (B) (ii)

(C) same in both (D) Cannot be determined
3. In the pulley system shown in figure, block C is going up at 2 m/s and block B is going up at 4 m/s,
then the velocity of block A on the string shown in figure, is equal to :
(A) 2 m/s  (B) 4 m/s 

(C) 6 m/s  (D) 8 m/s 
DPPS FILE # 35
4. Two blocks A and B of masses m & 2m respectively are held at rest such that the spring is in natural length.
Find out the accelerations of blocks A and B respectively just after release (pulley, string and spring are
massless).
g g
(A) g , g  (B)  
3 3
(C) 0, 0 (D) g  0
5. Two cubes of masses m1 and m2 lie on two frictionless slopes of block A which rests on two frictionless
slopes of block A which rests on a horizontal table. The cubes are connected by a string which passes over
a pulley as shown in figure. To what horizontal acceleration f the whole system, (i.e. block and cubes) be
subjected, so that the cubes do not slide down the planes ? What is the tension in the string in this situation ?
R2
m2
f
T

T
A m2g R1
f f m1

m1g
COMPREHENSION
For the following system shown assume that pulley is frictionless, string is massless (m remains on M) :
6. The acceleration of the block A is :

mg 2mg mg Mg
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2M  m 2M  m M  2m M  2m
7. Normal reaction on m is (force on C due to B).

M mg 2Mmg M mg 2M mg
(A) 2M  m (B) 2M  m (C) (D)
M  2m M m
8. The force on the ceiling is

(M  m) mg (6M  5m) mg (M  m) mg (6M  5m) Mg
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2M  m Mm Mm 2M  m
DPPS FILE # 36
Topics : Newtons’s Law of Motion, Relative Motion, Projectile Motion, Rectilinear Motion

1. Two men of masses m and m/2 starts climbing up on two massless strings fixed at the ceiling with
acceleration g and g/2 respectively. The ratio of tensions in the two strings will be :
(A) 2 : 1 (B) 4 : 1
(C) 4 : 3 (D) 8 : 3
2. Two particles at a distance 5m apart, are thrown towards each other on an inclined smooth plane with
equal speeds ‘v’ . It is known that both particle move along the same straight line. Find the value of v if
they collide at the point from where the lower particle is thrown. Inclined plane is inclined at an angle of
300 with the horizontal. [take g = 10m/s2 ]
(A) 2.5 m/sec (B) 5 m/sec
(C) 7.5 m/sec (D) 10 m/sec
3. A particle is projected from a point (0, 1) on Y-axis (assume + Y direction vertically upwards) aiming towards
a point (4, 9). It fell on ground along x axis in 1 sec. Taking g = 10 m/s2 and all coordinate in metres. Find the
X-coordinate where it fell.
(A) (3, 0) (B) (4, 0) (C) (2, 0) (D) ( 2 5 , 0)
4. System shown in figure is in equilibrium. The magnitude of change in tension in the string just before
and just after, when one of the spring is cut. Mass of both the blocks is same and equal to m and spring
constant of both springs is k. (Neglect any effect of rotation)
mg mg
(A) (B)
2 4
3m g 3m g
(C) (D)
4 2
DPPS FILE # 37
5. A cylinder rests in a supporting carriage as shown. The side AB of carriage makes an angle 30o with the
horizontal and side BC is vertical. The carriage lies on a fixed horizontal surface and is being pulled towards
left with an horizontal acceleration 'a'. The magnitude of normal reactions exerted by sides AB and BC of
carriage on the cylinder be NAB and NBC respectively. Neglect friction everywhere. Then as the magnitude of
acceleration 'a ' of the carriage is increased, pick up the correct statement:
(A) NAB increases and NBC decreases. (B) Both NAB and NBC increase.
(C) NAB remains constant and NBC increases. (D) NAB increases and NBC remains constant.
6. A particle is moving in a straight line as :

a = 1 m/s2 0 < t < 10
a = 2t t > 10
where t is the time and a is the acceleration. If initial velocity of the particle is zero then :
(A) velocity of the particle at t = 20 sec is 310 m/s
(B) displacement of the particle in t = 20 s is 1483.33 m.
(C) acceleration the particle at t = 15 s is 32 m/s2.
(D) v-t graph is
v
(m/s)
10m/s
t (s)
t=10
7. A force F is applied on block A of mass M so that the tension in light string also becomes F when block B of
mass m acquires an equilibrium state with respect to block A. Find the force F. Give your answer in terms of
m, M and g.
8. During a rainy day, rain is falling vertically with a velocity 2m/s. A boy at rest starts his motion with a constant
acceleration of 2m/s2 along a straight road. Find the rate at which the angle of the axis of umbrella with
vertical should be changed so that the rain always falls parallel to the axis of the umbrella.
DPPS FILE # 38
Topics : Relative Motion, Newtons’s Law of Motion

1. A stone is projected horizontally with speed v from a height h above ground. A horizontal wind is
blowing in direction opposite to velocity of projection and gives the stone a constant horizontal
acceleration f (in direction opposite to initial velocity). As a result the stone falls on ground at a point
vertically below the point of projection. Then the value of height h in terms of f, g, v is (g is acceleration
due to gravity)
gv 2 gv 2 2gv 2 2 gv 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2f 2 f2 f2 f2
2. Two blocks of masses m1 = 2kg and m 2 = 5kg hang over a massless
pulley as shown in the figure. A force F 0 = 100 N acting at the axis of the
pulley accelerates the system upwards. Then : (Take g = 9.8 m/s2)
(A) Acceleration of 2 kg mass is 15.2 m/sec 2
(B) Acceleration of 5kg mass is 0.2 m/sec 2
(C) Acceleration of both the masses is same
(D) Acceleration of both the masses is upward
3. A 1 kg block ‘B’ rests as shown on a bracket ‘A’ of same mass. Constant

forces F 1 = 20 N and F 2 = 8 N start to act at time t = 0 when the
distance of block B from pulley is 50 cm.Time when block B reaches
the pulley is _______. (Assume that friction is absent every where.
Pulley and string are light.
COMPREHENSION
Two smooth blocks are placed at a smooth corner as shown. Both the blocks
are having mass m. We apply a force F on the small block m. Block A
presses the block B in the normal direction, due to which pressing force on
vertical wall will increase, and pressing force on the horizontal wall decrease,
as we increase F. ( = 37° with horizontal). As soon as the pressing force on
the horizontal wall by block B becomes zero, it will loose the contact with
the ground. If the value of F is further increased, the block B will accelerate
in upward direction and simultaneously the block A will move toward right.
4. What is minimum value of F, to lift block B from ground :

25 5 3 4
(A) mg (B) mg (C) mg (D) mg
12 4 4 3
5. If both the blocks are stationary, the force exerted by ground on block A is :
3F 3F 4F 4F
(A) mg + (B) mg – (C) mg + (D) mg –
4 4 3 3
6. If acceleration of block A is a rightward, then acceleration of block B will be :

3a 4a 3a 4a
(A) upwards (B) upwards (C) upwards (D) upwards
4 3 5 5
DPPS FILE # 39
Topics : Relative Motion, Newtons’s Law of Motion

1. Two stones A and B are projected from an inclined plane such that A has range up the incline and B
has range down the incline. For range of both stones on the incline to be equal in magnitude, pick up
the correct condition. (Neglect air friction)
(A) Component of initial velocity of both stones along the incline should be equal and also component
of initial velocity of both stones perpendicular to the incline should be equal.
(B) Horizontal component of initial velocity of both stones should be equal and also vertical component
of initial velocity of both stones should be equal.
(C) Component of initial velocity of both stones perpendicular to the incline should be equal and also
horizontal component of initial velocity of both stones should be equal in magnitude.
(D) None of these.
2. A man is moving downward on an inclined plane ( = 37º) with velocity v 0 and rain drops appear to him
moving in horizontal direction with velocity 2v 0 towards him. If man increases his velocity to 2v 0 him
velocity of rain drops as observed by man is :
41
(A) v0 (B) 39 v 0
5
(C) 7 v 0 (D) 6 v 0
3. System is shown in the figure. Velocity of sphere A is 9 m/s. Then speed of sphere B will be:
(A) 9 m/s (B) 12 m/s

5
(C) 9  m/s (D) none of these
4
DPPS FILE # 40
4. Objects A and B each of mass m are connected by light inextensible cord. They are constrained to
move on a frictionless ring in a vertical plane as shown in figure. The objects are released from rest at
the positions shown. The tension in the cord just after release will be
mg mg mg
(A) mg 2 (B) (C) (D)
2 2 4
5. In the figure shown all the surface are smooth. All the blocks A, B and C are movable X-axis is horizontal and
y-axis vertical as shown. Just after the system is relased from the position as shown.
y
A

B x
C

Horizontal Surface
(A) Acceleration of 'A' relative to ground is in negative y-direction

(B) Acceleration of 'A' relative to B is in positive x-direction
(C) The horizontal acceleration of 'B' relative to ground is in negative x-direction.
(D) The acceleration of 'B' relative to ground directed along the inclined surface of 'C' is greater than g sin .
6. A block B of mass 0.6 kg slides down the smooth face PR of a wedge

A of mass 1.7 kg which can move freely on a smooth horizontal surface.
The inclination of the face PR to the horizontal is 45º. Then :
(A) the acceleration of A is 3 g/20
(B) the vertical component of the acceleration of B is 23 g/40
(C) the horizontal component of the acceleration of B is 17 g/40
(D) none of these
7. Find the tension in the string and the extension in the spring at equilibrium. Where pulley, strings and springs
are ideal.
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(e)
DPPS FILE # 41
Topics : Friction, Newtons’s Law of Motion

1. A particle of mass 5 kg is moving on rough fixed inclined plane with constant velocity of 5 m/s as shown
in the figure. Find the friction force acting on a body by plane.
(A) 25 N (B) 20 N
(C) 30 N (D) none of these
2. A block of mass 4 kg is kept on ground. The co-efficient of friction between the block and the ground is
0.80. An external force of magnitude 30 N is applied parallel to the ground. The resultant force exerted
by the ground on the block is:
(A) 40 N (B) 30 N (C) 0 N (D) 50 N
3. If the coefficient of friction between A and B is , the maximum horizontal acceleration of the wedge A
for which B will remain at rest w.r.t the wedge is :
 1  
(A) g (B) g  
 1  
g  1  
(C) (D) g  
  1  
4. In the figure shown, a person pulls a light string with a constant speed u = 10 m/s. The other end of the
string is tied to a very small block which moves on a smooth horizontal surface. Find the angle ‘’
when the block 3leaves the surface. Take g = 10 m/s2.
DPPS FILE # 42
5. Answer the following briefly. (Answer should not be of more than one or two line)
(i) Can friction coefficient be greater than unity?
(ii) Why is friction force Nonconservative force?
(iii) Can friction do positive work?
(iv) Is earth an inertial frame?
(v) Greater force is required to make the body move than to keep it moving, hence we
can say that static friction is always greater than kinetic friction. Comment on it.
(vi) Lesser force is required to pull a lawn mower than to push it. Why?
COMPREHENSION
A meter stick AB of length 1 meter rests on a frictionless floor in horizontal position with end A attached to the
string as shown. Assume that string connecting meter stick with pulley always remains vertical.
6. If blocks 1 and 2 are given constant speeds as shown then the distance moved by end B over the floor in the
period for which speed of B is less than A.
 2  1  2  1 1 1
   
(A)   m (B)   m (C) m (D) m
 2   2  2 2
7. Time taken to cover the distance in above part is :
 2  1  2  1 1 1
   
(A)   sec (B)   sec (C) sec (D) sec
 4 2   4 2  4 2 8
8. Minimum magnitude of relative velocity of A with respect to B during the motion specified in question 5 is :
(A) 2 m/s (B) 4 m/s (C) 6 m/s (D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 43
Topic : Friction

1. A force F = 2t (where t is time in seconds) is applied at t = 0 sec. to the block of mass m placed on a
rough horizontal surface. The coefficient of static and kinetic friction between the block and surface are
µs and µk respectively. Which of the following graphs best represents the acceleration vs time of the
block. (µs > µK)
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2. A body of mass m is kept on a rough fixed inclined plane of angle of inclination  = 30º. It remains
stationary. Then magnitude of force acting on the body by the inclined plane is equal to:
(A) mg (B) mg sin  (C) mg cos  (D) none of these
3. A body of mass 10 kg lies on a rough inclined plane of inclination  =
3
sin1 with the horizontal. When a force of 30 N is applied on the
5
block parallel to &
upward the plane, the total reaction by the plane on the block is nearly along:
(A) OA (B) OB (C) OC (D) OD

4. A 1 kg block is being pushed against a wall by a force F = 75 N as
shown in the Figure. The coefficient of friction is 0.25. The magnitude
of acceleration of
the block is:
(A) 10 m/s2 (B) 20 m/s2 (C) 5 m/s2 (D) none
COMPREHENSION
Figure shows an arrangement of pulleys and two blocks. All surfaces are
frictionless. All pulleys and strings are massless. All strings are smooth
and massless.
5. The acceleration of block A is :

2g g g
9 9 5
6. Normal reaction between A and ground is :
17mg 16mg
(A) mg (B) (C) (D) None of these
9 9
7. Normal reaction between A and B is :
mg 2mg
(A) mg (B) (C) (D) None of these
9 9
DPPS FILE # 44
Topics : Newtons’s Law of Motion, Projectile Motion, Friction

1. System is shown in the figure and man is pulling the rope from both
sides with constant speed ' u'. Then the speed of the block will be:
3u 3u
(A) (B)
4 2
u
(C) (D) none of thes
4
2. Hailstones falling vertically with a speed of 10 m/s, hit the wind screen (wind screen makes an angle 30° with
the horizontal) of a moving car and rebound elastically. The velocity of the car if the driver finds the hailstones
rebound vertically after striking is :
10
(A) 10 3 m/s (B) 20 3 m/s (C) 10 m/sec (D) m/sec
3
3. In the shown arrangement if f 1, f 2 and T be the frictional forces on 2 kg block, 3kg block & tension in the
string respectively, then their values are:
(A) 2 N, 6 N, 3.2 N (B) 2 N, 6 N, 0 N
(C) 1 N, 6 N, 2 N (D) data insufficient to calculate the required values.
4. Two blocks A and B are placed in contact on a horizontal surface. Faces of blocks A and B, which are in
contact, are inclined at 30° with the horizontal, as shown. There is no friction between block A and any
1
surface which is in contact with this whereas friction coefficient between block B and the surface is .A
3
force F is applied in horizontal direction on block A. What is the minimum value of F at which the block B
just start moving rightwards?
A B
M = 4 kg M = 4 kg
F
30°
1
µ=
3
40 80
(A) N (B) N
3 3
(C) 100 N (D) For any value of F, motion will not start
DPPS FILE # 45
5. A block of mass 2 kg is given a push for a moment horizontally and then the block starts sliding over a
horizontal plane. The graph shows the velocity-time graph of the motion. The co-efficient of sliding
friction between the plane and the block is:
(A) 0.02 (B) 0.20

(C) 0.04 (D) 0.40
6. A weight W is supported by two strings inclined at 60º and 30º to the vertical. The tensions in the
strings are T 1 & T 2 as shown. If these tensions are to be determined in terms of W using a triangle of
forces, which of these triangles should you draw? (block is in equilibrium)
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
7. An arrangement of the masses and pulleys is shown in the figure. Strings connecting masses A and B
with pulleys are horizontal and all pulleys and strings are light. Friction coefficient between the surface
and the block B is 0.2 and between blocks A and B is 0.7. The system is released from rest.
(use g = 10 m/s2)
6 kg A
3 kg
B
=0.2
6kg Block C 1kg Block D
(A) The magnitude of acceleration of the system is 2 m/s2 and there is no slipping between block A and
block B.
(B) The magnitude of friction force between block A and block B is 42 N.
(C) Acceleration of block C is 1 m/s2 downwards.
(D) Tension in the string connecting block B and block D is 12 N.
DPPS FILE # 46
Topics : Friction, Newton’s Law of Motion

1. The system is pushed by a force F as shown in figure. All surfaces are smooth except between B and
C. Friction coefficient between B and C is . Minimum value of F to prevent block B from downward
slipping is
 3   5 
(A)   mg (B)   mg
 2µ   2µ 
5 3
(C)   µmg (D)   µmg
2 2
2. A system is shown in the figure. Block A is moving with 1 m/s towards left. Wedge is moving with 1 m/
s towards right. Then speed of the block B will be:
(A) 1 m/s (B) 2 m/s
(C) 3 m/s (D) none of these
3. A sphere of radius R is in contact with a wedge. The point of contact is R/5 from the ground as shown
in the figure. Wedge is moving with velocity 20 m/s, then the velocity of the sphere at this instant will
be
(A) 20 m/s (B) 15 m/s
(C) 5 m/s (D) 10 m/s
4. The system starts from rest and A attains a velocity of 5 m/s after it has moved 5 m towards right. Assuming
the arrangement to be frictionless every where and pulley & strings to be light, the value of the constant force
F applied on A is :
(A) 50 N
(B) 75 N
(C) 100 N
(D) 96 N
DPPS FILE # 47
5. A system is shown in the figure. Block A moves with velocity 10 m/s.The speed of the mass B will be:
(A) 10 2 m/s
(B) 5 3 m/s
20
(C) m/s
3
(D) 10 m/s
6. Two wedges, each of mass m, are placed next to each other on a flat horizontal floor. A cube of mass
M is balanced on the wedges as shown in figure. Assume no friction between the cube and the wedges,
but a coefficient of static friction  < 1 between the wedges and the floor. What is the largest M that can
be balanced as shown without motion of the wedges ?
m m m 2m
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 2 1  1 
7. In the figure shown if friction co-efficient of block 1 and 2 with inclined plane is 1 = 0.5 and 2 = 0.4
respectively, then find out the correct statement.
(A) both block will move together

(B) both block will move separately
(C) there is a non-zero contact force between two blocks
(D) none of these
8. In the figure a truck is moving on a horizontal surface with acceleration a. Two blocks of equal masses m are
supported on the truck as shown in figure. Given that when the block at the top surface is just about to slide,
other block remains hanging at 30º from the vertical. In this system.
m
rough ()
30º
m
a
g 2 5 3 3
(A) a = (B) T = mg (C) µ = (D) T = 2 mg
3 3 3 3
DPPS FILE # 48
Topics : Projectile Motion, Friction,Newton’s Law of Motion.

1. Two stones are projected simultaneously from a tower at different angles of projection with same speed ‘u’.
The distance between two stones is increasing at constant rate ‘u’. Then the angle between the initial
velocity vectors of the two stones is :
(A) 30° (B) 60° (C) 45° (D) 90°
2. A block is placed on an inclined plane and has to be pushed down. The angle of inclination of the plane
is:
(A) equal to angle of repose (B) more than angle of repose
(C) less than the angle of repose (D) equal to angle of friction
3. A block of mass 20 kg is acted upon by a force F = 30 N at an angle 53° with the horizontal in downward
direction as shown. The coefficient of friction between the block and the horizontal surface is 0.2. The friction
force acting on the block by the ground is (g = 10 m/s2)
F
53°
(A) 40.0 N (B) 30.0 N (C) 18.0 N (D) 44.8 N
4. Two blocks of masses 5 kg and 3kg are placed in contact over a fixed inclined surface of angle 37°, as
shown. µ1 is friction coefficient between 5kg block and the surface of the incline and similarly, µ2 is friction
coefficient between the 3kg block and the surface of the incline. After the release of the blocks from the
inclined surface,
3kg
5kg µ2
µ1
37°
(A) if µ1 = 0.5 and µ2 = 0.3 then 5 kg block exerts 3N force on the 3 kg block
(B) if µ1 = 0.5 and µ2 = 0.3 then 5 kg block exters 8 N force on the 3 kg block
(C) if µ1 = 0.3 and µ2 = 0.5 then 5 kg block exerts 1 N force on the 3kg block.
(D) if µ1 = 0.3 and µ2 = 0.5 then 5 kg block exerts no force on the 3kg block.
DPPS FILE # 49
5. A block A (5 kg) rests over another block B (3 kg) placed over a smooth horizontal surface. There is
friction between A and B. A horizontal force F 1 gradually increasing from zero to a maximum is applied
to A so that the blocks move together without relative motion. Instead of this another horizontal force
F 2, gradually increasing from zero to a maximum is applied to B so that the blocks move together
without relative motion. Then
(A) F 1 (max) = F 2 (max) (B) F 1 (max) > F 2 (max)

(C) F 1 (max) < F 2 (max) (D) F 1 (max): F 2 (max) = 5: 3
6. In the arrangement shown, W 1 = 200 N, W 2 = 100 N,  = 0.25 for allsurfaces in contact. The block W 1 just
slides under the block W 2.
A
W2 45°
P
W1
(A) A pull of 50 N is to be applied on W 1

(B) A pull of 90 N is to be applied on W 1
(C) Tension in the string AB is 10 2 N
(D) Tension in the string AB is 20 2 N
7. Figure shows a small block A of mass m kept at the left end of a plank B of mass M = 2m and length
. The system can slide on a horizontal road. The system is started towards right with the initial
velocity v. The friction coefficients between the road and the plank is 1/2 and that between the plank
and the block is 1/4. Find
(a) the time elapsed before the block separate from the plank.
(b) displacement of block and plank relative to ground till that moment.
8. Find the tensions in the strings (1), (2) and (3) and the acceleration of the mass ‘m’ just after (intially system
is in equilibrium and at rest, pulley, string, spring are light):
(a) string (1) is cut (b) string (2) is cut (c) string (3) is cut
DPPS FILE # 50
Topics : Friction, Work, Power and Energy , Relative Motion, Newton’s Law of Motion
1. The coefficient of friction between block A of mass m 1 = 5 kg and block B of mass m 2 = 10 kg is  = 0.5.
There is no friction force between block B and fixed horizontal surface. A force of 300 N acts on block
B in horizontal direction and a horizontal force of magnitude F acts on block A as shown, both towards
right. Initially there is no relative motion between the blocks. The minimum value of F such that relative
motion starts between A and B is :
A m1 F
B m2 300N
Fixed horizontal surface
(A) 200N (B) 187.5N

(C) 150 N (D) 0
2. Graph shows the acceleration of a 3 kg particle as an applied force moves it from rest along x axis. The
total work done by the force on the particle by the time the particle reaches x = 6 m, is equal to
(A) 20 J (B) 30 J
(C) 40 J (D) 60 J
3. A particle P is projected from a point on the surface of long smooth inclined plane (see figure). Simulta-
neously another particle Q is released on the smooth inclined plane from the same position. P and Q collide
after t = 4 second. The speed of projection of P is
(A) 5 m/s (B) 10 m/s

(C) 15 m/s (D) 20 m/s
DPPS FILE # 51
4. In the shown mass pulley system, pulleys and string are massless. The one end of the string is pulled
by the force F = 2mg. The acceleration of the block will be
(A) g/2 (B) 0

(C) g (D) 3g
5. A wedge is moving rightwards on which a block of mass 10kg is placed on it. Friction coefficient between the
wedge and the block is 0.8. [take g = 10 m/s2]. Select correct alternative(s) among the following options
(A) If wedge is moving with constant velocity then friction acting on block is 64N.
(B) If wedge is moving with constant velocity then acceleration of block is zero.

(C) If wedge is moving with a = 2 ( î ) m/s2 then friction acting on block is 44N.

(D) If wedge is moving with a = 10 ( î ) m/s2 then friction is 20N, downward on the wedge along the inclined.
COMPREHENSION
Three blocks of masses 6 kg, 4kg & 2 kg are pulled on a rough surface by applying a constant force
20N. The values of cofficient of friction between blocks & surface are shown in figrue.
6. In the arrangement shown tension in the string connecting 4kg and 6kg masses is
(A) 8N (B) 12N (C) 6N (D) 4N
7. Friction force on 4 kg block is

(A) 4N (B) 6 N (C) 12 N (D) 8 N
8. Friction force on 6 kg block is

(A) 12 N (B) 8 N (C) 6 N (D) 4 N
DPPS FILE # 52
Topics : Friction, Work, Power and Energy, Newton’s Law of Motion

1. Work done by static friction on an object:

(A) may be positive (B) must be negative
(C) must be zero (D) none of these
2. A block of unknown mass is at rest on a rough, horizontal surface. A horizontal force F is applied to the
block. The graph in the figure shows the acceleration of the block with respect to the applied force. The
mass of the block is
(A) 1.0 kg (B) 0.1 kg (C) 2.0 kg (D) 0.2 kg
3. A block of mass 10 kg is released on a fixed wedge inside a cart which is moved with constant velocity 10 m/
s towards right. Take initial velocity of block with respect to cart zero. Then work done by normal reaction
(with respect to ground) on block in two second will be: (g = 10 m/s2).
(A) zero (B) 960 J

(C) 1200 J (D) none of these
4. Two blocks of mass 10 kg and 2 kg respectively are connected by an ideal string passing over a fixed
smooth pulley as shown in figure. A monkey of mass 8 kg started climbing the string with a constant
acceleration of 2 m/s2 with respect to string at t = 0. Initially the system is in equilibrium and monkey
is at a distance 2.4 from the pulley. Find the time taken by monkey to reach the pulley in sec.
DPPS FILE # 53

5. The work done by a force F  5 k̂ as its point of application moves from the point (1, 1, 1) to the origin
is equal to ______ .
COMPREHENSION
A block of mass m is placed on a rough inclined plane. The coefficient of friction between the block and
the plane is  and the inclination of the plane is . Initially  = 0 and the block will remain stationary on
the plane. Now the inclination  is gradually increased. The block presses the inclined plane with a
force mgcos. So welding strength between the block and inclined is  mgcos, and the pulling forces
is mgsin . As soon as the pulling force is greater than the welding strength, the welding breaks and the
block starts sliding, the angle  for which the block starts sliding is called angle of repose (). During
the contact, two contact forces are acting between the block and the inclined plane. The pressing
reaction (Normal reaction) and the shear reaction (frictional force). The net contact force will be resultant
of both.
Answer the following questions based on above comprehension :
6. If the entire system, were accelerated upward with acceleration ‘a’, the angle of repose, would :
(A) increase (B) decrease (C) remain same (D) increase of a > g
7. For what value of  will the block slide on the inclined plane :
(A)  tan–1 (B)  tan–1 (C)  cot –1 (D)  cot –1
8. If  = 3/4 then what will be frictional force (shear force) acting between the block and inclined plane
when  = 300 :
3 3 mg 3
(A) mg (B) (C) mg (D) zero
8 2 2
DPPS FILE # 54
Topics : Friction, Work, Power and Energy, Relative Motion

1. Consider the arrangement shown in figure. Friction coefficient for all the surfaces are shown in the
figure and the rod connecting two upper blocks is horizontal.
What is the minimum value F so that the rear two blocks start sliding with each other :
(A) 100 N (B) 50 N
(C) 150 N (D) For all values of F both the rear blocks will move together
2. A chain is held on a frictionless table with L/4 hanging over. Knowing total mass of the chain is M and
total length is L, the work required to slowly pull hanging part back to the table is :
MgL MgL MgL MgL
(A) (B) (C) (D)
16 8 32 24

3. An object is moving along a straight line path from P to Q under the action of a force F  ( 4 î  3 ĵ  2k̂ ) N. If
the co-ordinate of P & Q in metres are (3, 2, 1) & (2, 1, 4) respectively. Then the work done by the force
is:
(A)  15 J (B) + 15 J (C) 1015 J (D) (4 î  3 ĵ  2k̂ )
4. A bucket tied to a string is lowered at a constant acceleration of g/4. If the mass of the bucket is M and is
lowered by a distance d, the work done by the string on bucket will be (assume the string to be massless)
(A) (1/4) mg d (B) 3/4) mgd (C)  4/3) mgd (D) (4/3) mgd
5. PQ is a smooth inclined plane whose angle  can be varied in such a
way that point Q remains fixed and P can move on a vertical line PR. A
particle slides from rest from point P at different value of  time for descent
from P and Q is noted. The following statement (s) is /are correct about
the time of descent :
(A) the minimum time of descent is 2  / g
(B) the time descent is minimum at =900
(C) the time of descent decreases continuously as  is increased
(D) the time of descent first decreases then increases.
COMPREHENSION
Rain is falling with a velocity ( 4 î  8 ĵ  10k̂ ) . A person is moving with a velocity of (6 î  8 ĵ) on the ground.
6. Find the velocity of rain with respect to man and the direction from which the rain appears to be
coming.
7. The speed with which the rain drops hit the person is :
(A) 10 m/s (B) 10 2 m/s (C) 180 m/s (D) 360 m/s
8. The velocity of man w.r.t. rain is :

(A)  6 î  8 ĵ (B) 4 î  8 ĵ  10k̂ (C)  10 î  10k̂ (D) 10 î  10k̂
DPPS FILE # 55
Topics : Work, Power and Energy, Friction

1. In the track shown in figure section AB is a quadrant of a circle of 1 metre radius. A block is released at A and
slides without friction until it reaches B. After B it moves on a rough horizontal floor and comes to rest at
distance 3 metres from B. What is the coefficient of friction between floor and body ?
(A) 1/3 (B) 2/3

(C) 1/4 (D) 3/8
2. A block of mass m is attached with a massless spring of force constant k. The block is placed over a fixed
3
rough inclined surface for which the coefficient of friction is µ = . The block of mass m is initially at rest.
4
The block of mass M is released from rest with spring in unstretched state. The minimum value of M required
to move the block up the plane is (neglect mass of string and pulley and friction in pulley.)
3 4 6 3
(A) m (B) m (C) m (D) m
5 5 5 2
3. Starting at rest, a 10 kg object is acted upon by only one force as indicated in figure. Then the total
work done by the fo rce is
force(N)
30
0 Time
1 2 3
–10
(A) 90 J (B) 125 J

(C) 245 J (D) 490 J
DPPS FILE # 56
4. Block A in the figure is released from rest when the extension in the spring is x 0. (x 0 < mg/k). The
maximum downward displacement of the block is (ther is no friction) :
2Mg Mg
(A)  2x 0 (B)  x0
K 2K
2Mg 2Mg
(C)  x0 (D)  x0
K K
5. The minimum work done required to accelerate a truck on a horizontal road from rest to speed v
(A) is less than that required to accelerate it from v to 2v.
(B) is equal than that required to accelerate it from v to 2v.
(C) is more than that required to accelerate it from v to 2v.
(D) may be any one of the above since it depends on the force acting on the truck and the distance over
which it acts.
6. Which of the following relations are always true?
  1 2
v = velocity , a = acceleration, K = 2 mv = Kinetic energy
   
 t2
dK   d v av d v
da  
(A)
dt
 m v a (B)
dt
 
v
(C)
dt

dt
(D)  v =  a dt
t1
7. In the arrangement shown in Fig. the masses of the wedge M and the body m are known. The appreciable
friction exists only between the wedge and the body m, the friction coefficient being equal to . The masses
of the pulley and the thread are negligible. Find the acceleration of the body m relative to the horizontal
surface on which the wedge Slides.
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
8. The block of mass m initially at x = 0 is acted upon by a horizontal force at any position x is given as F = a
 bx2(where a > mg), as shown in the figure. The co-efficient of friction between the surfaces of contact is
. The net work done on the block is zero, if the block travels a distance of ______.
DPPS FILE # 57
Topics : Relative Motion, Work, Power and Energy, Friction

1. Two bikes A and B start from a point. A moves with uniform speed 40 m/s and B starts from rest with
uniform acceleration 2 m/s2. If B starts at t = 0 and A starts from the same point at t = 10 s, then the time
interval during the journey in which A was ahead of B is :
(A) 20 s (B) 8 s
(C) 10 s (D) A is never ahead of B
2. A block of mass 5 kg is released from rest when compression in spring is 2m. Block is not attached with the
spring and natural length of the spring is 4m. Maximum height of block from ground is : (g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 5.5 m (B) 4.5 m

(C) 6 m (D) 7.5 m
3. A block of mass 2 kg is hanging over a smooth and light pulley through a light string. The other end of the string
is pulled by a constant force F = 40 N. At t = 0 the system is at rest as shown. Then in the time interval from
2
t = 0 to t = seconds, pick up the correct statement (s) : (g = 10 m/s2)
10
2kg F=40N
(A) tension in the string is 40 N (B) work done by gravity is – 20 J

(C) work done by tension on block is 80 J (D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 58
4. The blocks of mass m 1 = 1 kg and m 2 = 2 kg are connected by an ideal spring, rest on a rough
horizontal surface. The spring is unstressed. The spring constant of spring is K = 2 N/m. The coefficient
1
of friction between blocks and horizontal surface is  . Now the left block is imparted a velocity u
2
towards right as shown. The largest value of u (in m/s) such that the block of mass m 2 never moves is
(Take g = 10m/s2)
5. If the lower block is held fixed & force is applied to P, minimum force required to slide P on Q is
12 N. Now if Q is free to move on frictionless surface and force is applied to Q then the minimum
force F required to slide P on Q is ______.
COMPREHENSION
A block of mass 1 kg is placed on a rough horizontal surface. A spring is attached to the block whose
other end is joined to a rigid wall,as shown in the figure. A horizontal force is applied on the block so
 mg 
that it remains at rest while the spring is elongated by x  x   . Let F max and F min be the maximum
 k 
and minimum values of force F for which the block remains in equilibrium. For a particular x,
F max– F min = 2 N. Also shown is the variation of F max+ F min versus x, the elongation of the spring.
+ Fmin
Fmax
K 5N
1 kg F
0.1m
x
6. The coefficient of friction between the block and the horizontal surface is :
(A) 0.1 (B) 0.2 (C) 0.3 (D) 0.4
7. The spring constant of the spring is:

(A) 25 N/m (B) 20 N/m (C) 2.5 N/m (D) 50 N/m
8. The value of F min , if x = 3 cm is :

(A) 0 (B) 0.2N (C) 5N (D) 1N
DPPS FILE # 59
Topics : Relative Motion, Work, Power and Energy

1. Two objects moving along the same straight line are leaving point A with an acceleration a, 2 a &
velocity 2 u, u respectively at time t = 0. The distance moved by the object with respect to point A when
one object overtakes the other is :
6u2 2u 2 4u2
a a a
2. A particle of mass ‘m’ moves along the quarter section of the circular path whose centre is at the origin. The

radius of the circular path is ‘a’. A force F = y î  xĵ newton acts on the particle, where x, y denote the
coordinates of position of the particle. Calculate the work done by this force in taking .the particle from point
A (a, 0) to point B (0, a) along the circular path.
3. A particle is moved along the different paths OAC, OBC & ODC as shown in the fig. Path ODC is

a parabola, y = 4 x 2. Find the work done by a f orce F = x y i  x y j on the particle along these
2
paths. Is this force a conservative force ?
B C (1,4)
O x
A
DPPS FILE # 60
COMPREHENSION
Consider the system shown below, with two equal masses m and a spring with spring constant K. The
coefficient of friction between the left mass and horizontal table is  = 1/4, and the pulley is frictionless.
The string connecting both the blocks is massless and inelastic. The system is held with the spring at
its unstretched length and then released.
4. The extension in spring when the masses come to momentary rest for the first time is
3 mg mg mg 2mg
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2K 2K K K
5. The minimum value of  for which the system remains at rest once it has stopped for the first time is
1 1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 3 2 2
6. If the string connecting both the masses is cut just at the instant both masses came to momentary
rest for the first time in question 5, then maximum compression of spring during resulting motion is
(Take  = 1/4)
2mg mg mg 1mg
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3K 2K K 3K
7. Two blocks A and B of masses m and M are placed on a horizontal surface, both being interconnected
with a horizontal series combination of two massless springs 1 and 2, of force constants k 1 and k2
respectively as shown. Friction coefficient between block A and the surface is  and the springs are
initially non-deformed. Now the block B is displaced slowly to the right by a distance x, and it is
observed that block A does not slip on the surface. Block B is kept in equilibrium by applying an
external force at that position. Match the required information in the left column with the options given
in the right column.
y k1 k2
M m
x Block A spring1 spring2
 frictionless
Left column Right column

(A) Friction force on block A by the surface (p) k1 x (– î )
(B) Force by spring 1 on block A (q)  Mg (– î )
k1k 2 x
(C) Force exerted by spring 2 on spring 1. (r) ( )
k 1  k 2 î
k1k 2 x
(D) External force on block B. (s) (– î )
k1  k 2
DPPS FILE # 61
Topics : Relative Motion, Work, Power and Energy, Projectile Motion

1. For a particle undergoing rectilinear motion with uniform acceleration, the magnitude of displacement is one
third the distance covered in some time interval. The magnitude of final velocity is less than magnitude of
initial velocity for this time interval. Then the ratio of initial speed velocity to the final speed for this time
interval is :
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 3
2. Power versus time graph for a given force is given below. Work done
by the force upto time t( t 0).

(A) First decreases then increases
(B) First increases then decreases
(C) Always increases
(D) Always decreases
3. Block A in the figure is released from the rest when the extension in the spring is x0 . The maximum
downward displacement of the block will be :
(A) Mg/2k  x0 (B) Mg/2k + x0 (C) 2 Mg/k  x0 (D) 2 Mg/k + x0

4. Block m is released from rest when spring is in its natural length (assume
pulley is ideal and block does not strike on ground during it's motion in
vertical plane)
than :
(A) maximum elongation in spring is 4 mg/k
(B) maximum elongation in spring is 2 mg/k
m
(C) maximum speed of block is 2g
k
m
(D) maximum speed of block is g
k
DPPS FILE # 62
5. A particle is projected at an angle of 300 w.r.t. horizontal with speed 20 m/s : (use g = 10 m/s2)
(i) Find the position vector of the particle after 1s.
(ii) Find the angle between velocity vector and position vector at t = 1s.
COMPREHENSION
A small block of mass m is released from a fixed smooth wedge as shown in figure. Initial point is
marked as A. Bottom of wedge is marked as B and at a point C the block stops moving because the
straight part of floor is rough.
A
m
smooth
rough Fixed
m B
C x0
6. Work done by normal reaction is zero during the motion of the block
(A) from point A to B only (B) from point B to C only
(C) from A to C (D) None of these
7. The friction coefficient of the block with the floor is :

h x0
(A) x (B) (C) zero (D) 1
0 h
8. The velocity of the block at the midpoint between B to C will be :

2gh gh
(A) (B) 2gh (C) gh (D)
2 2
DPPS FILE # 63
Topics : Work, Power and Energy, Circular Motion

1. A body is given a velocity 2 g r at the highest point of a half circular smooth track which is joined by
a rough horizontal track whose co-efficient of friction is  = 0.5. Then the distance travelled by particle
before it stops on horizontal track is: (r = 1 m)
2. A particle moves along a circle of radius R with a constant angular speed  .Its displacement (only
magnitude) in time t will be
t
(A) t (B) 2 R cos t (C) 2 R sin t (D) 2R sin
2
1
3. Three particle A, B & C move in a circle of radius r = m, in anticlockwise direction with speeds 1 m/

s, 2.5 m/s and 2 m/s respectively. The initial positions of A, B and C are as shown in figure. The ratio
of distance travelled by B and C by the instant A, B and C meet for the first time is
(A) 3 : 2 (B) 5 : 4 (C) 3 : 5 (D) 3 : 7
4. Two bodies having masses 10 kg and 5 kg are moving in concentric orbits of radii 4 and 8 such that their time
periods are the same. Then the ratio of their centripetal accelerations is
1 1
(A) (B) 2 (C) 8 (D)
2 8
5. A stone is thrown horizontally under gravity with a speed of 10m/sec. Find the radius of curvature of it’s
trajectory at the end of 3 sec after motion began.
(A)10 10 m (B) 100 10 m (C) 10 m (D) 100m
DPPS FILE # 64
6. A particle begins to move with a tangential acceleration of constant magnitude 0.6 m/s2 in a circular path. If
it slips when its total acceleration becomes 1 m/s2, then the angle through which it would have turned before
it starts to slip is :
(A) 1/3 rad (B) 2/3 rad (C) 4/3 rad (D) 2 rad
7. One of the forces acting on a particle is conservative then which of the following statement(s) are true
about this conservative force
(A) Its work is zero when the particle moves exactly once around any closed path.
(B) Its work equals the change in the kinetic energy of the particle
(C) Then that particular force must be constant.
(D) Its work depends on the end points of the motion, not on the path between.
COMPREHENSION
A particle of mass 0.1 kg is launched at an angle of 53° with the horizontal. The particle enters a fixed
rough hollow tube whose length is slightly less than 12.5 m and which is inclined at an angle of 37° with
the horizontal as shown in figure. It is known that the velocity of ball when it enters the tube is parallel
3
to the axis of the tube. The coefficient of friction between the particle and tube inside the tube is  = .
8
[Take g = 10 m/s2]
8. The velocity of the particle as it enters the tube is :

(A) 12 m/s (B) 16m/s (C) 9 m/s (D) 15 m/s
9. The kinetic energy of the particle when it comes out of the tube is approximately equal to :
(A) Zero (B) 4 J (C) 7.2 J (D) 11.2 J
10. The distance from the point of projection where the particle will land on the horizontal plane after
coming out from the tube is approximately equal to :
(A) 8.4 m (B) 10 m (C) 18.4 m (D) 36.8 m
DPPS FILE # 65
Topics : Work, Power and Energy, Circular Motion

1. A block of mass m starts at rest at height h on a frictionless inclined plane. The block slides down the
plane, travels across a rough horizontal surface with coefficient of kinetic friction , and compresses a
spring with force constant k a distance x before momentarily coming to rest. Then the spring extends and
the block travels back across the rough surface, sliding up the plane. The block travels a total distance d on
rough horizontal surface. The correct expression for the maximum height h’ that the block reaches on its
return is:
(A) mgh’ = mgh – mgd (B) mgh’ = mgh + mgd

(C) mgh’ = mgh + mgd + kx2 (D) mgh’ = mgh – mgd – kx2
2. In the Figure, the ball A is released from rest when the spring is at its
natural length. For the block B, of mass M to leave contact with the
ground at some stage, the minimum mass of A must be:
(A) 2 M (B) M (C) M/2
(D) A function of M and the force constant of the spring.
3. A particle is moving in a circle
(A) The resultant force on the particle must be towards the centre.
(B) The resultant force may be towards the centre.
(C) The direction of the angular acceleration and the angular velocity must be the same.
(D) The cross product of the tangential acceleration and the angular velocity will be zero.

4. The potential energy function associated with the force F  4 xy î  2 x 2 ĵ is :
(A) U = – 2x 2 y (B) U = – 2x 2 y + constant
2
(C) U = 2x y + constant (D) not defined
5. A disc of radius R has a light pole fixed perpendicular to the disc at the
circumference which in turn has a pendulum of length R attached to its
other end as shown in figure. The disc is rotated with a constant
angular speed . The string is making an angle 300 with the rod. Then
the angular speed  of disc is:
1/ 2 1/ 2 1/ 2 1/ 2
 3g  3g  g   2g 
(A)  
 (B)  
 (C)  
 (D)  

 R   2 R   3 R   3 3 R 
6. Two blocks of masses m 1 and m 2 are placed in contact with each other
on a horizontal platform. The coefficient of friction between the platform
and the two blocks is the same. The platform moves with an acceleration. m1 m 2 a
The force of interaction between the blocks is:
(A) zero only if m 1 = m 2 (B) zero in all cases
(C) non-zero only if m 1 > m 2 (D) non-zero only if m 1 < m 2.
7. A car initially traveling eastwards turns north by traveling in a quarter circular path of radius R metres at
uniform speed as shown in figure. The car completes the turn in T second.
(a) What is the acceleration of the car when it is at B located at an angle of 37.
Express your a swers in terms of unit vectors î and ĵ
(b) The magnitude of car's average acceleration during T second period.
DPPS FILE # 66
Topic : Work, Power and Energy

1. A block of mass 1 kg slides down a vertical curved track that is one quadrant of a circle of radius 1m.
Its speed at the bottom is 2 m/s. The work done by frictional force is :
(A) 8 J (B)  8 J (C) 4 J (D)  4 J
2. A bead of mass m slides without friction on a vertical hoop of radius R. The bead moves under the
combined influence of gravity and a spring of spring constant k attached to the bottom of the hoop. For
simplicity assume, the equilibrium length of the spring to be zero. The bead is released at the top of the
hoop with negligible speed as shown. The bead, on passing the bottom point will have a velocity of :
2R
2kR 2 kR 2 kR 2
(A) 2 gR (B) 2 gR  (C) 2 gR  (D) 2gR 
m m m
3. In a simple pendulum, the breaking strength of the string is double the weight of the bob. The bob is released
from rest when the string is horizontal. The string breaks when it makes an angle  with the vertical.
1 2
(A)  = cos 1 (B)  = 60º (C)  = cos 1 (D)  = 0
3 3
4. A particle initially at rest starts moving from point A on the surface of a fixed smooth hemisphere of
radius r as shown. The particle looses its contact with hemisphere at point B. C is centre of the
hemisphere. The equation relating  and  is
(A) 3 sin  = 2 cos  (B) 2 sin  = 3 cos 

(C) 3 sin  = 2 cos  (D) 2 sin  = 3 cos 
DPPS FILE # 67
5. A heavy particle is projected from a point on the horizontal at an angle 60 0 with the horizontal with a
speed of 10m/s. Then the radius of the curvature of its path at the instant of crossing the same horizontal
is _______.
6. A weightless rod of length 2 carries two equal masses 'm', one secured at lower end A and the other at the
middle of the rod at B. The rod can rotate in vertical plane about a fixed horizontal axis passing through C.
What horizontal velocity must be imparted to the mass at A so that it just completes the vertical circle.
COMPREHENSION
A smooth sphere (mass 10 kg, negligible radius) rolls on a smooth curved surface from the point A
with a speed of 10 m/s as shown in figure . The sphere reaches the point D passing through point B .
If the ground is taken as reference, Then [Take g = 10 m/s2 ]
20m C
D
E
B 10m 3m
7. The total energy of the sphere at the point A ,

(A) 2500 J (B) zero (C) 1500 J (D) 2000 J
8. The kinetic energy & the potential energy at point B ,

(A) 2500 J, 0 J (B) 0 J, 2500 J (C) 2500 J, 1500 J (D) 1500 J, 2500 J
9. The kinetic energy at C

(A) 2500 J (B) zero (C) 1500 J (D) 2000 J
10. The kinetic energy at D ,

(A) 2200 J (B) zero (C) 1500 J (D) 2000 J
11. Will the sphere go beyond D ?

(A) Yes (B) No
(C) More information is required (D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 68
Topics : Circular Motion, Center of Mass, Work, Power and Energy, Friction
1. A smooth wire is bent into a vertical circle of radius a. A bead P can slide smoothly on the wire. The
circle is rotated about vertical diameter AB as axis with a constant speed  as shown in figure. The
bead P is at rest w.r.t. the wire in the position shown. Then 2 is equal to :
2g 2g g 3 2a
(A) (B) (C) (D)
a a 3 a g 3
2. A ball suspended by a thread swings in a vertical plane so that its acceleration in the extreme position
and lowest position are equal in magnitude. Angle  of thread deflection in the extreme position will be:
1 1
(A) 2 tan1 (B) tan1 (C) tan1 2 (D) tan1 2
2 2
3. An automobile enters a turn of radius R. If the road is banked at an angle of 45 0 and the coefficient of
friction is 1, the minimum and maximum speed with which the automobile can negotiate the turn
without skidding is:
rg rg rg
(A) and rg (B) and rg (C) and 2 rg (D) 0 and infinite
2 2 2
4. From the uniform disc of radius 4 R two small disc of radius R are cut off. The centre of mass of the new
structure will be : (Centre of lower circular cavity lies on x-axis and centre of upper circular cavity lies
on y-axis)
R R R R
(A) î  ĵ (B)  î  ĵ
5 5 5 5
R R 3R
(C)  î  ĵ (D)  ( î  ĵ )
5 5 14
DPPS FILE # 69
5. As shown in the figure, M is a man of mass 60 kg standing on a block of mass 40 kg kept on ground.
The co-efficient of friction between the feet of the man and the block is 0.3 and that between B and the
ground is 0.1. If the person pulls the string with 100 N force, then :
(A) B will slide on ground

(B) A and B will move together with acceleration 1 m/s2
(C) the friction force acting between A & B will be 40 N
(D) the friction force acting between A & B will be 180 N
COMPREHENSION
Two bodies A and B of masses 10 kg and 5 kg are placed very slightly separated as shown in figure.
The coefficient of friction between the floor and the blocks is  = 0.4. Block A is pushed by an external
force F. The value of F can be changed. When the welding between block A and ground breaks, block
A will start pressing block B and when welding of B also breaks, block B will start pressing the vertical
wall –
6. If F = 20 N, with how much force does block A presses the block B

(A) 10 N (B) 20 N (C) 30 N (D) Zero
7. What should be the minimum value of F, so that block B can press the vertical wall
(A) 20 N (B) 40 N (C) 60 N (D) 80 N
8. If F = 50 N, the friction force (shear force) acting between block B and ground will be :
(A) 10 N (B) 20 N (C) 30 N (D) None
9. A particle moving along x-axis is being acted upon by one dimensional conservative force F. In the F–x curve
shown, four points J, K, L, M are marked on the curve. Column  gives different type of equilibrium for the
particle at different positions. Column  gives certain positions on the force position graphs. Match the
positions in Column-I with the corresponding nature of equilibrium at these positions.
F
M
x
O K L
J
Column I Column II
(A) Point J is position of (p) Neutral equilibrium
(B) Point K is position of (q) Unstable equilibrium
(C) Point L is position of (r) Stable equilibrium
(D) Point M is position of (s) No equilibrium
DPPS FILE # 70
Topics : Circular Motion, Center of Mass, Newton’s Law of Motion, Work , Power and Energy

1. A circular curve of a highway is designed for traffic moving at 72 km/h. If the radius of the curved path
is 100 m, the correct angle of banking of the road should be given by :
2 3 2 1
(A) tan 1 (B) tan 1 (C) tan 1 (D) tan 1
3 5 5 4
2. Two semicircular rings of linear mass densities  and 2  and of radius ‘R’ each are joined to form a complete
ring. The distance of the center of the mass of complete ring from its geometrical centre is :
3R 2R 3R
8 3 4
3. The centre of mass of a non uniform rod of length L whose mass per unit length  varies as
k.x 2
= where k is a constant & x is the distance of any point on rod from its one end, is (from the
L
same end)
3 1 k 3k
(A) L (B) L (C) (D)
4 4 L L
4. A bead of mass m is located on a parabolic wire with its axis vertical and vertex at the origin as shown in
figure and whose equation is x2 = 4ay. The wire frame is fixed in vertical plane and the bead can slide on it
without friction. The bead is released from the point y = 4a on the wire frame from rest. The tangential
acceleration of the bead when it reaches the position given by y = a is :
g 3g g g
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 2 2 5
5. A uniform thin rod is bent in the form of closed loop ABCDEFA as shown in the figure. The y-coordinate
of the centre of mass of the system is
2r 6r 2r
(A) (B)  (C)  (D) Zero
 3  2 
DPPS FILE # 71
6. A particle of mass m is fixed to one end of a light spring of force constant k and unstretched length .
k
The system is rotated about the other end of the spring with an angular speed  (   ) in gravity
m
free space. The increase in length of the spring is :
m 2  m 2  m2 
k k  m2 k  m 2
7. A body of mass m was slowly hauled up the hill as shown in figure by a force F which at each point was
directed along a tangent to the trajectory. Find the work performed by this force, if the height of the hill
is h, the length of its base  , and the coefficient of friction k.
COMPREHENSION
One end of massless inextensible string of length  is fixed and other end is tied to a small ball of mass m.
The ball is performing a circular motion in vertical plane. At the lowest position, speed of ball is 20 g  .
Neglect any other forces on the ball except tension and gravitational force. Acceleration due to gravity is g.
8. Motion of ball is in nature of

(A) circular motion with constant speed
(B) circular motion with variable speed
(C) circular motion with constant angular acceleration about centre of the circle.
(D) none of these
9. At the highest position of ball, tangential acceleration of ball is -

(A) 0 (B) g (C) 5 g (D) 16 g
10. During circular motion, minimum value of tension in the string -

(A) zero (B) mg (C) 10 mg (D) 15 mg
DPPS FILE # 72
Topics : Center of Mass, Work, Power and Energy, Friction

1. A block attached with an ideal spring is kept on a smooth horizontal surface. Now the free end of the
spring is pulled with a constant velocity u horizontally. Then the maximum energy stored in the spring
and block system during subsequent motion is :
1
(A) mu2 (B) mu2 (C) 2mu2 (D) 4 mu2
2
2. A block of mass 1kg is pushed on a movable wedge of mass 2kg and height h = 30 cm with a velocity
u = 6m/sec. Before striking the wedge it travels 2 m on a rough horizontal portion. Velocity is just
sufficient for the block to reach the top of the wedge. Assuming all surfaces are smooth except the
given horizontal part and collision of block and wedge is jerkless, the friction coefficient of the rough
horizontal part is :
(A) 0.125 (B) 0.377 (C) 0.675 (D) 0.45

3. In the figure shown find out the distance of centre of mass of a system of a
uniform circular plate of radius 3 R from O in which a hole of radius R is cut
whose centre is at 2R distance from centre of large circular plate.
(A) R/4 (B) R/5 (C) R/2 (D) none of these
4. Which of the following statement is not true?
(A) Work done by conservative force on an object depends only on the initial and final states and not on
thepath taken.
(B) The change in the potential energy of a system corresponding to conservative internal forces is
equalto negative of the work done by these forces.
(C) If some of the internal forces within a system are non-conservative, then the mechanical energy of
the system is not constant.
(D) If the internal forces are conservative, the work done by the internal forces is equal to the change in
mechanical energy.
5. A boy of mass 50 kg produces an acceleration of 2m/s2 in a block of
mass 20kg by pushing it in horizontal direction. The boy moves with
the block such that boy and the block have same acceleration. There
is no friction between the block and fixed horizontal surface but there
is friction between foot of the boy and horizontal surface. Find friction
force (in Newton) exerted by the horizontal surface on the boy.
6. Four particles of mass 5, 3, 2, 4 kg are at the points (1, 6), ( 1, 5), (2, 3), (1, 4). Find the
coordinates of their centre of mass.
7. Motion of particle is described in column-I. In column-II, some statements about work done by forces on the
particle from ground frame is given. Match the particle's motion given in column-I with corresponding possible
work done on the particle in certain time interval given in column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) A particle is moving in horizontal circle (p) work done by all the forces may be positive
(B) A particle is moving in vertical circle (q) work done by all the forces may be negative
with uniform speed
(C) A particle is moving in air (projectile (r) work done by all the forces must be zero
motion without any air resistance) under gravity
(D) A particle is attached to roof of moving (s) work done by gravity may be positive.
train on inclined surface.
DPPS FILE # 73
Topics : Center of Mass, Circular Motion, Work, Power and Energy

Subjective Questions ('–1' negative marking) Q.5 to Q.6 (4 marks 5 min.) [8, 10]
Match the Following (no negative marking) (2 × 4)Q.7 (8 marks 10 min.) [8, 10]
Assertion and Reason (no negative marking) Q. 8 (3 marks 3 min.) [3, 3]
1. A homogeneous plate PQRST is as shown in figure. The centre of mass of plate lies at midpoint A of
b
segment QT. Then the ratio of is (PQ = PT = b; QR = RS = ST = a)
a
13 13
(A) (B)
4 2
13 13
(C) (D)
2 4
2. A particle is rotated in a vertical circle connected by a light string of length  and keeping the other end of the
string fixed. The minimum speed of the particle when the string is horizontal for which the particle will
complete the circle is
(A) g (B) 2g 
(C) 3g (D) 5g 
3. A ring attached with a spring is fitted in a smooth rod. The spring is fixed at the outer end of the rod. The
mass of the ring is 3kg & spring constant of spring is 300 N/m. The ring is given a velocity ‘V’ towards
the outer end of the rod. And the rod is set to be rotating with an angular velocity . Then ring will move
with constant speed with respect to the rod if :
(A) angular velocity of rod is increased continuously

(B)  = 10 rad/s
(C) angular velocity of rod is decreased continuously.
(D) constant velocity of ring is not possible.
DPPS FILE # 74
( 3  1)mg
4. A bead of mass m is attached to one end of a spring of natural length R and spring constant K = .
R
The other end of the spring is fixed at point A on a smooth vertical ring of radius R as shown in figure. The
normal reaction at B just after it is released is :
mg 3 3mg
(A) (B) 3 mg (C) 3 3 mg (D)
2 2
5. The square of the angular velocity  of a certain wheel increases linearly with the angular displacement
during 100 rev of the wheel's motion as shown.Compute the time t required for the increase.
6. A particle of mass 2kg starts to move at position x = 0 and time t = 0 under the action of force
F = (10 + 4x) N along the x-axis on a frictionless horizontal track. Find the power delivered by the force
in watts at the instant the particle has moved by the distance 5m.
7. In column-I condition on velocity, force and acceleration of a particle is given. Resultant motion is
  
described in column-II. u = initial velocity, F = resultant force and v = instantaneous velocity..
Column-I Column-II
  
(A) u  F  0 and F = constant (p) path will be circular path
  
(B) u  F  0 and F = constant (q) speed will increase
  
(C) v  F  0 all the time and | F | = constant (r) path will be straight line
and the particle always remains in one plane.
 
(D) u  2 î  3 ĵ and acceleration at all time a  6 î  9 ĵ (s) path will be parabolic
8. STATEMENT–1 : The work done by all forces on a system equals to the change in kinetic energy of that
system. This statement is true even if nonconservative forces act on the system.
STATEMENT–2 : The total work done by internal forces may be positive.

DPPS FILE # 75
Topics : Center of Mass, Circular Motion, Work, Power and Energy, Friction

1. A disc (of radius r cm) of uniform thickness and uniform density  has a square hole with sides of
r
length  = cm. One corner of the hole is located at the center of the disc and centre of the hole lies
2
on y-axis as shown. Then the y-coordinate of position of center of mass of disc with hole (in cm) is
r r r 3r
(A)  2 (  ¼) (B)  4 (  ¼) (C)  4 (  ½) (D)  4 (  ¼)
2. A flywheel rotates with a uniform angular acceleration. Its angular velocity increases from 20  rad/s to 40 
rad/s in 10 seconds. How many rotations did it make in this period?
(A) 80 (B) 100 (C) 120 (D) 150
3. Figure shows the roller coaster track. Each car will start from rest at point A and will roll with negligible
friction. It is important that there should be at least some small positive normal force exerted by the
track on the car at all points, otherwise the car would leave the track. With the above fact, the minimum
safe value for the radius of curvature at point B is (g = 10 m/s2) :
(A) 20 m (B) 10 m (C) 40 m (D) 25 m

4. A crate of mass m is pulled with a force F along a fixed right angled horizontal trough as in figure. The
coefficient of kinetic friction between the crate and the trough is  Find the value of force F required to
pull it along the trough with constant velocity.
F
45°
DPPS FILE # 76
COMPREHENSION
Figure shows an irregular wedge of mass m placed on a smooth horizontal surface. Part BC is rough.
5. What minimum velocity should be imparted to a small block of same mass m so that it may reach point B :
(A) 2 gH (B) 2gH (C) 2 g(H  h) (D) gh
6. The magnitude of velocity of wedge when the block comes to rest (w.r.t. wedge) on part BC is :
(A) gH (B) g(H  h (C) 2 gH (D) none of these
7. If the coefficient of friction between the block and wedge is , and the block comes to rest with respect to
wedge at a point E on the rough surface then BE will be
H Hh h
  
8. In each situation of column-I a mass distribution is given and information regarding x and y-coordinate
of centre of mass is given in column-II. Match the figures in column-I with corresponding information of
centre of mass in column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) An equilateral triangular wire (p) x cm > 0
frame is made using three thin
uniform rods of mass per unit
lengths , 2 and 3 as shown
(B) A square frame is made using (q) ycm > 0

four thin uniform rods of mass
per unit length lengths , 2,
3 and 4 as shown
(C) A circular wire frame is made (r) x cm < 0

of two uniform semicircular wires
of same radius and of mass per
unit length  and 2 as shown
(D) A circular wire frame is made (s) ycm < 0

of four uniform quarter circular
wires of same radius and
mass per unit length , 2, 3
and 4 as shown
DPPS FILE # 77
Topics : Circular Motion, Work, Power and Energy, Center of Mass

1. A bob is attached to one end of a string other end of which is fixed at
peg A. The bob is taken to a position where string makes an angle of
300 with the horizontal. On the circular path of the bob in vertical plane
there is a peg ‘B’ at a symmetrical position with respect to the position
of release as shown in the figure. If Vc and Va be the minimum speeds
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively, given to the
bob in order to hit the peg ‘B’ then ratio V c : Va is equal to :
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 1 : 4
2. A ring of radius R lies in vertical plane. A bead of mass ‘m’ can move along
the ring without friction. Initially the bead is at rest at the bottom most point
on ring. The minimum horizontal speed v with which the ring must be pulled
such that the bead completes the vertical circle
(A) 3gR (B) 4gR (C) 5gR (D) 5 . 5 gR
3. An object is moving in a circle at constant speed v. The magnitude of rate of change of momentum of the object
(A) is zero (B) is proportional to v (C) is proportional to v 2 (D) is proportional to v 3

4. Assuming potential energy ‘U’ at ground level to be zero.
Solid sphere Solid Cube Solid Cone Solid Cylinder
P Q R S
D D D D
D
U=0
D D D
All objects are made up of same material.

UP = Potential energy of solid sphere UQ = Potential energy of solid cube
UR = Potential energy of solid cone US = Potential energy of solid cylinder
(A) US > UP (B) UQ > US (C) UP > UQ (D) UP > US
5. A bob of mass 2 kg is suspended from point O of a cone with an inextensible string of length 3 m. It is
moving in horizontal circle over the surface of cone as shown in the figure. Then : (g = 10 m/s2)
(A) bob looses contact with cone if v  5 m/s
(B) normal force on bob is 19 N when v = 2 m/s

38
(C) tension in string is N when v = 2 m/s
3
17
(D) normal force on bob is N when v = 2m/s
3
DPPS FILE # 78
6. A block of mass m rests on a rough horizontal plane having coefficient of kinetic friction µk and coefficient of
5  k mg
static friction µs. The spring is in its natural length, when a constant force of magnitude P = starts
4
acting on the block. The spring force F is a function of extension x as F = kx3. (Where k is spring constant)
(a) Comment on the relation between µs and µk for the motion to start.
(b) Find the maximum extension in the spring (Assume the force
P is sufficient to make the block move).
COMPREHENSION
An initially stationary box on a frictionless floor explodes into two pieces, piece A with mass m A and
piece B with mass m B. Two pieces then move across the floor along x-axis. Graph of position versus
time for the two pieces are given.
7. Which graphs pertain to physically possible explosions ?

(A) , V (B) V (C) ,  (D) IV
8. Based on the above question, Match column A with the column B.

Column A Column B (Graph number)
(P) m A = m B 
(Q) m A > m B 
(R) m A < m B 
V
V
VI
(A P-V, Q-, R - (B) P-, Q-V, R-V (C) P-, Q-V, R-V (D) P-V, Q-, R-V
9. If all the graphs are possible then, in which of the following cases external force must be acting on the
box
(A) II (B) V (C) VI (D) I
DPPS FILE # 79
Topics : Work, Power and Energy, Circular Motion, Center of Mass, Relative Motion
1. The string is now replaced by a spring of spring constant k and

natural length . Mass 2m is fixed at the bottom of the frame. The
mass m which has the other end ofthe spring attached to it is
brought near the mass 2m and released as shown in figure. The
maximum angle  that the spring will substend at the centre will
be : (Take k = 10 N/m,  = 1 m, m = 1 kg and  = r)
(A) 60° (B) 30° (C) 90° (D) None of these
2. In the figure PQRS is a frictionless horizontal plane on which a particle

A of mass m moves in a circle of radius r with an angular velocity
such that 2 r = g/3. Another particle of mass m is tied to A through an
inextensible massless string. O is the hole through which string passes
down to B. B can move only vertically. The tension in the string at this
instant will be:
(A) mg/3 (B) 2 mg/3 (C) mg/6 (D) none

3. Two balls of same mass are released simultaneously from heights h & 2h from the ground level. The
balls collides with the floor & sticks to it. Then the velocity-time graph of centre of mass of the two balls
is best represented by :
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4. Displacement-time curve of a particle moving along a straight line is shown. Tangents at A and B make
angles 450 and 1350 with positive x-axis respectively. The average acceleration of the particle during
t = 1, t = 2 second is :
(A) – 2 m/s2 (B) 1 m/s2

(C) – 1 m/s2 (D) zero
DPPS FILE # 80
5. A particle A of mass m is situated at highest point of wedge B of mass 2 m is released from rest. Then
distance travelled by wedge B (with respect to ground) when particle A reaches at lowest position.
Assume all surfaces are smooth.
(A) 4/3 cm (B) 8/3 cm
(C) 2/3 cm (D) none of these
COMPREHENSION
Two racing cars 'A' and 'B' having masses 'M' and '2M' respectively start running from the starting line
on a horizontal plane. Both cars 'A' and 'B' have same speed 'V' which is constant through out the
journey. The track of the two cars are the arcs of concentric circle having centres O 1 and O 2 as shown
in figure with data. The friction coefficient of the two cars with the road is same. There is a finishing line
at the end of the arc. Using these informations solve the following questions.
t= 0
2M
B
M A
Starting line
r r O2
O1
r
Finishing line
6. Graph between the magnitude of relative velocity of the two car and time is :
vrel vrel vrel. vrel
(A) (B) (C) (D)
7. The magnitude of relative acceleration of two cars when car 'A' just reaches the end of circular arc of radius
'r'.
V2 V2 V2
(A) 0 (B) ( 5 – 2 2 ) (C) 2 (D)
2r r r
8. The time interval during which the two cars have same angular speed :
(A) Always along the motion (B) Never
r r
(C) (D)
2V 4V
9. Which of the following statements is incorrect.

(A) Both car reaches the finishing line at same time.
(B) Frictional force acting on the cars is directed towards centre whenever it acts
(C) Frictional force have same magnitude for two car 'A' and 'B' during the trip.
(D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 81
Topics : Circular Motion, Center of Mass

1. A particle is attached with a string of length  which is fixed at point O on an inclined plane what
minimum velocity should be given to the particle along the incline so that it may complete a circle on
inclined plane (plane is smooth and initially particle was resting on the inclined plane.)
5 g 5 3g
(A) 5 g (B) (C) (D) 4 g
2 2
2. When a block is placed on a wedge as shown in figure, the block starts sliding down and the wedge
also start sliding on ground. All surfaces are rough. The centre of mass of (wedge + block) system will
move
rough
Block
Wedge
rough
(A) leftward and downward. (B) right ward and downward.

(C) leftward and upwards. (D) only downward.
3. A shell of mass 4 kg moving with a velocity 10 m/s vertically upward explodes into three parts at a height 50
m from ground. After three seconds, one part of mass 2 kg reaches ground and another part of mass 1 kg is
at height 40 m from ground. The height of the third part from the ground is: [ g = 10 m/s2 ]
4 A small hoop of mass m is given an initial velocity of magnitude v 0 on the horizontal circular ring of
radius ‘r’. If the coefficient of kinetic friction is µ k the tangential acceleration of the hoop immediately
after its release is (assume the horizontal ring to be fixed and not in contact with any supporting
surface)
v 02 v 20 v 04
(A) µk g (B) µk (C) µk g2  (D) µk g2 
r r r2
DPPS FILE # 82
5. A car moves around a curve at a constant speed. When the car goes around the arc subtending 60° at
the centre, then the ratio of magnitude of instantaneous acceleration to average acceleration over the
60° arc is :
  2 5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 6 3 3
6. Two blocks A and B each of same mass are attached by a thin inextensible string through an ideal
pulley. Initially block B is held in position as shown in figure. Now the block B is released. Bolck A will
slide to right and hit the pulley in time t A. Block B will swing and hit the surface in time t B. Assume the
surface as frictionless.
(A) t A = t B
(B) t A < t B
(C) t A > t B
(D) data are not sufficient to get relationship between t A and t B.
7. Mass 2m is kept on a smooth circular track of mass m which is kept on a smooth horizontal surface. The
circular track is given a horizontal velocity 2gR towards left. Find the maximum height reached by 2m.
8. Match the following

A
Following is a solid object formed by three parts which are a solid
hemisphere, solid cyllinder and a solid cone. The material of the object is d
uniform and all the above parts are made up of the same material. The B
dimensions of the objects are indicated in the figure. The points A,B,C,D,E
C d
lie on the common axis of the system as shown in the figure. Point C is the d/2
centre of the cylinder. D
d
Column I Column II E
(A) Centre of mass of the whole system lies on segment (p) AB

(B) Centre of mass of the system of only hemisphere and (q) BC
cyllinder lies on segment
(C) Centre of mass of the system of only cone and (r) CD
cyllinder lies on segment
(D) Centre of mass of the system of only hemisphere (s) DE
and cone lies on segment
DPPS FILE # 83
Topics : Center of Mass, Work, Power and Energy

1. 8 small cubes of length  are stacked together to form a single cube. One cube is removed from this
system. The distance between the centre of mass of remaining 7 cubes and the original system is :
7 3 3 3
(A) (B)  (C)  (D) zero
16 16 14
2. A uniform rod of mass M and length L falls when it is made to stand on a smooth horizontal floor. The
trajectories of the points P, Q and R as shown in the figure given below is best represented by :
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3. A man places a vertical uniform chain (of mass ‘m’ and length ‘  ’) on a table slowly. Initially the lower end of
the chain just touches the table. The man drops the chain when half of the chain is in vertical position. Then
work done by the man in this process is :
 mg 3mg mg
(A) – mg (B) – (C) – (D) –
2 4 8 8
DPPS FILE # 84
4. The potential energy (in S units) of a particle of mass 2 kg in a conservative field is U = 6x – 8y. If the initial

velocity of the particle is u = – 1.5 î + 2 ĵ then the total distance travelled by the particle in first two seconds
is
(A) 10 m (B) 12 m (C) 15 m (D) 18 m
5. A penguin of mass m stands at the right edge of a sled of mass 3m and legnth  . The sled lies on frictionless
ice. The penguin starts moving towards left, reaches the left end and jumps with a velocity u and at an angle
 relative to ground. (Neglect the height of the sled)

(A) Till the penguin reaches the left end, the sled is displaced by
4

(B) Till the penguin reaches the left end, the sled is displaced by
3
2
4 u sin 2
(C) After jumping, it will fall on the ground at a distance from the left end of the sled.
3 g
3 u 2 sin 2
(D) After jumping, it will fall on the ground at a distance from the left end of the sled.
4 g
6. Two blocks, of masses M and 2M, are connected to a light spring of spring constant K that has one end
fixed, as shown in figure. The horizontal surface and the pulley are frictionless. The blocks are released
from rest when the spring is non deformed. The string is light.
K
M
2M
4 Mg
(A) Maximum extension in the spring is .
K
2 M2 g2
(B) Maximum kinetic energy of the system is
K
(C) Maximum energy stored in the spring is four times that of maximum kinetic energy of the system.
4 M2 g2
(D) When kinetic energy of the system is maximum, energy stored in the spring is
K
7. In the figure shown the spring is compressed by ‘x0’ and released. Two blocks ‘A’ and ‘B’ of masses ‘m’ and
‘2m’ respectively are attached at the ends of the spring. Blocks are kept on a smooth horizontal surface and
x0
released. Find the work done by the spring on ‘A’ by the time compression of the spring reduced to .
2
DPPS FILE # 85
Topics : Center of Mass, Work, Power and Energy, Circular Motion

1. A small bob of mass ‘m’ is suspended by a massless string from a cart of the same mass ‘m’ as shown in
the figure.The friction between the cart and horizontal ground is negligible. The bob is given a velocity V0 in
horizontal direction as shown. The maximum height attained by the bob is, (initially whole system
(bob + string + cart) was at rest).
2 2 2 2
2V0 V0 V0 V0
(A) (B) (C) (D)
g g 4g 2g
1
2. In the figure shown, coefficient of restitution between A and B is e = , then :
2
v 3
(A) velocity of B after collision is (B) impulse on one of the balls during collision is mv
2 4
3 1
(C) loss of kinetic energy in the collision is mv 2 (D) loss of kinetic energy in the collision is mv 2
16 4
3. The circular vertical section of the fixed track shown is smooth with radius r = 0.9 cm and the horizontal
straight section is rough with  = 0.1. A block of mass 1 kg is placed at point 'Q' and given a horizontal
velocity of 3 m/s towards the spring. Distance QS = 40 cm and maximum compression in the spring is
10 cm during the motion (g = 10 m/s2) :
(A) The force constant of the spring is 200 N/m

(B) The velocity with which block returns to point 'Q' is 1 m/s
(C) At point P its velocity will be 0.8 m/s
(D) At point P, the normal reaction on the block is less than 55 N
DPPS FILE # 86
4. The end ' A ' of a uniform rod AB of length '  ' touches a horizontal smooth fixed surface. Initially the rod
makes an angle of 30º with the vertical. Find the magnitude of displacement of the end B just before it
touches the ground after the rod is released.
5. A man is standing on a cart of mass double the mass of the man. Initially cart is at rest on the smooth
ground. Now man jumps with relative velocity 'v' horizontally towards right with respect to cart. Find the work
done by man during the process of jumping.
/////////////////////////////////////////////
6. A small block of mass m 1 lies over a long plank of mass m 2. The plank in turn lies over a smooth
horizontal surface. The coefficient of friction between m 1 and m 2 is . A horizontal force F is applied to
the plank as shown in figure. Column-I gives four situation corresponding to the system given above.
In each situation given in column-I, both bodies are initially at rest and subsequently the plank is pulled
by the horizontal force F. Take length of plank to be large enough so that block does not fall from it.
Match the statements in column-I with results in column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) If there is no relative motion between the (p) positive

block and plank, the work done by force of friction
acting on block in some time interval is
(B) If there is no relative motion between the (r) zero
block and plank, the work done by force of friction
acting on plank is some time interval
(C) If there is relative motion between the (q) negative
block and plank, then work done by friction force
acting on block plus work done by
friction acting on plank is
(D) If there is no relative motion between the (s) is equal to non mechanical
block and plank, then work done by energy produced
friction force acting on block plus work
done by friction acting on plank is
DPPS FILE # 87
Topics : Center of Mass, Circular Motion

1. A uniform disc of mass ‘m’ and radius R is placed on a smooth horizontal floor such that the plane surface of
the disc is in contact with the floor. A man of mass m/2 stands on the disc at its periphery. The man starts
walking along the periphery of the disc. The size of the man is negligible as compared to the size of the disc.
Then the centre of disc.
R 2R
(A) moves along a circle of radius (B) moves along a circle of radius
3 3
R
(C) moves along a circle of radius (D) does not move along a circle
2
2. For a two-body system in absence of external forces, the kinetic energy as measured from ground frame is
Ko and from center of mass frame is Kcm. Pick up the wrong statement
(A) The kinetic energy as measured from center of mass frame is least
(B) Only the portion of energy Kcm can be transformed from one form to another due to internal changes
in the system.
(C) The system always retains at least Ko – Kcm amount of kinetic energy as measured from ground
frame irrespective of any kind of internal changes in the system.
(D) The system always retains at least Kcm amount of kinetic energy as measured from ground frame
irrespective of any kind of internal changes in the system
3. A ball of mass m = 200 gm is suspended from a point A by an inextensible string of length L. Ball is
3
drawn to a side and held at same level as A but at a distance L from A as shown. Now the ball is
2
released. Then : (assume string applies only that much jerk which is required so that velocity along
string becomes zero).
(A) speed of ball just before experiencing jerk is gL

3gL
(B) speed of ball just after experiencing jerk is
2
gL
(C) Impulse applied by string
10
(D) ball will experience jerk after reaching to point B.
DPPS FILE # 88
4. Two blocks of mass m1 and m2 are connected with an ideal spring on a smooth horizontal surface as shown
in figure. At t = 0 m1 is at rest and m2 is moving with a velocity v towards right. At this time spring is in its
natural length. Prove that if m1 < m2 block of mass m2 will never come to rest.
v
m1 m2
5. The friction coefficient between the horizontal surface and each of the blocks shown in figure is 0.20.
The collision between the blocks is perfectly elastic. Find the separation between the two blocks (in
cm) when they come to rest. Take g = 10 m/s2.
1 m/s
2 kg 4 kg
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16 cm
COMPREHENSION
A ring of radius R is made of a thin wire of material of density  having cross section area a. The ring
rotates with angular velocity  about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to the plane.
If we consider a small element of the ring, it rotates in a circle. The required centripetal force is provided
by the component of tensions on the element towards the centre. A small element of length d  of
angular width d is shown in the figure.
6. The centripetal force acting on the element is

1
(A) (a. d 2R) (B) R2d2 (C) a d 2 R (D) zero
2
7. If T is the tension in the ring, then
aR 2 2
(A) T = (B) T = a  R22 (C) a2  2 (D) T = 2 a R22
2
8. If for a given mass of the ring and angular velocity, the radius R of the ring is increased to 2R, the new
tension will be
(A) T/2 (B) T (C) 2T (D) 4T
DPPS FILE # 89
Topic : Center of Mass


1. A glass ball collides with a smooth horizontal surface in xz plane with a velocity v  a î  bˆj . If the
coefficient of restitution of collision is e, then the velocity of the ball just after the impact will be :
(A) a î  b ĵ (B) a î  eb ĵ (C) a î  bĵ (D) a î  eb ĵ
2. As shown in the figure a body of mass m moving horizontally with

speed 3 m/s hits a fixed smooth wedge and goes up with a velocity
v f in the vertical direction. If  of wedge is 30º, the velocity v f will be:
(A) 3 m/s (B) 3 m/s
1
(C) m/s (D) this is not possible
3
3. A plank of mass m moving with a velocity ' v ' along a frictionless
horizontal track and a body of mass m/2 moving with 2 v collides with
plank elastically. Final speed of the plank is :
5v 3v 2v
3 3 3
COMPREHENSION
Two friends A and B (each weighing 40 kg) are sitting on a frictionless platform some distance d apart.
A rolls a ball of mass 4 kg on the platform towards B which B catches. Then B rolls the ball towards A
and A catches it. The ball keeps on moving back and forth between A and B. The ball has a fixed speed
of 5 m/s on the platform.
4. Find the speed of A after he rolls the ball for the first time
(A) 0.5 m/s (B) 5m/s (C) 1 m/s (D) None of these
5. Find the speed of A after he catches the ball for the first time.
10 50 10
(A) m/s (B) m/s (C) m/s (D) None of these
21 11 11
6. Find the speeds of A and B after the ball has made 5 round trips and is held by A :
10 50 50 10 50
(A) m/s , m/s (B) m/s, m/s (C) m/s, 5 m/s (D) None of these
11 11 11 11 11
7. How many times can A roll the ball ?

(A) 6 (B) 5 (C) 7 (D) None of these
8. Where is the centre of mass of the system “ A + B + ball” at the end of the nth trip? (Give the distance
from the initail position of A)
10 10 50
(A) d (B) d (C) d (D) None of these
11 21 11
DPPS FILE # 90
Topics : Work, Power and Energy, Center of Mass, Circular Motion

1. A stone of mass M is tied at the end of a string, is moving in a circle of radius R, with a constant
angular velocity . The total work done on the stone, in any half circle, is :
(A)  MR2 2 (B) 2 MR2 2 (C) MR2 2 (D) 0

2. A hollow sphere of mass ‘m’ and radius R rests on a smooth horizontal surface. A simple pendulum having
string of length R and bob of mass m hangs from top most point of the sphere as shown. A bullet of mass ‘m’
and velocity ‘v’ partially penetrates the left side of the sphere and stick to it. The velocity of the sphere just
after collision with bullet is.
v v 2v 3v
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 3 5
3. In the fig. shown a cart moves on a smooth horizontal surface due to an external constant force of
magnitude F. The initial mass of the cart is M 0 and velocity is zero. Sand falls on to the cart with
negligible velocity at constant rate  kg/s and sticks to the cart. The velocity of the cart at time t is :
Ft F t t Ft Ft
(A) (B) e (C) (D) e t
M0   t M0 M0 M0   t
4. Block ‘ A ‘ is hanging from a vertical spring and is at rest. Block ‘ B ‘ strikes

the block ‘A’ with velocity ‘ v ‘ and sticks to it. Then the value of ‘ v ‘ for
which the spring just attains natural length is:
60 m g2 6 m g2
(A) (B)
k k
10 m g2
k
DPPS FILE # 91
5. A strip of wood of mass M and length  is placed on a smooth horizontal surface. An insect of mass m
starts at one end of the strip and walks to the other end in time t , moving with a constant speed.

(A) the speed of insect as seen from the ground is <
t
  M 
(B) the speed of the strip as seen from the ground is  
t Mm
  M 
(C) the speed of the insect as seen from the ground is  
t Mm
2
1 
(D) the total kinetic energy of the system is (m + M)   .
2 t
6. Initial velocity and acceleration of a particle are as shown in the figure. Acceleration vector of particle remain
constant. Then radius of curvature of path of particle :
(A) is 9m initially
9
(B) is m initially
3
9
(C) will have minimum value of m
8
3
(D) will have minimum value m
8
7. STATEMENT-1 : A sphere of mass m moving with speed u undergoes a perfectly elastic head on collision
with another sphere of heavier mass M at rest (M > m), then direction of velocity of sphere of mass m is
reversed due to collision [no external force acts on system of two spheres]
STATEMENT-2 : During a collision of spheres of unequal masses, the heavier mass exerts more force on
lighter mass in comparison to the force which lighter mass exerts on heavier mass.
DPPS FILE # 92
Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Newton’s Law of Motion, Circular Motion, Center of Mass

Multiple choice objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.5 to Q.6 (4 marks 4 min.) [8, 8]
Subjective Questions ('–1' negative marking) Q.7 (4 marks 5 min.) [4, 5]
1. The moment of inertia of a door of mass m, length 2  and width  about its longer side is
11m 2 5m 2
(A) (B)
24 24
m 2
3
2. Two blocks of equal mass are ties with a light string which passes over a massless pulley as shown in
figure. The magnitude of acceleration of centre of mass of both the blocks is (neglect friction everywhere):
3 1
(A) g (B) ( 3  1) g
4 2
g  3  1
 
(C) (D)  g
2  2 
3. Three point masses are arranged as shown in the figure. Moment of inertia of the system about the
axis O O  is : (passing through its plane)
ma 2
(A) 2 m a2 (B)
2
(C) m a2 (D) none of these
DPPS FILE # 93
4. A section of fixed smooth circular track of radius R in vertical plane is shown in the figure. A block is released
from position A and leaves the track at B. The radius of curvature of its trajectory when it just leaves the track
at B is:
R R
(A) R (B) (C) (D) none of these
4 2
5. In the figure, the block B of mass m starts from rest at the top of a wedge W of mass M. All surfaces
are without friction. W can slide on the ground. B slides down onto the ground, moves along ground
with a speed , has an elastic collision with the wall, and climbs back onto W.
(A) B will reach the top of W again

(B) from the beginning, till the collision with the wall, the centre of mass of 'B + W' is stationary in horizontal
direction
2m 
(C) after the collision the centre of mass of 'B + W' moves with the velocity
mM
2m 
(D) when B reaches its highest position on W, the speed of W is
mM
6. In a free space a rifle of mass M shoots a bullet of mass m at a stationary block of mass M distance D
away from it. When the bullet has moved through a distance d towards the block the centre of mass of
the bullet-block system is at a distance of :
( D  d) m md  MD
(A) from the block (B) from the rifle
Mm Mm
2 d m  DM M
(C) from the rifle (D) (D  d) from the bullet
Mm Mm
7. A uniform circular chain of radius r and mass m rests over a sphere of radius R as shown in figure. Friction is
absent everywhere and system is in equilibrium. Find the tension in the chain.
DPPS FILE # 94
Topics : Friction, Center of Mass, Rigid Body Dynamics, Rotation

Single choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q .1 to Q.4 (3 marks, 3 min.) [12, 12]
Assertion and Reason (no negative marking) Q. 9 (3 marks, 3 min.) [3 , 3]
1. In the figure m A = m B = m C = 60 kg. The co-efficient of friction between C and ground is 0.5, B and
ground is 0.3, A & B is 0.4. C is pulling the string with the maximum possible force without moving.
Then tension in the string connected to A will be:
(A) 120 N (B) 60 N

(C) 100 N (D) zero
2. A particle of mass m is given initial speed u as shown in the figure. It move to the fixed inclined plane without
a jump, that is, its trajectory changes sharply from the horizontal line to the inclined line. All the surfaces are
smooth and 90    0. Then the height to which the particle shall rise on the inclined plane (assume the
length of the inclined plane to be very large)
(A) increases with increase in  (B) decreaseswith increase in 

(C) is independent of  (D) data insufficient
3. The moment of inertia of a thin sheet of mass M of the given shape about the specified axis is (axis and
sheet both are in same plane:)
7 5
(A) Ma2 (B) Ma2
12 12
1 1
(C) Ma2 (D) Ma2
3 12
DPPS FILE # 95
4. A man stands at one end of a boat which is stationary in water. Neglect water resistance. The man now
moves to the other end of the boat and again becomes stationary. The centre of mass of the 'man plus boat'
system will remain stationary with respect to water.
(A) in all cases
(B) only when the man is stationary initially and finally
(C) only if the man moves without acceleration on the boat
(D) only if the man and the boat have equal masses.
5. A uniform semicircular disc of mass ‘m’ and radius ‘R’ is shown in the figure. Find out its moment of inertia
about
(a) axis ‘AB’ (shown in the figure) which passes through geometrical centre and lies in the plane of the
disc
(b) axis ‘CD’ which passes through its centre of mass and it is perpendicular to the plane of the disc.
6. A massless ring hangs from a thread and two beads of m ass

m slide on it without friction . The beads are released simultaneously
from the top of the ring and slide down along opposite sides.Find
the angle from vertical at which the ring will start to rise.
7. Find out the moment of inertia of the following structure (written as ) about axis AB made of
thin uniform rods of mass per unit length .
8. A spherical cavity is formed from a solid sphere by removing mass from it.
The resultant configuration is shown in figure. Find out the moment of
inertia of this configuration about the axis through centre of the solid sphere
as shown. Take mass M (uniform) for the configuration and radius R for
solid sphere and radius R/2 for cavity.
9. STATEMENT-1 : Two spheres undergo a perfectly elastic collision. The kinetic energy of system of both
spheres is always constant. [There is no external force on system of both spheres].
STATEMENT-2 : If net external force on a system is zero, the velocity of centre of mass remains constant.
DPPS FILE # 96
Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Circular Motion

1. A uniform disc of radius R lies in the x-y plane, with its centre at origin. its moment of inertia about
z-axis is equal to its moment of inertia about line y = x + c. The value of c will be
R R R
(A)  (B) ± (C) (D) –R
2 2 4
2. A square plate of edge a/2 is cut out from a uniform square plate of edge 'a' as shown in figure. The
mass of the remaining portion is M. The moment of inertia of the shaded portion about an axis passing
through 'O' (centre of the square of side a) and perpendicular to plane of the plate is :
9 3 5 Ma 2
(A) Ma2 (B) 16 Ma2 (C) Ma2 (D)
64 12 6
3. Moment of inertia of uniform triangular plate about axis passing through sides AB, AC, BC are IP, IB & IH
respectively & about an axis perpendicular to the plane and passing through point C is IC. Then :
(A) IC > IP > IB > IH (B) IH > IB > IC > IP

(C) IP > IH > IB > IC (D) IH > IB = IC > IP
4. Moment of inertia of a uniform quarter disc of radius R and mass M about an axis through its centre of
mass and perpendicular to its plane is :
2 2
M R2  4R  M R2  4R 
(A) M   (B) M  2 
2  3  2  3  
2 2
M R2  4R  M R2  4R 
(C) +M   (D) +M  2 
2  3  2  3  
DPPS FILE # 97
5. A uniform horizontal beam of length L and mass M is attached to a wall by a pin connection. Its far end is
supported by a cable that makes an angle  with the horizontal. If a man of mass ‘m’ stands at a distance 
from the wall, find the tension in the cable in equilibrium.
COMPREHENSION
Two beads of mass 2m and m, connected by a rod of length  and of negligible mass are free to move in
a smooth vertical circular wire frame of radius  as shown. Initially the system is held in horizontal
position (Refer figure)
2m m

6. The velocity that should be given to mass 2m (when rod is in horizontal position) in counter-clockwise
direction so that the rod just becomes vertical is :
5g   3 3  1 3 5
 g  g g
(A) (B)  3  (C) (D)
3   2 2
7. The minimum velocity that should be given to the mass 2m in clockwise direction to make it vertical is:
5g  7g   3 3  1
 g 
(A) (B) (C)  3  (D) None of these
3 3  
8. If the rod is replaced by a massless string of length  and the system is released when the string is
horizontal then :
(A) Mass 2m will arrive earlier at the bottom.
(B) Mass m will arrive earlier at the bottom.
(C) Both the masses will arrive together but with different speeds.
(D) Both the masses will arrive together with same speeds.
DPPS FILE # 98
Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Work ,Power and Energy, Center of Mass, Friction

1. On a disc of radius R a concentric circle of radius R/2 is drawn.The

disc is free to rotate about a frictionless fixed axis through its center
and perpendicular to plane of the disc. All three forces (in plane of the
disc) shown in figure are exerted tangent to their respective circular
periphery. The magnitude of the net torque (about centre of disc) acting
on the disc is:
(A) 1.5 FR (B) 1.9 FR (C) 2.3 FR (D) 2.5 FR
2. A particle starts moving from rest from the origin & moves along positive x-direction. Its rate of change
of kinetic energy with time shown on y-axis varies with time t as shown in the graph. If position,
velocity, acceleration & kinetic energy of the particle at any time t are x, v, a & k respectively then
which of the option (s) may be correct ?
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3. Two identical rods are joined at one of their ends by a pin. Joint is smooth
and rods are free to rotate about the joint. Rods are released in vertical
plane on a smooth surface as shown in the figure. The displacement of the
joint from its initial position to the final position is (i.e. when the rods lie
straight on the ground)
L 17 5L
(A) (B) L (C) (D) none of these
4 4 2
4. Figure shows an ideal pulley block of mass m = 1 kg, resting on a rough
ground with friction coefficient µ = 1.5. Another block of mass M = 11 kg is
hanging as shown. When system is released it is found that the magnitude
of acceleration of point P on string is a. Find value of 4a in m/s2.
(Use g = 10 m/s2)
DPPS FILE # 99
5. In figure the uniform gate weighs 300 N and is 3 m wide & 2 m high. It is supported by a hinge at the
bottom left corner and a horizontal
cable at the top left corner, as shown. Find :
(a) the tension in the cable and
(b) the force that the hinge exerts on the gate (magnitude & direction).
COMPREHENSION
A ball is projected on a very long floor. There may be two conditions

(i) floor is smooth & (ii) the collision is elastic
If both are considered then the path of ball is as follows.
loop1 loop2 loop3 and so on
x x x
Now if collision is inelastic and surface is rough then the path is as follows.
loop1 loop2 loop3
Successive range is decreasing.

Roughness of surface decreases the horizontal component of ball during collision and inelastic nature of
collision decreases the vertical component of velocity of ball. In first case both components remain unchanged
in magnitude and in second case both the components of the velocity will change.
Let us consider a third case here surface is rough but the collision of ball with floor is elastic. A ball is
projected with speed u at an angle 30° with horizontal and it is known that after collision with the floor its
u
speed becomes . Then answer the following questions.
3
6. The angle made by the resultant velocity vector of the ball with horizontal after first collision with floor is :
(A) 30° (B) 60° (C) 90° (D) 45°
H 
7. The ratio of maximum height reached by ball in first loop and second loop  1  is :
 H2 
1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) 1 (D)
4 2 3
8. If the ball after first collision with the floor had rebounded vertically then the speed of the ball just after
the collision with the floor would have been :
3
(A) u (B) u/2 (C) u (D) None of these
2
DPPS FILE # 100

Topics : Center of Mass, Work, Power and Energy, Rigid Body Dynamics

Assertion and Reason (no negative marking) Q.7 to Q.9 (3 marks, 3 min.) [9 , 9]
1. A ball collides elastically with a massive wall moving towards it with a velocity of v as shown. The collision
occurs at a height of h above ground level and the velocity of the ball just before collision is 2v in horizontal
direction. The distance between the foot of the wall and the point on the ground where the ball lands, at the
instant the ball lands, will be :
2h 2h 2h 2h
(A) v g (B) 2v g (C) 3 v g (D) 4v g
2. A block attached to a spring, pulled by a constant horizontal force, is kept on a smooth surface as shown in
the figure. Initially, the spring is in the natural state. Then the maximum positive work that the applied force
F can do is : [Given that spring does not break]
F2 2F 2 F2
(A) (B) (C)  (D)
K K 2K
3. A planar object made up of a uniform square plate and four semicircular discs of the same thickness
and material is being acted upon by four forces of equal magnitude as shown in figure. The coordinates
of point of application of forces is given by
(A) (0, a) (B) (0, –a)

(C) (a, 0) (D) (–a, 0)
DPPS FILE # 101

4. The angular velocity of a rigid body about any point of that body is same:
(A) only in magnitude
(B) only in direction
(C) both in magnitude and direction necessarily
(D) both in magnitude and direction about some points, but not about all points.
5. On a smooth carrom board, a coin located at (4, 6) is moving in negative

ydirection with speed 3 m/s is being hit at that point by a striker
moving along negative x-axis. The line joining centre of the coin and
striker just before the collision is parallel to x-axis. After collision the
coin goes into the hole located at origin. Mass of the striker and the
coin is equal. Considering the collision to be elastic, find the velocity
(in vector form) of the striker before the collision and after the collision.
6. A uniform chain of mass m and length  hangs on a thread and

touches the surf ace of a table by its lower end. Find the force
exerted by the table on the chain when half of its length has fallen
on the table. The fallen part does not form heap.
COMPREHENSION
A smooth rope of mass m and length L lies in a heap on a smooth horizontal floor, with one end attached to
a block of mass M. The block is given a sudden kick and instantaneously acquires a horizontal velocity of
magnitude V0 as shown in figure 1. As the block moves to right pulling the rope from heap, the rope being
smooth, the heap remains at rest. At the instant block is at a distance x from point P as shown in figure-2
(P is a point on the rope which has just started to move at the given instant) , choose correct options for next
three question.
7. The speed of block of mass M is
mV0 MV0 m 2 V0 M2 V0
(A) m (B) m (C)
m
(D) m
(M  x ) (M  x ) M (M  x) m (M  x )
L L L L
8. The magnitude of acceleration of block of mass M is
m3 V02 mM2 V02 m4 V02 M2 V02

(A) (B) (C) (D)
L m L m ML m L m
(M  x )3 (M  x )3 (M  x )3 (M  x )3
L L L L
9. The tension in rope at point P is
mM2 V02 m 2M V02 m3 V02 M3 V02

(A) m (B) (C) (D)
L L m L m L m
(M  x )2 (M  x )2 (M  x )2 (M  x )2
L L L L
DPPS FILE # 102

Topics : Friction, Rigid Body Dynamics, Center of Mass

1. In which of the following cases the friction force between'A' and 'B' is maximum. In all cases
1=0.5,2 = 0.
g
2k
1
1 A 2kg A
Fixed
(A) B 3kg 10N (B)
2 B
37°
1 A 2kg
2 B
3kg
(C) (D)
C 1kg
2. A uniform stick of mass M is placed in a frictionless well as shown. The stick makes an angle  with
the horizontal. Then the force which the vertical wall exerts on right end of stick is :
Mg Mg
(A) (B)
2 cot  2 tan 
Mg Mg
(C) (D)
2 cos  2 sin 
3. Two small spheres of equal mass, and heading towards each other with equal speeds, undergo a head-
on collision (no external force acts on system of two spheres). Then which of the following statement
is correct?
(A) Their final velocities must be zero.
(B) Their final velocities may be zero.
(C) Each must have a final velocity equal to the other’s initial velocity.
(D) Their velocities must be reduced in magnitude
4. In the figure shown a uniform rod of mass ‘m’ and length ‘’ is hinged at one
end and the other end is connected to a light vertical spring of spring
constant ‘k’ as shown in figure. The spring has extension such that rod is
in equilibrium when it is horizontal. The rod can rotate about horizontal
axis passing through end ‘B’. Neglecting friction at the hinge find
a) extension in the spring (b) the force on the rod due to hinge.
DPPS FILE # 103

COMPREHENSION
Uniform rod AB is hinged at the end A in a horizontal position as shown in the figure (the hinge is frictionless,
that is, it does not exert any friction force on the rod). The other end of the rod is connected to a block through
a massless string as shown. The pulley is smooth and massless. Masses of the block and the rod are
same and are equal to ' m '.
5. Then just after release of block from this position, the tension in the thread is
mg 5 mg 11mg 3 mg
(A) (B) (C) (D)
8 8 8 8
6. Then just after release of block from this position, the angular acceleration of the rod is
g 5g 11g 3g
(A) 8  (B) (C) (D)
8 8 8
7. Then just after release of block from this position, the magnitude of reaction exerted by hinge on the rod is
3 mg 5 mg 9 mg 7 mg
(A) (B) (C) (D)
16 16 16 16
8. Four identical rods, each of mass m and length l are joined to form a rigid square frame. The frame lies in the
X-Y plane, with its centre at the origin and the sides parallel to the x and y axis. it’s moment of inertia about
 x
Column I Column II
(A) An axis parallel to z-axis (p) 5/3 m2
and passing through a corner
(B) One side (q) 2/3 m2
(C) The x-axis (r) 4/3 m2
(D) The z-axis (s) 10/3 m2
DPPS FILE # 104

Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Work, Power and Energy, Circular Motion, Center of Mass

Single choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.1 Q.2 (3 marks, 3 min.) [6, 6]
1. A uniform disc of mass m and radius r and a point mass m are arranged as shown in the figure. The
acceleration of point mass is: (Assume there is no slipping between pulley and thread and the disc can
rotate smoothly about a fixed horizontal axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane)
g g
(A) (B)
2 3
2g
3
2. Mass m is connected with an ideal spring of natural length whose other end is fixed on a smooth horizontal
table. Initially spring is in its natural length . Mass m is given a velocity ‘v’ perpendicular to the spring and
released. The velocity perpendicular to the spring when its length is  + x, will be
2 v 2v 2 
(A) (B)
x x
v
(C) (D) zero
x
3. A ball of mass m is attached to the lower end of a light vertical spring of force constant k. The upper end
of the spring is fixed. The ball is released from rest with the spring at its normal (unstretched) length,
and comes to rest again after descending through a distance x.
mg 2 mg
(A) x = (B) x =
k k
x
(C) the ball will have no acceleration at the position where it has descended through
2
(D) the ball will have an upward acceleration equal to g at its lowermost position.
DPPS FILE # 105

4. A rod AB is moving on a fixed circle of radius R with constant velocity ‘v’ as shown in figure. P is the point of
3R
intersection of the rod and the circle. At an instant the rod is at a distance x = from centre of the circle.
5
The velocity of the rod is perpendicular to the rod and the rod is always parallel to the diameter CD.
(a) Find the speed of point of intersection P.

(b) Find the angular speed of point of intersection
P with respect to centre of the circle.
5. A uniform beam of length L and mass ‘m’ is supported as shown. If the

cable suddenly breaks, determine; immediately after the release.
(a) the acceleration of end B.
(b) the reaction at the pin support.
COMPREHENSION
A smooth ball 'A' moving with velocity 'V' collides with another smooth identical ball at rest. After
collision both the balls move with same speed with angle between their velocities 60°. No external force
acts on the system of balls.
6. The speed of each ball after the collision is
V V V 2V
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 3 3
7. If the kinetic energy lost is fully converted to heat then heat produced is
1 2 1
(A) mV2 (B) mV2 (C) 0 (D) mV 2
3 3 6
8. The value of coefficient of restitution is

1 1
(A) 1 (B) (C) (D) 0
3 3
DPPS FILE # 106

Topics : Center of Mass, Newton’s law of Motion, Relative Motion, Rigid Body Dynamics, Friction

1. A compound sphere is made by joining a hemispherical shell and a solid hemisphere of same radius R and
same mass as shown in figure. This system is kept between two smooth parallel walls and a smooth floor
with the hollow hemisphere on the top as shown in figure. The maximum angular velocity of the compound
sphere when the system is slightly disturbed is (all surfaces are smooth)
15g 15g 15g 15g

(A) (B) (C) (D)
64R 32R 16R 8R
2. A particle is placed at the origin of the coordinate system. Two forces of magnitude 20 N & 10 N act on it as
shown in figure. It is found that it starts moving towards the point (1,1). The net unknown force acting on the
particle at this position can be :
(A) 15 2 at angle 45º with positive x axis (B) 5 2 at angle 135º with positive x axis
(C) 5 2 at angle -45º with positive x axis (D) None of these
3. A railway compartment is 16 m long, 2.4 m wide and 3.2 m high. It is moving with a velocity V. A particle
moving horizontally with a speed u, perpendicular to the direction of V , enters through a hole at an
upper corner A and strikes the diagonally opposite corner B. Assume g = 10 m/s2.
(A)  = 20 m/s
(B) u = 3 m/s
(C) to an observer inside the compartment , the path of the particle is a parabola
(D) to a stationary observer outside the compartment , the path of the particle is a parabola
DPPS FILE # 107

4. In the figure (i) a disc of mass M (kg) and radius R (m) is rotating smoothly about a fixed vertical axis AB
R
with angular speed 26 rad/s. A rod CD of length (m) and mass M (kg) is hinged at one end at point ‘D’ on
2
the disc. The rod remains in vertical position and rotates along with the disc about axis AB. At some
moment the rod CD gets a very small impulse at point ‘C’ due to air due to which the rod falls on the disc
along one radius and sticks to the disc as shown in figure (ii). Now find the angular velocity of the disc in
rad/s.
5. Block B of mass 2 kg rests on block A of mass 10 kg. All surfaces are rough with the value of coefficient of
friction as shown in the figure. Find the minimum force F that should be applied on block A to cause relative
motion between A and B. (g = 10 m/s2)
COMPREHENSION
A horizontal uniform rod of mass 'm' has its left end hinged to the fixed incline plane, while its right end rests on
the top of a uniform cylinder of mass 'm' which in turn is at rest on the fixed inclined plane as shown. The
coefficient of friction between the cylinder and rod, and between the cylinder and inclined plane, is sufficient to
keep the cylinder at rest.

mg mg mg 2 mg
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 3 2 3
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 3 (C) 2 : 1 (D) 2 :1
3 mg 5 mg
(A) mg (B) (C) 2mg (D)
2 4
DPPS FILE # 108

Topic : Rigid Body Dynamics

1. A bar of mass M and length L is in pure translatory motion with its centre of mass velocity V. It collides with
and sticks to a second identical bar which is initially at rest. (Assume that it becomes one composite bar of
length 2L). The angular velocity of the composite bar will be
3 V 4 V
(A) clockwise (B) clockwise
4 L 3 L
3 V V
(C) counterclockwise (D) counterclockwise
4 L L
2. A smooth tube of certain mass is rotated in gravity free space. The two balls shown in the figure move
towards ends of the tube. For the whole system which of the following quantity is not conserved.
(A) Angular momentum (B) Linear momentum

(C) Kinetic energy (D) Angular speed
3. A uniform disc of mass M and radius R is released from the shown position. PQ is a string, OP is a
horizontal line, O is the centre of the disc and distance OP is R/2. Then tension in the string just after the
disc is released will be:
Mg Mg 2Mg
2 3 3
DPPS FILE # 109

(B) A rigid body rolls up an inclined plane without sliding. The friction force on it will be upwards.
(C) A rigid body rolls down an inclined plane without sliding. The friction force on it will be upwards.
(D) A rigid body is left from rest and having no angular velocity from the top of a rough inclined plane. It
moves down the plane with slipping. The friction force on it will be upwards.
5. Find the acceleration of solid right circular roller A, weighing 12 kg when it is being pulled by another
weight B (6 kg) along the horizontal plane as in figure (pulley is massless). The weight B is attached to
the end of a string wound around the circumference of roller. Assume there is no slipping of the roller
and the string is inextensible.
COMPREHENSION
A small ball (uniform solid sphere) of mass m is released from the top of a wedge of the same mass m.
The wedge is free to move on a smooth horizontal surface. The ball rolls without sliding on the wedge.
The required height of the wedge are mentioned in the figure.
h
P
m
h
Q
6. The speed of the wedge when the ball is just going to leave the wedge at point 'P' of the wedge is
5gh 5gh
(A) (B) gh (C) (D) None of these
9 6
7. The total kinetic energy of the ball just before it falls on the ground
13
(A) 2 mgh (B) mgh (C) mgh (D) None of these
18
8. The horizontal separation between the ball and the edge 'PQ' of wedge just before the ball falls on
the ground is
3 10 2 10
(A) h (B) h (C) 2 h (D) None of these
2 3
DPPS FILE # 110

Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Center of Mass

Single choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.1 Q.2 (3 marks, 3 min.) [6, 6]
1. A ring and a disc of same mass m and same radius R are joined concentrically. This system is placed
on a smooth plane with the common axis parallel to the plane as shown in figure. A horizontal force F
is applied on the system at a point which is at a distance x from the centre. The value of x so that it
starts pure rolling is
Ring,m F
x 90º
Disc,m
R
smooth
R 3R
(A) (B)
2 4
(C) R (D) Pure rolling is not possible as the floor is smooth.
2. A particle of mass m is moving along the x-axis with speed v when it collides with a particle of mass 2m
initially at rest. After the collision, the first particle has come to rest, and the second particle has split
into two equal-mass pieces that are shown in the figure. Which of the following statements correctly
describes the speeds of the two pieces
? ( > 0)
(A) Each piece moves with speed v.

(B) Each piece moves with speed v/2.
(C) One of the pieces moves with speed v/2, the other moves with speed greater than v/2
(D) Each piece moves with speed greater than v/2.
3. A thin uniform rod AB is sliding between two fixed right angled surfaces. At some instant its angular velocity
is . If Ix represent moment of inertia of the rod about an axis perpendicular to the plane and passing through
the point X (A, B, C or D), the kinetic enegy of the rod is
1 1
(A)  A 2 (B)  B2
2 2
1 1
(C)  C 2 (D)  D 2
2 2
DPPS FILE # 111

4. A solid sphere of mass m and radius r is given an initial angular velocity 0 and a linear velocity v 0 = 
r 0 from a point A on a rough horizontal surface. It is observed that the ball turns back and returns to
the point A after some time if  is less than a certain maximum value 0. Find 0.
COMPREHENSION
A wheel is released on a rough horizontal floor after imparting it an initial horizontal velocity v 0 and
angular velocity 0 as shown in the figure below. Point O is the centre of mass of the wheel and point P
is its instantaneous point of contact with the ground. The radius of wheel is r and its radius of gyration
about O is k. Coefficient of friction between wheel and ground is . A is a fixed point on the ground.
5. Which of the following is conserved ?

(A) linear momentum of wheel
(B) Angular momentum of wheel about O
(C) Angular momentum of wheel about A
(D) none of these
6. If the wheel comes to permanent rest after sometime, then :
0 k 2 0 r 2  k2 
(A) v 0 = 0r (B) v 0 = (C) v 0 = (D) V0 = 0  r  

r R  r 
7. In above question, distance travelled by centre of mass of the wheel before it stops is -
v02  2  2
v 02  k2 
1  r  v0 1  
(A) 2g  2 (B) (C) 2g   (D) None of these
 k  2g  r2 
DPPS FILE # 112

Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Center of Mass, Rotation

1. There are four arrangements of a solid cylinder and a plank as shown in the figures. Some surfaces are
smooth and some are rough as indicated. There is no slipping at each rough surface. The plank and/or centre
of cylinder are given a horizontal constant velocity as shown in each of the situations. Using this information
fill in the blanks.
plank V
rough
C
(i) smooth The speed of center of mass of the cylinder is ___________.
plank
V
C rough
(ii) The angular velocity of the cylinder is __________.
V
plank
(iii) C rough The speed of center of mass of the cylinder is _________ .

plank V
(iv) The angular velocity of the cylinder is ___________ .
(a) V
(b) V/R
(c) 2V/R
(d) 4V/R
(e) cannot be determined from the given information
(f) Zero.
(A) (i) d (ii) b (iii) f (iv) c (B) (i) e (ii) b (iii) f (iv) b (C) (i) e (ii) d (iii) f (iv) c
(D) (i) e (ii) b (iii) f (iv) a (E) (i) e (ii) b (iii) f (iv) d
2. A student throws a horizontal stick of length L up into the air. At the moment it leaves her hand the
speed of stick's closest end is zero . The stick completes N turns just as it is caught by the student at
the initial release point . Find the height h to which the centre of mass of the rod rises .
DPPS FILE # 113

COMPREHENSION
In figure, a block A of mass 2kg is moving to the right with a speed 5m/s on a horizontal frictionless surface.
Another block B of mass 3 kg with a massless spring of spring constant 222 N/m attached to it, is moving to
the left on the same surface and with a speed 2 m/s. Let us take the direction to the right as the positive X–
direction. At some instant, block A collides with the spring attached to block B. At some other instant, the
spring has maximum compression and then, finally, the blocks move with their final velocities. Assuming that
(i) the spring force is conservative and so there is no conversion of kinetic energy to internal energy and (ii) no
sound is made when block A hits the spring, answer the following questions.
3. Velocity of centre of mass of the system of blocks A and B, before collision is :

(A) zero (B)  0.6 î m/s (C)  0.8 î m/s (D) 1.4 î m/s
4. In the collision process, while the spring is getting compressed :

(A) both linear momentum and kinetic energy are conserved
(B) both linear momentum and mechanical energy are conserved
(C) linear momentum is conserved but mechanical energy is not conserved
(D) Neither the linear momentum nor the mechanical energy remain conserved
5. Final velocity of block A will be :

(A) 2.5 î m/s (B)  1.8 î m/s (C) 3.6 î m/s (D)  3.4 î m/s
6. Final velocity of centre of mass of the system of blocks A and B will be :

(A) zero (B) 0.6 î m/s (C) 0.8 î m/s (D)  1.4 î m/s
7. When the blocks are yet to attain their final velocities, in this situation at any instant when block A is moving
with a velocity 4 î m/s , velocity of block B will then be :
(A)  1.33 î m/s (B)  2.67 î m/s (C) 1.67 î m/s (D) 3.77 î m/s
8. In previous question, at the given instant, compression of the spring is nearly :

(A) 16 cm (B) 24 cm (C) 33 cm (D) 52 cm
9. Maximum compression of the spring in the collision will be nearly

(A) 30 cm (B) 50 cm (C) 72 cm (D) 36 cm
10. STATEMENT-1 : The net momentum of a system of two moving particles is zero. Then at a particular
instant of time, the net angular momentum of system of given two particle is same about any point.
STATEMENT-2 : If net momentum of a system of two moving particle is zero, then angular momentum of
system of given two particles is zero about any point.
DPPS FILE # 114

Topics : Work, Power and Energy, Rigid Body Dynamics, Center of Mass
1. A body of mass m released from a height h on a smooth inclined plane that is shown in the figure. The
following can be true about the velocity of the block knowing that the wedge is fixed.
(A) v is highest when it just touches the spring

(B) v is highest when it compresses the spring by some amount
(C) v is highest when the spring comes back to natural position
(D) none of these
2. A man pulls a solid cylinder (initially at rest) horizontally by a massless string. The string is wrapped on the
cylinder and the cylinder performs pure rolling. Mass of the cylinder is 100 kg, radius is  metre & tension in
string is 100 N. Then the angular speed of the cylinder after one revolution will be :
4
(A) 4 rad /sec (B) rad/ sec
3
4
(C) rad/ sec (D) none of these
3
3. A uniform pole of length L and mass M is pivoted on the ground with a frictionless hinge O. The pole is
free to rotate without friction about an horizontal axis passing through O and normal to plane of the
page.The pole makes an angle  with the horizontal. The pole is released from rest in the position
shown, then linear acceleration of the free end (P) of the pole just after its release would be :
2 2
(A) g cos (B) g
3 3
3
(C) g (D) g cos
2
DPPS FILE # 115

4. Two blocks A (5kg) and B(5kg) attached to the ends of a spring constant 1000 N/m are placed on a smooth
horizontal plane with the spring undef ormed. Simultaneously v elocities of 10m/s and
4 m/s along the line of the spring in the same direction are imparted to A and B then
10 4
k = 1000 N/m
5kg 5kg
(A) when the extension of the spring is maximum the velocities of A and B are same.
(B) the maximum extension of the spring is 30cm.
(C) the first maximum compression occurs /56 seconds after start.
(D) maximum compression and maximum extension occur alternately.
5. A rod AC of length  and mass m is kept on a horizontal smooth plane. It is free to rotate and move. A
particle of same mass m moving on the plane with velocity v strikes rod at point B making angle 37 0
with the rod. The collision is elastic. After collision :
B /4
A 37° C
V
72 v
(A) The angular velocity of the rod will be
55 

(B) The centre of the rod will travel a distance in the time in which it makes half rotation
3
24 mV
(C) Impulse of the impact force is
55
(D) None of these
6. A block of dimensions a  a  2a is kept on an inclined plane of inclination 37º. The longer side is
perpendicular to the plane. The co-efficient of friction between the block and the plane is 0.8. By
numerical analysis find whether the block will topple or not.
7. Two separate cylinders of masses m (= 1 kg) & 4 m & radii R (= 10 cm) and 2 R rotating in clockwise
direction with 1 = 100 rad/sec. and2 = 200 rad/sec respectively. Now they are held in contact with
each other as in figure. Determine their angular velocities after the slipping between the cylinders
stops.
DPPS FILE # 116

Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Center of Mass, Circular Motion

1. A uniform disk of mass 300kg is rotating freely about a vertical axis through its centre with constant angular
velocity . A boy of mass 30kg starts from the centre and moves along a radius to the edge of the disk. The
angular velocity of the disk now is
0 0 40 5 0
(A) (B) (C) (D)
6 5 5 6
2. Two masses ‘ m ’ and ‘ 2 m ’ are placed in fixed horizontal circular smooth hollow tube as shown. The mass
‘ m ’ is moving with speed ‘u’ and the mass ‘ 2 m ’ is stationary. After their first collision, the time elapsed for
next collision. (coefficient of restitution e = 1/2)
2r 4r
(A) (B)
u u
3r 12r
(C) (D)
u u
3. A solid homogeneous cylinder of height h and base radius r is kept vertically on a conveyer belt moving
horizontally with an increasing velocity v = a + bt 2. If the cylinder is not allowed to slip then the time
when the cylinder is about to topple, will be equal to
rg 2 rg 2 bg rg
(A) (B) (C) (D) 2 bh
bh bh rh
4. Figure shows a smooth track which consists of a straight inclined part of length  joining smoothly with the
circular part. A particle of mass m is projected up the inlcine from its bottom. (a) Find the minimum projection
- speed v 0 for which the particle reaches the top of the track. (b) Assuming that the projection - speed is 2v 0
and that the block does not lose contact with the track before reaching its top, find the force acting on it when
it reaches the top. (c) Assuming that the projection-speed is only slightly greater than v 0, where will the block
lose contact with the track?
DPPS FILE # 117

5. Wheel A of radius rA = 10cm is coupled by a belt C to another wheel of radius rB = 25 cm as in the figure.
The wheels are free to rotate and the belt does not slip. At time t = 0 wheel A increases it’s angular
speed from rest at a uniform rate of  /2 rad/sec2. Find the time in which wheel B attains a speed of 100
rpm [Hint: vA = vB]
COMPREHENSION
A smooth horizontal fixed pipe is bent in the form of a vertical circle of radius 20 m as shown in figure. A small
glass ball is thrown in horizontal portion of pipe at speed 30 m/s as shown from end A. (Take g = 10 m/s2)
6. Which of the following statement is/are correct :

(i) ball will not come out from end B.
(ii) ball will come out from end B.
(iii) At point D speed of ball will be just more than zero.
(iv) At point E and C the ball will have same speed.
(A) only (i) (B) (ii) and (iv) (C) (ii), (iii) and (iv) (D) only (ii)
7. At which angle from vertical from bottom most point F. The normal reaction on ball due to pipe will change its
direction (in terms of radially outwards and inwards) :
 2  5
(A)  = 180º (B)  = cos–1   3  (C)  = cos–1   6  (D) None of these
   
8. With what speed ball will come out from point B :
(A) 30 m/s (B) 20 2 m/s (C) 10 5 m/s (D) None of these
DPPS FILE # 118

Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Simple Harmonic Motion

1. A uniform rod AB of mass m and length l at rest on a smooth horizontal
surface. An impulse P is applied to the end B. The time taken by the rod to
turn through a
right angle is:
2ml m l ml 2ml
(A) (B) (C) (D)
P 3P 12P 3P
2. As shown in the figure, a disc of mass m is rolling without
slipping a angular velocity . When it crosses point B disc will
be in:
(A) translational motion only
(B) pure rolling motion
(C) rotational motion only
(D) none of these
3. A uniform circular disc placed on a horizontal rough surface has initially a velocity v 0 and an angular
velocity 0 as shown in the figure. The disc comes to rest after moving some distance in the direction
of motion. Then v 0/0 is:
(A) r/2 (B) r (C) 3 r/2 (D) 2
d2 x
4. The equation of motion of a particle of mass 1 gm is + 2x = 0 where x is displacement (in m) from mean
dt 2
position. The frequency of oscillation is (in Hz):
1
1
(A) (B) 2 (C) 5 10 (D) 5 10
2
5. A man of mass 60 kg standing on a platform executing S.H.M. in the vertical plane. The displacement from
the mean position varies as y = 0.5 sin (2 ft). The value of f, for which the man will feel weightlessness at the
highest point is: (y is in metres)
g 2g
(A) (B) 4 g (C) (D) 2 2g
4 2
6. A particle executes SHM in a straight line. In the first second starting from rest it travels a distance ‘a’ and in
the next second a distance 'b' in the same direction. The amplitude of S.H.M will be
2a 2
(A) (B) a  b (C) 2a  b (D) a / b
3a  b
7. A particle performing S.H.M. undergoes displacement of A/2 (where A = amplitude of S.H.M.) in one second.
At t = 0 the particle was located at either extreme position or mean position. The time period of S.H.M. can
be : (consider all possible cases)
(A) 12s (B) 2.4 (C) 6s (D) 1.2s
DPPS FILE # 119

Topics : Friction, Rigid Body Dynamics, Work, Power and Energy, Simple Harmonic Motion
1. In given diagram what is the minimum value of a horizontal external

force F on Block 'A' so that block 'B' will slide on ground is:
(A) 30 N (B) 20 N
(C) 10 N (D) Not possible
2. A ring of radius R rolls without slipping on a rough horizontal surface with a constant velocity. The radius
of curvature of the path followed by any particle of the ring at the highest point of its path will be :
(A) (B) 2 R (C) 4 R (D) none of these

3. A particle is moving along x  axis has potential energy U = (2  20x + 5 x2) Joules.
The particle is released at x =  3. The maximum value of ' x ' will be:
[ x is in meters and U is in joules ]
(A) 5 m (B) 3 m (C) 7 m (D) 8 m
4. The potential energy of a particle executing SHM changes from maximum to minimum in 5 s. Then the time
period of SHM is :
(A) 5 s (B) 10 s (C) 15 s (D) 20 s
3
5. A particle performs S.H.M. of amplitude A along a straight line. When it is at a distance A from
2
mean position, its kinetic energy gets increased by an amount 1/2 m 2 A2 due to an impulsive force.
Then its new amplitude becomes:
5 3
(A) A (B) A (C) 2 A (D) 5 A
2 2
6. The amplitude of a particle executing SHM about O is 10 cm. Then:
(A) when the K.E. is 0.64 of its maximum K.E. its displacement is 6 cm from O.
(B) when the displacement is 5 cm from O its K.E. is 0.75 times its maximum K.E.
(C) Its total energy of SHM at any point is equal to its maximum K.E.
(D) Its speed is half the maximum speed when its displacement is half the maximum displacement.
7. A block of mass m collides with another block of mass 3m completely inelastically as shown in figure. What
is the maximum value of v (in m/s) for which the block B does not move. Assume that initially spring is in
natural length and blocks A and B are at rest. (K/m = 100 S.I. unit)
m v 3m K m
C A B
µ=1
smooth smooth
8. A particle performs SHM of time period T, along a straight line. Find the minimum time interval to go from
position A to position B. At A both potential energy and kinetic energy are same and at B the speed is half of
the maximum speed.
DPPS FILE # 120

Topics : Center of Mass, Work, Power and Energy, Rigid Body Dynamic, Rotation, Simple Harmonic Motion

1. A continuous stream of particles of mass m and velocity v, is emitted from a source at a rate of n per
second. The particles travel along a straight line, collide with a body of mass M and are buried in this
body. If the mass M was originally at rest, its velocity when it has received N particles will be:
mvn mvN mv Nm  M
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Nm  n Nm  M Nm  M mv
2. A particle is moving along x  axis has potential energy U = (2  20x + 5 x2) Joules.
The particle is released at x =  3. The maximum value of ' x ' will be: [ x is in meters and U is in joules ]
(A) 5 m (B) 3 m (C) 7 m (D) 8 m
3. Four point mass, each of mass m are connected at a corner of a square of y
A
side 'a' , by massless rods as shown in the figure. x and y axis are in the
m m
plane of the system and z axis is perpendicular to the plane and passing
through the centre of the square.
(A) Moment of inertia of the system about x axis is x = ma2 z a
(B) Moment of inertia of the system about y axis is y = ma2 x
(C) Moment of inertia of the system about the diagonal axis AA' is AA' = ma2
(D) Moment of inertia of the system about z axis is z = ma2 m m
A'
4. The amplitude of a particle executing SHM about O is 10 cm. Then:
(A) when the K.E. is 0.64 of its maximum K.E. its displacement is 6 cm from O.
(B) when the displacement is 5 cm from O its K.E. is 0.75 times its maximum K.E.
(C) Its total energy of SHM at any point is equal to its maximum K.E.
(D) Its speed is half the maximum speed when its displacement is half the maximum displacement.
COMPREHENSION
A block of mass m slides down a wedge of mass M as shown. The
whole system is at rest, when the height of the block is h above
the ground. The wedge surface is smooth and gradually flattens.
There is no friction between wedge and ground.
5. As the block slides down, which of the following quantities associated with the system remains conserved?
(A) Total linear momentum of the system of wedge and block
(B) Total mechanical energy of the complete system
(C) Total kinetic energy of the system
(D) Both linear momentum as well as mechanical energy of the system
6. If there would have been friction between wedge and block, which of the following quantities would still remain
conserved ?
(A) Linear momentum of the system along horizontal direction
(B) Linear momentum of the system along vertical direction
(C) Linear momentum of the system along a tangent to the curved surface of the wedge
(D) Mechanical energy of the system
7. If there is no friction any where, the speed of the wedge, as the block leaves the wedge is :
2gh 2gh m M
(A) m (B) M (C) ( 2gh ) (D) ( 2gh )
(M  m) M (M  m) m Mm Mm
DPPS FILE # 121

Topics : Simple Harmonic Motion, Work, Power and Energy, Center of Mass, Circular Motion
True or False (no negative marking) Q.2 (2 marks, 2 min.) [2, 2]
3
1. A particle performs S.H.M. of amplitude A along a straight line. When it is at a distance A from
2
1
mean position, its kinetic energy gets increased by an amount m 2 A2 due to an impulsive force.
2
Then its new amplitude becomes:
5 3
(A) A (B) A (C) 2 A (D) 5 A
2 2
2. S1 : If the internal forces within a system are conservative, then the work done by the external
forces on the system is equal to the change in mechanical energy of the system.
S2 : The potential energy of a particle moving along x-axis in a conservative force field is
U = 2x 2 – 5x + 1 in S.I. units. No other forces are acting on it. It has a stable equilibrium
position at one point on x-axis.
S3 : Internal forces can perform net work on a rigid body.
S4 : Internal forces can perform net work on a non–rigid body.
(A) T T F T (B) T F F T (C) F F T T (D) F T F T
3. Two particles A and B having equal mass are interconnected by a light

inextensible string that passes over a smooth pulley. One of the masses is
pulled downward by a constant force ‘F’ as shown in diagram, then find the
acceleration of the centre of mass of the system (A + B).
4. A particle performs SHM of time period T, along a straight line. Find the minimum time interval to go from
position A to position B. At A both potential energy and kinetic energy are same and at B the speed is half of
the maximum speed.
COMPREHENSION
One end of a light string of length L is connected to a ball and the other
end is connected to a fixed point O. The ball is released from rest at
t = 0 with string horizontal and just taut. The ball then moves in vertical
circular path as shown.The time taken by ball to go from position A to
B is t 1 and from Bto lowest position C is t 2. Let the velocity of ball at B
is v B and at C is v C respectively..
 
5. If | v C| = 2| v B| then the value of  as shown is
1 1 1 1
(A) cos-1 (B) sin-1 (C) cos-1 (D) sin-1
4 4 2 2
 
6. If | v C| = 2| v B| then :
(A) t 1 > t 2 (B) t 1 < t 2 (C) t 1 = t 2 (D) Information insufficient
  
7. If | v C– v B | = | v B|, then the value of  as shown is :
1/ 3 1/ 3 1/ 3 1/ 3
 1  1  1  1
(A) cos  
-1
(B) sin  
-1
(C) cos  
-1
(D) sin  -1
4 4  2 2
DPPS FILE # 122

Topics : Newton’s law of Motion, Simple Harmonic Motion, Rigid Body Dynamics, Work Power and
Energy, Projectile Motion

1. A man stands on a weighing machine kept inside a lift. Initially the lift is ascending with the acceleration ‘a’
due to which the reading is W. Now the lift decends with the same accleration and reading is 10 % of initial.
Find the acceleration of lift ?
g 9g
(A) m/sec2 (B) m/sec2
19 11
(C) 0 m/sec2 (D) g m/sec2
2. A horizontal spring–block system of mass 2kg executes S.H.M. When the block is passing through its
equilibrium position, an object of mass 1kg is put gently on it and the two move together. The new amplitude
of vibration is (A being its initial amplitude):
2 3 A
(A) A (B) A (C) 2A (D)
3 2 2
3. A solid ball of mass 'm' is released on a rough fixed inclined plane from height H. The ball will perform pure
rolling on the inclined plane. Then
Rough
(A) Kinetic energy of the ball at O will be less than mgH.

5 mgH
(B) Translational kinetic energy of the ball at O will be
7
2 mgH
(C) Rotational kinetic energy of the ball at O will be
7
(D) Angular momentum of the ball will be conserved about a point on the inclined plane.
DPPS FILE # 123

4. A particle of mass 1 kg moves from rest along a straight line due to action of a force F which varies with the
1
displacement x as shown in graph - (Use = 0.7 if needed)
2
(A) maximum K.E. of particle is 25 J

(B) Total work done by force on particle up to x = 6m is – 5J
(C) There will be no power delivered by the particle at x = 3, 5.3 and 6 m
(D) None of these
5. A particle is projected from ground with an initial velocity 20 m/sec making an angle 60° with horizontal. If R1
and R2 are radius of curvatures of the particle at point of projection and highest point respectively, then find
R1
the value of R
2
6. A block of mass m1 = 1 kg is attached to a spring of force constant k = 24 N/cm at one end and attached to
a string tensioned by mass m2 = 5 kg. Deduce the frequency of oscillations of the system. If m2 is initially
supported in hand and then suddenly released, find
(a) instantaneous tension just after m2 is released.

(b) the maximum displacement of m1.
(c) the maximum and minimum tensions in the string during oscillations.
7. A mass M is in static equilibrium on a massless vertical spring as shown in the figure. A ball of mass m
dropped from certain height sticks to the mass m after colliding with it. The oscillations they perform reach
to height 'a' above the original level of spring & depth 'b' below it.
(a) Find the force constant of the spring.

(b) Find the oscillation frequency.
(c) What is the height above the initial level from which the mass m was dropped ?
DPPS FILE # 124

Topic : Circular Motion, Center Of Mass, Rotation, Simple Harmonic Motion

1. A ring of mass m and radius R rolls on a horizontal rough surface without slipping due to an applied
force ‘F’. The friction force acting on ring is : –
F 2F
(A) (B)
3 3
F
(C) (D) Zero
4
2. A simple pendulum 50 cm long is suspended from the roof of a cart accelerating in the horizontal direction
with constant acceleration 3 g m/s2. The period of small oscillations of the pendulum about its equilibrium
position is(g = 2 m/s2) :
(A) 1.0 sec (B) 2 sec
(C) 1.53 sec (D) 1.68 sec
3. If the length of a simple pendulum is doubled then the % change in the time period is :
(A) 50 (B) 41.4 (C) 25 (D) 100
4. A disc is hinged such that it can freely rotate in a vertical plane about a point on its radius. If radius of disc is
'R', then what will be minimum time period of its simple harmonic motion?
R 3R 2R R
(A) 2 g (B) 2 2g (C) 2 (D) 2 2g
g
5. A 25 kg uniform solid sphere with a 20 cm radius is suspended by a vertical wire such that the point of
suspension is vertically above the centre of the sphere. A torque of 0.10 N-m is required to rotate the
sphere through an angle of 1.0 rad and then maintain the orientation. If the sphere is then released, its
time period of the oscillation will be :
(A)  second (B) 2  second (C) 2 second (D) 4 second
COMPREHENSION
Four identical uniform rods of mass M = 6kg each are welded at their ends
to form square and then welded to a uniform ring having mass m = 4kg &
radius R = 1 m. The system is allowed to roll down the incline of inclination
 =300.
6. The moment of inertia of system about the axis of ring will be -
(A) 20 kg m2 (B) 40 kg m2 (C) 10 kg m2 (D) 60 kg m2.
7. The acceleration of centre of mass of system is -

g g 7g g
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 4 24 8
8. The minimum value of coefficient of friction to prevent slipping is -
5 5 5 3 7
(A) (B) (C) (D)
7 12 3 7 5 3
DPPS FILE # 125

Topics : Simple Harmonic Motion, Newton’s Law of Motion, Work, Power and Energy
1. The resultant amplitude due to super position of x 1 = sin  t, x 2 = 5 sin ( t + 37º) and x 3 =  15 cos
 t is:
2. A 20 gm particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions
x1 = 2 sin 10 t,

x2 = 4 sin (10 t + ). where x1 & x2 are in metre & t is in sec.
3
(A) The displacement of the particle at t = 0 will be 2 3 m.
(B) Maximum speed of the particle will be 20 7 m/s.
(C) Magnitude of maximum acceleration of the particle will be 200 7 m/s2.
(D) Energy of the resultant motion will be 28 J.
3. A particle moves in xy plane according to the law x = a sinwt and y = a(1-coswt) where a and w are
constants. The particle traces
(A) a parabola (B) a straight line equally inclined to x and y axes
(C) a circle (D) a distance proportional to time.
4. Out of the statements given, which is/are correct ?
(A) The amplitude of a resultant simple harmonic motion obtained by superposition of two simple harmonic
motions along the same direction can be less than lesser of the amplitudes of the participating SHMs.
(B) When two simple harmonic motions which are in phase and in perpendicular directions superpose then
resulting motion will be SHM with same phase.
(C) When two simple harmonic motions (with amplitudes A1 and A2) which are out of phase (that means
phase difference ) and in perpendicular directions, superpose then resulting motion will be SHM with
amplitude A 12  A 22 .
(D) The combination of two simple harmonic motions of equal amplitude in perpendicular directions differing
in phase by /2 rad is a circular motion.
5. If the acceleration of the block B in the following system is a (in m/s2) then find out value of 2a/5 (g = 10
m/s2) :
COMPREHENSION
The velocity of a block of mass 2 kg moving along x-axis at any time t is given by v = 20 – 10t (m/s)
where t is in seconds and v is in m/s. At time t = 0, the block is moving in positive x-direction.
6. The work done by net force on the block starting from t = 0 till it covers a distance of 25 meter will be:
(A) +200 J (B) – 200J (C) + 300J (D) – 300J
7. The power due to net force on block at t = 3 sec. is :
(A) 100 watts (B) 200 watts (C) 300 watts (D) 400 watts
8. The Kinetic energy of block at t = 3 sec. is :
(A) 50 J (B) 100 J (C) 200 J (D) 300 J
DPPS FILE # 126

Topics : Wave on a String, Circular Motion, Rigid Body Dynamics, Friction, Center of Mass
1. A sine wave of wavelength  is travelling in a medium. The minimum distance between the two particles,
always having same speed, is -
(A) /4 (B) /3 (C) /2 (D) 
2. When a harmonic wave is propagating through a medium, the displacement ‘y’ of a particle of the medium is
2
represented by y = 10 sin (1800 t  x). The time period will be
5
1 1
(A) s (B) s (C) 36 s (D) 360 s
360 36
3. A transverse wave described by equation y = 0.02sin (x + 30t) (where x and t are in metres and
sec.respectively) is travelling along a wire of area of cross–section 1mm2 and density 8000kg/m3. What
is the tension in the string ?
(A) 20 N (B) 7.2 N (C) 30 N (D) 14.4 N
4. A ball tied to the end of the string swings in a vertical circle under the influence of gravity.
(A) When the string makes an angle 90º with the vertical, the tangential acceleration is zero and radial
acceleration is somewhere between minimum and maximum
(B) When the string makes an angle 90º with the vertical, the tangential acceleration is maximum and radial
acceleration is somewhere between maximum and minimum
(C) At no place in circular motion, tangential acceleration is equal to radial acceleration (in magnitude)
(D) When radial acceleration has its maximum value, the tangential acceleration is zero
5. A uniform rod of length 75 cm is hinged at one of its ends and is free to rotate in vertical plane. It is released
from rest when rod is horizontal. When the rod becomes vertical, it is breaks at mid–point and lower part now
moves freely. The distance of centre of lower part from hinge, when it again becomes vertical for the first time
is r. Find the approximate value of 2r.
6. In figure shown minimum mass of block B (at a particular angle between
horizontal mand string AP) to just slide the block A on rough horizontal
surface is as shown in figure.
1 If  is the coefficient of friction between
2
block A and ground then 2 will be :

 m2 
7. Body 1 experiences a perfectly elastic collision with a stationary Body 2. Determine the mass ratio  m  ,
 1
if after a head-on collision the particles fly apart in the opposite directions with equal speeds.
8. A sinusoidal wave propagates along a string. In figure (a) and (b) ' y ' represents displacement of particle
from the mean position. ' x ' & ' t ' have usual meanings. Find:
(a) wavelength, frequency and speed of the wave.

(b) maximum velocity and maximum acceleration of the particles
(c) the magnitude of slope of the string at x = 2 at t = 4 sec.
DPPS FILE # 127

Topics : Rigid Body Dynamics, Circular Motion, Friction, Projectile Motion, Work, Power and Energy

1. A rod of mass m is supported by string AB and friction due to wall. Then friction force on rod due to wall is :
(g = acceleration due to gravity).
mg
(A) mg upward (B) mg downward (C) upward (D) Data insufficient
2
2. A small block of mass m is released from rest from point A inside a smooth hemisphere bowl of radius R,
which is fixed on ground such that OA is horizontal. The ratio (x) of magnitude of centripetal force and normal
reaction on the block at any point B varies with  as :
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3. Two blocks of mass m and 2m are arranged on a wedge that is fixed on a horizontal surface. Friction
coefficient between the block and wedge are shown in figure. Find the magnitude of acceleration of two
blocks.
m Fixed 2m
µ=1 wedge smooth
53° 37°
DPPS FILE # 128

COMPREHENSION
A projectile is fired with speed v 0 at t = 0 on a planet named 'Increasing Gravity'. This planet is strange one,
in the sense that the acceleration due to gravity increases linearly with time t as g(t) = bt, where b is a
positive constant. 'Increasing Gravity'
4. If angle of projection with horizontal is  then the time of flight is :
6v 0 sin  2v 0 sin  3v 0 sin  2v 0

(A) (B) (C) (D)
b b b b
5. If angle of projection with horizontal is , then the maximum height attained is
1 (v 0 sin )3 / 2 4 ( v 0 sin )3 / 2 (2v 0 sin )3 / 2

3 b 3 b 3 b
6. At what angle with horizontal should the projectile be fired so that it travels the maximum horizontal distance:
1 1
(A)  = tan–1 (B)  = tan–1 (C)  = tan–1 2 (D)  = tan–1 2
2 2
7. The displacement-time graph of a body acted upon by some forces is shown in the figure. For this situation
match the entries of column I with the entries of column II.
s
B
C
A
O t
Column I Column II
(A) For OA, the total work done by all (p) always positive
forces together
(B) For OA, the work done by few of the (q) always negative
acting forces
(C) For AB, the work done by few of the (r) can be positive
acting forces
(D) For BC, the work done by few of the (s) can be zero
acting forces.
(t) can be negative
DPPS FILE # 129

Topics : Center of Mass, Relative Motion, Wave on a String, Friction

1. A carpenter has constructed a toy as shown in figure. If the density of the material of the sphere is 12 tirnes
that of cone, the y-coordinate of COM of toy from point O
9R
(A) 3R (B)
2
7R
(C) (D) 4R
2
2. An airplane flies between two cities separated by a distance D. Assume the wind blows directly from
one city to the other at a speed VA (as shown) and the speed of the airplane is Vo relative to the air. Find
the time taken by the airplane to make a round trip between the two cities (that is, to fly from city A to
city B and then back to City A) ?
2DVo DVo 2DVo DVo

(A) (B) (C) (D)
V02  VA2 V02  VA2 V02  VA2 V02  VA2
3. A travelling wave y = A sin (k x  t + ) passes from a heavier string to a lighter string. The reflected wave
has amplitude 0.5 A. The junction of the strings is at x = 0. The equation of the reflected wave is:
(A) y  = 0.5 A sin (k x +  t + ) (B) y  =  0.5 A sin (k x +  t + )
(C) y  =  0.5 A sin ( t  k x  ) (D) y  = 0.5 A sin (k x +  t  )
DPPS FILE # 130

4. 2 kg block is kept on 1 kg block as shown. The friction between 1 kg block and fixed surface is absent and
the coefficient of friction between 2 kg block and 1 kg block is µ = 0.1. A constant horizontal force F = 4 N is
applied on 1 kg block. If the work done by the friction on 1 kg block in 2 s is – X J, then find X.
Take g = 10 m/s2 .
COMPREHENSION
phase is 4m.

(A) 4000 (B) 400 (C) 25 (D) 250
2
(A)
10
2
(B)
50
2
(C)
5
x x
(A) y = 2 sin ( – 100 t + 30°) (B) y = 2 sin ( – 100 t + 120°)
2 2
x
2
DPPS FILE # 131

Topics :Circular Motion, Center of Mass, Rigid Body Dynamics, Work, Power and Energy, String Waves
1. A boy of mass 30 kg starts running from rest along a circular path of radius 6 m with constant tangential
acceleration of magnitude 2 m/s2. After 2 sec from start he feels that his shoes started slipping on
ground. The friction coefficient between his shoes and ground is : (Take g = 10 m/s2)
1 1
(A) (B)
2 3
1 1
(C) (D)
4 5
2. A small smooth disc of mass m and radius r moving with an initial velocity ‘v’ along the positive x-axis collided
with a big disc of mass 2m and radius 2r which was initially at rest with its centre at origin as shown in figure.
r v
2r
x
O
If the coefficient of restitution is 0 then velocity of larger disc after collision is
8v 2 2 8v 2 2
(A) î  v ĵ (B) î  v ĵ
27 27 27 27
v 2 2 8v
(C) î (D) v î  ĵ
3 27 27
3. A uniform rod AB of mass m and length l at rest on a smooth horizontal surface. An impulse P is applied to
the end B. The time taken by the rod to turn through a right angle is:
2ml ml
(A) (B)
P 3P
ml 2ml
(C) (D)
12P 3P
DPPS FILE # 132

4. In the figure shown the pulley is smooth. The spring and the string are light. The block ‘B’ slides down
from the top along the fixed rough wedge of inclination . Assuming that the block reaches the end of
the wedge. Find the speed of the block at the end. Take the coefficient of friction between the block and
the wedge to be µ and the spring was relaxed when the block was released from the top of the wedge.
COMPREHENSION
phase is 4m.

(A) 4000 (B) 400 (C) 25 (D) 250
2
(A)
10
2
(B)
50
2
(C)
5
x x
(A) y = 2 sin ( – 100 t + 30°) (B) y = 2 sin ( – 100 t + 120°)
2 2
x
2
DPPS FILE # 133

Topics : Wave on a String , Circular Motion, Relative Motion

1. Three waves producing displacement in the same direction of same frequency and of amplitudes 10m, 4m
and 7 m arrive at a point with successive phase difference of  / 2. The amplitude of the resultant wave is
(A) 2m (B) 7m (C) 5m (D) 1
2. A string fixed at both ends has consecutive standing wave modes for which the distances between adjacent
nodes are 18 cm and 16 cm respectively. The length of the string is -
(A) 144 cm (B) 152 cm (C) 176 cm (D) 200 cm
3. The sphere at P is given a downward velocity v 0 and swings in a vertical plane at the end of a rope of
 = 1m attached to a support at O. The rope breaks at angle 30° from horizontal, knowing that it can
withstand a maximum tension equal to three times the weight of the sphere. Then the value of v 0 will be
:
(g = 2 m/s2 )
g 2g
(A) m/s (B) m/s
2 3
3g g
(C) m/s (D) m/s
2 3
4. Initial velocity and acceleration of a particle are as shown in the figure.

Acceleration vector of particle remain constant. Then radius of curvature of
path of particle :
9
(A) is 9m initially (B) is m initially
3
9 3
(C) will have minimum value of m (D) will have minimum value m
8 8
COMPREHENSION
A van accelerates uniformly down an inclined hill going from rest to 30 m/s in 6 s. During the acceleration, a
toy of mass m = 0.1 kg hangs by a light string from the van's ceiling. The acceleration is such that string
remains perpendicular to the ceiling. (Take g = 10 m/s2)

5. The angle  of the incline is :
(A) 30° (B) 60° (C) 90° (D) 45°
6. The tension in the string is
3
(A) 1.0 N (B) 0.5 N (C) N (D) 3N
2
7. The friction force on the van is
(A) Zero (B) mg cos (C) mg sin (D) mg tan
DPPS FILE # 134

Topics : Wave on a String , Circular Motion

1. The particle displacement (in cm) in a stationary wave is given by y(x, t) = 2 sin (0.1  x) cos
(100  t). The distance between a node and the next antinode is :
(A) 2.5 cm (B) 7.5 cm (C) 5 cm (D) 10 cm
centre of the string is 4 mm. Minimum distance between the two points having amplitude 2 mm is:
(A) 1 m (B) 75 cm (C) 60 cm (D) 50 cm

3. A string is fixed at both ends. The tension in the string and density of the string are accurately known
but the length and the radius of cross section of the string are known with some error. If maximum
errors made in the measurement of length and radius are 1% and 0.5% respectively then what is the
maximum possible percentage error in the calculation of fundamental frequency of that string.
4. A mass m1 lies on fixed, smooth cylinder. An ideal cord attached to m1 passes over the cylinder and is
connected to mass m2 as shown in the figure.
(a) Find the value of  (shown in diagram) for which the system is in equilibrium
(b) Given m1 = 5 kg, m2 = 4kg . The system is released from rest when  = 30º. Find the magnitude of
acceleration of mass m1 just after the system is released.
COMPREHENSION
Figure shows a clamped metal string of length 30 cm and linear mass density 0.1 kg/m. which is taut
at a tension of 40 N. A small rider (piece of paper) is placed on string at point P as shown. An external
vibrating tuning fork is brought near this string and oscillations of rider are carefully observed.
5. At which of the following frequencies of turning fork, rider will not vibrate at all :
100
3
6. At which of the following frequencies the point P on string will have maximum oscillation amplitude
among all points on string :
200
3
7. Now if the tension in the string is made 160 N, at which of the following frequencies of turning fork, rider
will not vibrate at all
100
3
DPPS FILE # 135
Topics : Center of Mass, Wave on a String ,Friction

1. A loaded spring gun, initially at rest on a horizontal frictionless surface fires a marble of mass m at an
angle of elevation . The mass of the gun is M, that of the marble is m and the muzzle velocity of the
marble is v 0, then velocity of the gun just after the firing is :
m v0 m v 0 cos m v 0 cos m v 0 cos2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
M M Mm Mm
2. Equation of a standing wave is generally expressed as y = 2A sint coskx. In the equation, quantity /
k represents
(A) the transverse speed of the particles of the string.
(B) the speed of either of the component waves.
(C) the speed of the standing wave.
(D) a quantity that is independent of the properties of the string.
3. A string 1m long fixed at one end is made to oscillate by a 300Hz vibrator attached to its other end. The string
vibrates in 3 loops. The speed of transverse waves in the string is equal to
(A) 100 m/s (B) 200 m/s (C) 300 m/s (D) 400 m/s
4. Which of the following combinations can give standing wave.

(A) y1 = A sin2 (t  kx); y2 =  A sin2 (t + kx)
(B) y1 = A sin (kx t); y2 = A cos (t + kx)
(C) y1 = 2A cos2 (t  kx + ); y2 = A [sin 2 (t + kx)  1]
(D) y1 = A sin (kx  t + 30º); y2 = A cos (t + kx  60º).
5. The vibrations of a string of length 600 cm fixed at both ends are represented by the equation
 x 
y = 4 sin    cos (96  t)
 15 
where x and y are in cm and t in seconds.
(A) The maximum displacement of a particle at x = 5 cm is 2 3 cm .
(B) The nodes located along the string are 15n where integer n varies from 0 to 40.
(C) The velocity of the particle at x = 7.5 cm at t = 0.25 sec is zero
(D) The equations of the component waves whose superposition gives the above wave are
 x   x 
2 sin 2   48 t  , 2 sin2   48t  
 30   30 
DPPS FILE # 136

6. In the figure shown calculate the angle of friction. The block does not slide. Take g = 10 m/s2.
7. Two blocks of masses 20 kg and 10 kg are kept or a rough horizontal floor. The coefficient of friction
between both blocks and floor is  = 0.2. The surface of contact of both blocks are smooth. Horizontal
forces of magnitude 20 N and 60 N are applied on both the blocks as shown in figure. Match the
statement in column-I with the statements in column-II.
F1=20N
20kg 10kg F2=60N
left
=0.2 right
rough horizontal floor
Column-I Column-II
(A) Frictional force acting on block of mass 10 kg (p) has magnitude 20 N
(B) Frictional force acting on block of mass 20 kg (q) has magnitude 40 N
(C) Normal reaction exerted by 20 kg block on 10 kg block (r) is zero
(D) Net force on system consisting of 10 kg block (s) is towards right (in horizontal
and 20 kg block direction).
DPPS FILE # 137

Topics : Work, Power and Energy, Wave on a String, Center of Mass, Projectile Motion
1. What is the minimum stopping distance for a vehicle of mass m moving with speed v along a level road.
If the coefficient of friction between the tyres and the road is .
v2 2v 2 v2
2g g g
2. The (x, y) coordinates of the corners of a square plate are (0, 0) (L, 0) (L, L) and (0, L). The edges of the plate
are clamped & transverse standing waves are set up in it. If u (x, y) denotes the displacement of the plate at
the point (x, y) at some instant of time, the possible expression for 'u' is : [ a = positive constant]
 x   y   x  y 
(A) a cos   cos   (B) a sin   sin  
 2L  2 L  L 2L
  x  2 y   2 x    y
(C) a sin   sin   (D) a cos   sin  
 L  L   L   L
3. A chord attached about an end to a vibrating fork divides it into 6 loops, when its tension is 36 N. The
tension at which it will vibrate in 4 loops is:
(A) 24 N (B) 36 N (C) 64 N (D) 81 N
4. A wire having a linear mass density 5.0  10 3 kg/m is stretched between two rigid supports with a
tension of 450 N. The wire resonates at a frequency of 420 Hz. The next higher frequency at which the
same wire resonates is 480 Hz. The length of the wire is
(A) 2.0 m (B) 2.1 m (C) 2.5 m (D) 3 m
5. Two men of masses 80 kg and 60 kg are standing on a wood plank of mass 100 kg, that has been
placed over a smooth surface. If both the men start moving toward each other with speeds 1 m/s and 2
m/s respectively then find the velocity of the plank by which it starts moving.
DPPS FILE # 138

COMPREHENSION
An observer having a gun observes a remotely controlled balloon. When he first noticed the balloon, it
was at an altitude of 800 m and moving vertically upward at a constant velocity of 5m/s. The horizontal
displacement of balloon from the observer is 1600 m . Shells fired from the gun have an initial velocity
of 400 m/s at a fixed angle θ (sin θ = 3/5 and cos θ = 4/5). The observer having gun waits (for some
time after observing the balloon) and fires so as to destroy the balloon. Assume g = 10m/s2. Neglect air
resistance.
6. The flight time of the shell before it strikes the balloon is

(A) 2sec (B) 5sec. (C) 10 sec (D) 15 sec
7. The altitude of the collision above ground level is

(A) 1250m (B) 1325m (C) 1075m (D) 1200m
8. After noticing the balloon, the time for which observer having gun waits before firing the shell is
DPPS FILE # 139

Topics : Work, Power and Energy, Friction, Wave on a String , Rigid Body Dynamics
1. A block of mass 1kg is pushed on a movable wedge of mass 2kg and height h = 30 cm with a velocity
u = 6m/sec. Before striking the wedge it travels 2 m on a rough horizontal portion. Velocity is just
sufficient for the block to reach the top of the wedge. Assuming all surfaces are smooth except the
given horizontal part and collision of block and wedge is jerkless, the friction coefficient of the rough
horizontal part is :
(A) 0.125 (B) 0.377 (C) 0.675 (D) 0.45

2. With reference to the figure shown, if the coefficient of friction at the surfaces is 0.42, then the force
required to pull out the 6.0 kg block with an acceleration of 1.50 m/s2 will be:
(A) 36 N (B) 24 N (C) 84 N (D) 51 N
3. A string of length ‘’ is fixed at both ends. It is vibrating in its 3rd overtone with maximum amplitude ‘a’. The

amplitude at a distance from one end is :
3
3a a
(A) a (B) 0 (C) (D)
2 2
4. What is the percentage change in the tension necessary in a sonometer of fixed length to produce a note
one octave lower (half of original frequency) than before
(A) 25% (B) 50% (C) 67% (D)75%
5. A rope, under tension of 200 N and fixed at both ends, oscillates in a second harmonic standing wave
 x 
pattern. The displacement of the rope is given by y = (0.10 m) sin   sin(12 t), where x = 0 at one end of
 3 
the rope, x is in meters and t is in seconds. Find the length of the rope in meters.
COMPREHENSION
A uniform bar of length 6 a & mass 8 m lies on a smooth horizontal
table. Two point masses m & 2 m moving in the same horizontal plane
with speeds 2 v andv respectively strike the bar as shown & stick to
the bar after collision.
6. Velocity of the centre of mass of the system is
v 2v
(A) (B) v (C) (D) Zero
2 3
7. Angular velocity of the rod about centre of mass of the system is
v v v v
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5a 15a 3a 10a
8. Total kinetic energy of the system, just after the collision is
3 3 3
(A) mv 2 (B) mv 2 (C) mv2 (D) 3 mv 2
5 25 15
DPPS FILE # 140

Topics : Simple Harmonic Motion, Sound Waves, Center of Mass, Circular motion, Kinetic Theory of
Gases & Heat
Single choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.1 to Q.5 (3 marks, 3 min.) [15,15]
1. Two pendulums differ in lengths by 22 cm. They oscillate at the same place so that one of them makes 30
oscillations and the other makes 36 oscillations during the same time.The lengths (in cm) of the pendulum
are :
(A) 72 and 50 (B) 60 and 38 (C) 50 and 28 (D) 80 and 58
2. Three waves of the same amplitude have frequencies (n – 1), n and (n + 1)Hz. They superpose on one
another to produce beats. The number of beats produced per second is :
(A) n (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 3n
3. A spherical ball of mass m1 collides head on with another ball of mass m2 at rest. The collision is elastic. The
fraction of kinetic energy lost by m1 is :
4m1m 2 m1 m2 m1m 2
(A) 2 (B) (C) (D)
(m1  m 2 ) m1  m 2 m1  m 2 (m1  m 2 ) 2
4. Two equal masses are connected by a spring satisfying Hooke's law and are placed on a frictionless table.
The spring is elongated a little and allowed to go. Let the angular frequency of oscillations be . Now one of
the masses is stopped. The square of the new angular frequency is :
2 2
(A) 2 (B) (C) (D) 22
2 3
5. When a compressible wave is sent towards bottom of sea from a stationary ship it is observed that its echo
is heard after 2s. If bulk modulus of elasticity of water is 2 × 109 N/m2 , mean temperature of water is 4° and
mean density of water is 1000 kg/m3, then depth of sea will be
(A) 1014 m (B) 1414 m (C) 2828 m (D) 3000 m
972
6. The speed of sound in a mixture of n1 = 2 moles of He, n2 = 2 moles of H2 at temperature T = K is
5
25
 × 10 m/s. Find . (Take R = J/mole-K)
3
7. Match the statements in column- with the statements in column-.

Column-I Column-II
(A) A tight string is fixed at both ends and (p) At the middle, antinode is formed
sustaining standing wave in odd harmonic
(B) A tight string is fixed at one end and (q) At the middle, node is formed
free at the other end in even harmonic
(C) Standing wave is formed in an open organ (r) At the middle, neither node nor
pipe. End correction is not negligible. antinode is formed
(D) Standing wave is formed in a closed (s) Phase difference between SHMs of any
organ pipe. End correction is not negligible. two particles will be either  or zero.
DPPS FILE # 141

Topics : String, Simple Harmonic Motion, Wave on a String, Rigid Body Dynamics, Sound Waves

1. When a particle oscillates in simple harmonic motion, both in potential energy and kinetic energy vary
sinusoidally with time. If  be the frequency of the motion of the particle, the frequency associated with the
kinetic energy is :
v
(A) 4 v (B) 2 v (C) v (D)
2
2. Two elastic waves move along the same direction in the same medium. The pressure amplitudes of both the
waves are equal, but the wavelength of the first wave is three times that of the second. If the average power
transmitted through unit area by the first wave is W 1 and that by the second is W 2, then.
(A) W 1 = W 2 (B) W 1 = 3W 2 (C) W 2 = 3W 1 (D) W 1 = 9W 2
3. A spring of certain length and having spring constant k is cut into two pieces of lengths in a ratio 1 : 2. The
spring constants of the two pieces are in a ratio :
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 4 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 2 : 1
4. Which of the following options is not correct :

(A) Intensity of the wave produced by a point source at any point is inversely proportional to square of the
distance from point source
(B) Power of the wave, produced by a point source, varies as inverse square of the distance from point source
(C) Intensity of the wave produced by line source at any point varies as inverse of the distance from line
source
(D) Amplitude of the wave produced by a point source at any point varies as inverse of the distance from point
source
5. The rate of change of angular momentum of a system of particles about the centre of mass is equal to the
sum of external torques about the centre of mass when the centre of mass is :
(A) Fixed with respect to an inertial frame.
(B) in linear acceleration
(C) in rotational motion.
(D) is in a translational motion.
6. A man standing in front of a mountain beats a drum at regular intervals. The druming rate is gradually
increased and he finds that the echo is not heard distinctly when the rate becomes 40 per minute.He then
moves towards mountain by 90 m and finds that echo is again not heard when drumming rate becomes 60
per minute. Find the ratio of distance between the mountain and the initial position of the man and the
distance by which he moved.
DPPS FILE # 142

7. Match the column:
(A) (p) Travelling wave is formed
Sinusoidal sound waves are continuously

sent from one end by a tuning fork and they are
reflected from a moving wall. Due to the
superposition of the incident waves and the
reflected waves.
(B) Equation of vibrating particles is (q) Standing wave is formed

y = A sin2(t – kx) + B cos2(kx – t)
+ C cos(kx + t) sin(t + kx)
(where A,B,C are constants and can have any value)
it is possible that
(C) (r) Beats are formed
A metal rod is fixed at one end and free at the

other end. The free end is hit once by a hammer
as shown. Then :
(D) Equation of vibrating particles is (s) Particles perform simple harmonic

motion
 x   x 
y = (1mm) sin100 t   cos  t
 330   330 
DPPS FILE # 143

Topics : Sound Waves, Sound , Work, Power and Energy, Center of Mass

1. The frequency of a man’s voice is 300 Hz and its wavelength is 1 meter. If the wavelength of a child’s voice is
1.5 m, then the frequency of the child’s voice is:
(A) 200 Hz (B) 150 Hz (C) 400 Hz (D) 350 Hz.
2. An engine is moving towards a tunnel with a constant speed.
To check its own velocity, the driver sends whistles twice at an intervel of 2 minutes. The sound moves
forward, gets reflected from the tunnel and again reaches to the driver. He listens two echoes of the sound,
at an intervel of 1 minute. If speed of sound is 300 m/sec, speed of the engine should be :
(A) 50 m/sec (B) 75 m/sec (C) 100 m/sec (D) 125 m/sec
3. The equation of displacement due to a sound wave is s = s0 sin2 ( t  k x). If the bulk modulus of the medium
is B, then the equation of pressure variation due to that sound is
(A) B k s0 sin (2  t  2 k x) (B)  B k s0 sin (2  t  2 k x)
2
(C) B k s0 cos ( t  k x) (D)  B k s0 cos2 ( t  k x)
4. Which of the following is/ are correct.
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
5. Propagation of a sound wave in a gas is quite close to :

(A) an isothermal process
(B) an adiabatic process
(C) an isobaric process
(D) a process that does not exhibit properties close to any of the three given in (A),(B),(C)
DPPS FILE # 144

6. A particle moves in one dimension in a conservation force field. The potential energy is depicted in the graph
below.
If the particle starts to move from rest from the point A, then
(A) the speed is zero at the point A and E.
(B) the acceleration vanished at the points A, B, C, D, E
(C) the acceleration vanished at the points B, C, D.
(D) the speed is maximum at the point D.
7. A railway carriage of mass Mc filled with sand of mass Ms moves along the rails. The carriage is given an
impulse and it starts with a velocity v 0. At the same time it is observed that the sand starts leaking through
a hole at the bottom of the carriage at a constant mass rate . Find the distance at which the carriage
becomes empty and the velocity attained by the carriage at that time. (Neglect the friction along the rails.)
DPPS FILE # 145

Topics : Elasticity and Plasticity

COMPREHENSION
ELASTICITY AND PLASTICITY
The property of a material body by virtue of which it regains its original configuration (i.e. shape and size)
when the external deforming force is removed is called elasticity. The property of the material body by virtue
of which it does not regain its original configuration when the external force is removed is called plasticity.
Deforming force : An external force applied to a body which changes its size or shape or both is called
deforming force.
Perfectly Elastic body : A body is said to be perfectly elastic if it completely regains its original form when
the deforming force is removed. Since no material can regain completely its original form so the concept of
perfectly elastic body is only an ideal concept. A quartz fiber is the nearest approach to the perfectly elastic
body.
Perfectly Plastic body : A body is said to be perfectly plastic if it does not regain its original form even
slightly when the deforming force is removed. Since every material partially regain its original form on the
removal of deforming force, so the concept of perfectly plastic body is only an ideal concept. Paraffin wax,
wet clay are the nearest approach to a perfectly plastic bodies.
Cause of Elasticity : In a solid, atoms and molecules are arranged in such a way that each molecule is
acted upon by the forces due to the neighbouring molecules. These forces are known as intermolecular
forces. When no deforming force is applied on the body, each molecule of the solid (i.e. body) is in its
equilibrium position and the inter molecular forces between the molecules of the solid are maximum.
On applying the deforming force on the body, the molecules either come closer or go far apart from each
other. As a result of this, the molecules are displaced from their equilibrium position. In other words,
intermolecular forces get changed and restoring forces are developed on the molecules. When the deforming
force is removed, these restoring forces bring the molecules of the solid to their respective equilibrium
positions and hence the solid (or the body) regains its original form.
STRESS
When deforming force is applied on the body then the equal restoring force in opposite direction is developed
inside the body. The restoring forces per unit area of the body is called stress.
restoring force F
stress = Area of the body  A
The unit of stress is N/m2 or Nm–2. There are three types of stress
1. Longitudinal or Normal stress
When object is one dimensional then force acting per unit area is called longitudinal stress.
It is of two types : (a) compressive stress (b) tensile stress
Examples :
(i) Consider a block of solid as shown in figure. Let a force F be applied to the face which has area A. Resolve

F into two components :
Fn = F sin  called normal force and Ft = F cos  called tangential force.
Fn F sin 
 Normal (tensile) stress = =
A A
DPPS FILE # 146

2. Tangential or shear stress
It is defined as the restoring force acting per unit area tangential to the surface of the body. Refer to shown in
figure above
Ft F cos 
Tangential (shear) stress = =
A A
The effect of stress is to produce distortion or a change in size, volume and shape
(i.e. configuration of the body).
STRAIN
The ratio of the change in configuration (i.e. shape, length or volume) to the original configuration of the body
is called strain
change in configuration
i.e. Strain,  =
original configuration
It has no unit
(i) Longitudinal strain : This type of strain is produced when the deforming force causes a change in length
of the body. It is defined as the ratio of the change in length to the original length of the body.
Consider a wire of length L : When the wire is stretched by a force F, then let the change in length of the wire
is L shown in the figure.
change in length L
 Longitudinal strain ,  = or Longitudinal strain =
original length L
HOOKE’S LAW AND MODULUS OF ELASTICITY

According to this law, within the elastic limit, stress is proportional to the strain.
i.e. stress  strain
stress
or stress = constant × strain or = Modulus of Elasticity..
strain
This constant is called modulus of elasticity.
Thus, modulus of elasticity is defined as the ratio of the stress to the strain.
Modulus of elasticity depends on the nature of the material of the body and is independent of its dimensions
(i.e. length, volume etc.).
Unit : The Sl unit of modulus of elasticity is Nm–2 or Pascal (Pa).
1. Young's modulus of elasticity
It is defined as the ratio of the normal stress to the longitudinal strain.
Longitudin al stress
i.e. Young's modulus (Y) =
Longitudin al strain
Normal stress = F/A,
Longitudinal strain = L/L
F/ A FL F
Y=    =
L / L AL AY
ELONGATION OF ROD UNDER IT’S SELF WEIGHT
Let rod is having self weight ‘W’, area of cross-section ‘A” and length ‘L’. Considering on element at a
distance ‘x’ from bottom.
W
then T  x
L
T.dx
elongation in ‘dx’ element =
Ay
DPPS FILE # 147

L L
Td x W xdy WL
Total elongation s  
0
Ay
 
0
LAy
=
2Ay
Note : One can do directly by considering total weight at C.M. and using effective length /2.
Illus. 1. One end of a wire 2 m long and 0.2 m2 in cross-section is fixed in a ceiling and a load of 4.8 kg is attached
to the free end. Find the extension of the wire. Young’s modulus of steel = 2.0 × 1011 N/m2. Take g = 10 m/
s2 .
Sol. We have
stress T/A
Y= =
strain  /L
with symbols having their usual meanings. The extension is
TL
=
AY
As the load is in equilibrium after the extension, the tension in the wire is equal to the weight of the load
= 4.8 kg × 10 m/s2 = 48 N.
(48 N) (2 m)
Thus,  = 4
(0.2  10 m 2 )  (2.0  1011N / m 2 )
= 2.4 × 10–5 m.
llus. 2.
Find out longitudinal stress and tangential stress on a fixed block shown in figure when a tangential force of
100 N magnitude is applied on the block.
100 N
30º
1m
2m
5m
100 sin 30º

Sol. Longitudinal or normal stress  l = = 5 N/m2
52
100 cos 30 º
Tangential stress  t = = 5 3N / m2
52
Illus. 3. Two blocks of masses 1 kg and 2 kg are connected by a metal wire going over a smooth pulley as shown in
figure. The breaking stress of the metal is 2 × 109 N/m2. What should be the minimum radius of the wire used
if it is not to break? Take g = 10 m/s2
Tension
Sol. The stress in the wire = Area of cross  sec tion . To avoid breaking, this stress should not exceed the
breaking stress.
Let the tension in the wire be T. The equations of motion of the two blocks are,
T – 10 N = (1 kg) a
and 20 N – T = (2 kg) a.
Eliminating a from these equations,
T = (40/3) N.
( 40 / 3)N
The stress = .
r 2
DPPS FILE # 148

If the minimum radius needed to avoid breaking is r,
N ( 40 / 3) N
2 × 109 = .
m 2  r2
Solving this, r = 4.6 × 10–5 m.
llus. 4. A rod of 1.5 m length and uniform density 104 kg/m3 is rotating at an angular velocity 400 rad/sec. about its
one end in a horizontal plane. Find out elongation in rod.
Given y = 2 × 1011 N/m2
w=400rad/sec.
2r r = 0.1m
1.5m
Sol. mass of shaded portion

m
m  (  x ) [where m = total mass =  A  ]

2   x  m x m 2 2
T = m    x  T ( – x) 2   T= ( – x2)
 2    2  2
 = 400 rod l  x 
1.5m 2 m 2   x
dm  x  2 
A B T+dT T T
x l-x l x
dx dx 2
 m 2   Tdx
 
this tension will be maximum at A  2  and minimum at ‘B’ (zero), elongation in element of width ‘dx’ = Ay
 
Total elengation

Tdx m 2 (  2  x 2 )
 =  Ay
 
0
2 Ay
dx

2
m  2 x3  m2  2 3 m2  2 A2  2
 = 2Ay   x    
 3  = 2Ay  3 3Ay 3 Ay
0
 2  3 10 4  ( 400 )  (1.5)3
 =  = 9 × 10–3 m = 9mm
3y 3  2  1011
llus. 5. Find out the elongation in block. If mass, area of cross-section and young modulus of block are m, A and y
respectively.
Sol.
F m
Acceleration, a= then T = ma where  m = x
m 
m F Fx
T= x =
 m 
Tdx
Elongation in element ‘dx’ =
Ay
DPPS FILE # 149

 
Tdx Fxdx F
total elongation,  = 
o
Ay d =  A y
o
=
2Ay
Note : -
In this problem, if friction is given between block and surface (µ = friction coefficient), and
Case : () F < µmg
() F > µmg
F
Then in both cases answer will be total elongation  =
2Ay
Now answer the follwing :
1. A wire alongates by 1.0 mm when a load W is hanged from it. If this wire goes over a pulley and two weights
W each are hung at the two ends, the elongation of the wire will be
(A) 0.5 m (B) 1.0 mm (C) 2.0 mm (D) 4.0 mm
2. The length of a metal wire is  1 when the tension in it is T1 and is  2 when the tension is T2. The natural
length of the wire is
1   2  1T2   2 T1  1T2   2 T1
(A) (B)  1 2 (C) T  T (D)
2 2 1 T2  T1
3. A heavy mass is attached to a thin wire and is whirled in a vertical circle. The wire is most likely to break
(A) when the mass is at the highest point
(B) when the mass is at the lowest point
(C) when the wire is horizontal
(D) at an angle of cos–1 (1/3) from the upward vertical
4. Two wires of equal length and cross-section area suspended as shown in
figure. Thier Young's modulus are Y1 and Y2 respectively. The equivalent
Young's modulus will be
Y1  Y2 Y1Y2
(A) Y1 + Y2 (B) (C) Y  Y (D) Y1 Y2
2 1 2
5. A steel wire and a copper wire of equal length and equal cross-sectional area are joined end to end and the
combination is subjected to a tension. Find the ratio of (a) the stresses developed in the two wires and (b)
the strains developed. Y of steel = 2 × 1011 N/m2. Y of copper = 1.3 × 1011 N/m2.
6. A steel rod of cross-sectional area 4 cm2 and length 2 m shrinks by 0.1 cm as the temperature decreases
in night. If the rod is clamped at both ends during the day hours, find the tension developed in it during night
hours. Young’s modulus of steel = 1.9 × 1011 N/m2.
7. Consider the situation shown in figure. The force F is equal to the m2g/2.
If the area of cross-section of the string is A and its Young’s modulus Y,
find the strain
developed in it. The string is light and there is no friction anywhere.
DPPS FILE # 150

Topic : Variation of Strain with Stress

COMPREHENSION
VARIATION OF STRAIN WITH STRESS
When a wire is stretched by a load, it is seen that for small value of load, the extension produced in the wire
is proportional to the load. On removing the load, the wire returns to its original length. The wire regains its
original dimensions only when load applied is less or equal to a certain limit. This limit is called elastic limit.
Thus, elastic limit is the maximum stress on whose removal, the bodies regain their original dimensions. In
shown figure, this type of behavior is represented by OB portion of the graph. Till A the stress is proportional
to strain and from A to B if deforming forces are removed then the wire comes to its original length but here
stress is not proportional to strain.
C D
B E OA  Limit of Proportionality
OB  Elastic limit
A
Strees
C  Yield Point
CD  Plastic behaviour
D  Ultimate point
O Strain DE  Fracture
As we go beyond the point B, then even for a very small increase in stress, the strain produced is very large.
This type of behaviour is observed around point C and at this stage the wire begins to flow like a viscous fluid.
The point C is called yield point. If the stress is further increased, then the wire breaks off at a point D called
the breaking point. The stress corresponding to this point is called breaking stress or tensile strength of the
material of the wire. A material for which the plastic range CD is relatively high is called ductile material.
These materials get permanently deformed before breaking. The materials for which plastic range is relatively
small are called brittle materials. These materials break as soon as elastic limit is crossed.
Analogy of Rod as a spring
stress F
y=  y=
strain A 
Ay
or F= 

Ay
= constant, depends on type of material and geometry of rod. F = k

Ay
where k = = equivalent spring constant.

for the system of rods shown in figure (a), the replaced spring system is shown in figure (b) two spring in
series]. Figure (c) represents equivalent spring system.
Figure (d) represents another combination of rods and their replaced spring system.
DPPS FILE # 151

llus. 1.
A mass ‘m’ is attached with rods as shown in figure. This mass is slightly stretched and released whether
the motion of mass is S.H.M., if yes then find out the time period.
k1k 2 m m(k1  k 2 )
Sol. keq = k  k T = 2 k eq = 2 k1k 2
1 2
A1y1 A 2y2
where k1 = and k2 =
1 2
ELASTIC POTENTIAL ENERGY STORED IN A STRETCHED WIRE OR IN A ROD
Strain energy stored in equivalent spring
1 2
U= kx
2
2 2 2
F Ay 1 Ay F  1 F 
where x= , k= U= 2 2 = .
Ay  2  A y 2 Ay
equation can be re-arranged
1 F2 A
U= × [A = volume of rod, F/A = stress]
2 A 2 y
1 (stress )2
U= × volume
2 y
1 F F F
again, U= × Ay × A  [ Strain = Ay ]
2 A
1
U= stress × strain × volume
2
2
1 F
again, U= 2 2 Ay
2 A y
1
U = y (strain)2 × volume
2
strain energy 1 (stress )2 1 1
strain energy density = =  y(strain)2 = stress × strain
volume 2 y 2 2
llus. 2.
A ball of mass ‘m’ drops from a height ‘h’, which sticks to hanger after
striking. Neglect over turning, find out the maximum extension in rod.
Asumme rod and hanger is massless.
DPPS FILE # 152

Sol. Applying energy conservation
1 k1k 2 x 2
mg (h + x ) =
2 k1  k 2
A1y1 A 2y2
where k1 = 1
k2 = 2
A 1A 2 y1y 2
& K eq 
A1y1 2  A 2 y1 1
keqx2 – 2mgx – 2mgh = 0
2mg  4m 2 g2  8mghk eq mg m 2 g2 2mgh

x= xmax =  
2k eq k eq k 2eq k eq
BY S.H.M.
k eq
w v =  a2  y2 keq
m
keq 2 2mgh m 2 g2
2gh = a  y 2   2 =a mg 2gh
m k eq k eq y =k
eq
equilibrium
a position
mg m 2 g2 2mgh
maxm extension =a+y= k + 
eq k eq k eq
1. If x longitudinal strain is produced in a wire of Young’s modulus y, then energy stored in the material of the
wire per unit volume is :
(A) yx2 (B) 2 yx2 (C) ½ y2x (D) ½ yx2
2*. A metal wire of length L is suspended vertically from a rigid support. When a bob of mass M is attached to
the lower end of wire, the elongation of the wire is  :
(A) The loss in gravitational potential energy of mass M is Mg
(B) The elastic potential energy stored in the wire is Mg
1
(C) The elastic potential energy stored in the wire is Mg
2
1
(D) Heat produced is loss of mechanical energy of system is Mg
2
3*. A metal wire of length L area of cross-section A and Young’s modulus Y is stretched by a variable force F
such that F is always slightly greater than the elastic force of resistance in the wire. When the elongation
of the wire is  :
YA 2
(A) the work done by F is
L
YA 2
(B) the work done by F is
2L
YA 2
(C) the elastic potential energy stored in the wire is
2L
(D) heat is produced during the elongation
4. Two wires of the same material and length but diameter in the ratio 1 : 2 are stretched by the same force.
The ratio of potential energy per unit volume for the two wires when stretched will be :
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 4 : 1 (D) 16 : 1
DPPS FILE # 153

5. The workdone in increasing the length of a one metre long wire of cross-sectional area 1 mm2 through 1 mm
will be (Y = 2 x 1011 Nm–2) :
(A) 0.1 J (B) 5 J (C) 10 J (D) 250 J
6. One end of a long metallic wire of length L is tied to the ceiling. The other end is tied to a massless spring
of spring constant k. A mass m hangs freely from the free end of the spring. The area of cross-section and
the Young modulus of the wire are A and Y respectively. If the mass is slightly pulled down and released, it
will oscillate with a time period T equal to :
m m (Y A  k L )
(A) 2  (B) 2 
k YAk
m YA mL
(C) 2  (D) 2 
kL YA
7. In the figure shown the strain versus stress graph for two values of young's modulus?
(i) which material is more ductile ? Explain.

(ii) Which material is more brittle? Explain.
(iii) Which material is stronger? Explain.
DPPS FILE # 154

Topic : Viscosity
COMPREHENSION
VISCOSITY
When a solid body slides over another solid body, a frictional-force begins to act between them. This force
opposes the relative motion of the bodies. Similarly, when a layer of a liquid slides over another layer of the
same liquid, a frictional-force acts between them which opposes the relative motion between the layers. This
force is called 'internal frictional-force'.
Suppose a liquid is flowing in streamlined motion on a fixed horizontal surface AB (Fig.). The layer of the
liquid which is in contact with the surface is at rest due to adhesive forces between the liquid and the surface,
while the velocity of other layers increases with distance from the fixed surface. In the Fig., the lengths of the
arrows represent the increasing velocity of the layers. Thus there is a relative motion between adjacent
layers of the liquid. Let us consider three parallel layers a, b and c. Their velocities are in the increasing order.
The layer a tends to retard the layer b, while b tends to retard c.
Thus each layer tends to decrease the velocity of the layer above it. Similarly, each layer tends to increase
the velocity of the layer below it. This means that in between any two layers of the liquid, internal tangential
forces act which try to destroy the relative motion between the layers. These forces are called 'viscous
forces'. If the flow of the liquid is to be maintained, an external force must be applied to overcome the
dragging viscous forces. In the absence of the external force, the viscous forces would soon bring the liquid
to rest. The property of the liquid by virtue of which it opposes the relative motion between its
adjacent layers is known as 'viscosity’.
Maximum Velocity Layer
c
b
a
The property of viscosity is seen in the following examples :
A B
Zero Horizontal
Velocity Layer Plane
(i) A stirred liquid, when left, comes to rest on account of viscosity. Thicker liquids like honey, coaltar,
glycerine, etc. have a larger viscosity than thinner ones like water. If we pour coaltar and water on a
table, the coaltar will stop soon while the water will flow upto quite a large distance.
(ii) If we pour water and honey in separate funnels, water comes out readily from the hole in the funnel
while honey takes enough time to do so. This is because honey is much more viscous than water.
As honey tends to flow down under gravity, the relative motion between its layers is opposed strongly.
(iii) We can walk fast in air, but not in water. The reason is again viscosity which is very small for air but
comparatively much larger for water.
Viscosity comes into play only when there is a relative motion between the layers of the same
material. This is why it does not act in solids.
VELOCITY GRADIENT AND COEFFICIENT OF VISCOSITY
The property of a liquid by virtue of which an opposing force (internal friction) comes into play whenever there
is a relative motion between the different layers of the liquid is called viscosity. Consider a flow of a liquid over
the horizontal solid surface as shown in fig. Let us consider two layers AB and CD moving with velocities
  
v and v + d v at a distance x and (x + dx) respectively from the fixed solid surface.
According to Newton, the viscous drag or back ward force (F) between these layers depends.
(i) directly proportional to the area (A) of the layer and (ii) directly proportional to the velocity gradient
 dv 
  between the layers.
 dx 
dv dv
i.e. F A or F   A ...(1)
dx dx
DPPS FILE # 155

 is called Coefficient of viscosity. Negative sign shows that
the direction of viscous drag (F) is just opposite to the direction of
the motion of the liquid.
SIMILARITIES AND DIFFERENCES BETWEEN VISCOSITY AND SOLID FRICTION
Similarities
Viscosity and solid friction are similar as
1. Both oppose relative motion. Whereas viscosity opposes the relative motion between two adjacent liquid
layers, solid friction opposes the relative motion between two solid layers.
2. Both come into play, whenever there is relative motion between layers of liquid or solid surfaces as the case
may be.
3. Both are due to molecular attractions.
Differences between them 
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Viscosity Solid Friction
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
(i) Viscosity (or viscous drag) between layers of (i) Friction between two solids is independent of
liquid is directly proportional to the area of the area of solid surfaces in contact.
the liquid layers.
(ii) Viscous drag is proportional to the relative (ii) Friction is independent of the relative
velocity between two layers of liquid. velocity between two surfaces.
(iii) Viscous drag is independent of normal (iii) Friction is directly proportional to the
reaction between two layers of liquid. normal reaction between two surfaces in
contact.
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON THE VISCOSITY
The viscosity of liquids decrease with increase in temperature and increase with the decrease in temperature.
1
That is,  . On the other hand, the value of viscosity of gases increases with the increase in temperature
T
and vice-versa. That is,  T (This takes into account the diffusion of the gases).
SOME APPLICATIONS OF VISCOSITY
Knowledge of viscosity of various liquids and gases have been put to use in daily life. Some applications of
its knowledge are discussed as under 
1. As the viscosity of liquids vary with temperature, proper choice of lubricant is made depending upon season.
Coaltar used for making of roads is heated to reduce its viscosity so that it can be easily laid on the road.
2. Liquids of high viscosity are used in shock absorbers and buffers at railway stations.
3. The phenomenon of viscosity of air and liquid is used to damp the motion of some instruments like galvanometer
UNITS OF COEFFICIENT OF VISCOSITY
F
From the above formula, we have  
A( v x / z )
[MLT 2 ] [MLT 2 ]
 dimensions of  =   [ML1T 1 ]
[L2 ][LT 1 / L] [L2 T 1 ]
Its unit is kg/(meter-second)
In C.G.S. system, the unit of coefficient of viscosity is dyne s cm –2 and is called poise. In SI the unit of
coefficient of viscosity is N sm–2 and is called decapoise.
1 decapoise = 1 N sm–2 = (105 dyne) × s × (102 cm)–2 = 10 dyne s cm–2 = 10 poise
llus. 1.
A man is rowing a boat of mass m with a constant velocity ‘v 0’ in a river the contact area of boat is ‘A’ and
coefficient of viscosity is . The depth of river is ‘D’. Find the force required to row the boat. Assume that
velocity gradient is constant.
Sol. Fext – FV = m ares ares
Base
As boat moves with constant velocity ares = 0 Area A Fext
Fext = FV v0
FV
dv dv v0  0 v0 D
But FV =  A , but = =
dz dz D D
Av 0
then Fext = FV =
D
DPPS FILE # 156

llus. 2.
A cubical block (of side 2m) of mass20 kg slides on inclined plane lubricated with
the oil of viscosity  = 10–1 poise with constant velocity of 10 m/sec. (g = 10 m/
sec2)
find out the thickness of layer of liquid. (10–1 poise = 10–2 Nsm2)
dv dv v
Sol. F = F =  A = mg sin  =
dz dz h
10
20 × 10 × sin 30° =  × 4 ×
h
40  10 2
h= – [ = 10–1 poise = 10–2 N-sec-m–2 ]
100
= 4 × 10–3 m = 4 mm
Now Answer the questions below :
1. A metal square plate of 10 cm side rests on a 2 mm thick caster oil layer. Calculate the horizontal force
needed to move the plate with speed 3 cm s–1 : (Coefficient of viscosity of caster oil is 15 poise.)
(A) 2.25 × 10–2 N (B*) 2.25 × 10–1 N (C) 2.25 × 10–3 N (D) 2.25 × 10–4 N
2. A man starts rowing his stationary cuboidal boat of base area A = 10m2. The driving force on the boat due to
rowing is 100 N in the direction of motion. Find the maximum velocity that the boat can achieve. Also find the
time in which he will attain half of this maximum velocity. [Take coefficient of viscosity of water = 15 poise]
The depth of the lake is 10 m and the combined mass of man and the boat to be 150 kg. (u = 0, velocity
gradient uniform)
3. As per the shown figure the central solid cylinder starts with initial angular velocity 0. Find out the time after
which the angular velocity becomes half. (Velocity gradient uniform)
DPPS FILE # 157

Topic : Stokes' Law

COMPREHENSION
STOKES' LAW
Stokes proved that the viscous drag (F) on a spherical body of radius r moving with relative velocity v in a
fluid of viscosity  is given by F = 6 r v. This force is opposite to relative velocity. This is called Stokes’ law.
The work done by the force is negative and it dissipates in the form of heat.
TERMINAL VELOCITY
When a body is dropped in a viscous fluid, it first accelerates and then its acceleration becomes zero and it
attains a constant velocity called terminal velocity.
Calculation of Terminal Velocity

Let us consider a small ball, whose radius is r and density is , falling freely in a liquid (or gas) whose density
is  and coefficient of viscosity  . When it attains a terminal velocity v. It is subjected to two forces :
(i) effective force acting downward 6rv

4 3
= V (–) g = r ( – )g, v
3
(ii) viscous force acting upward = 6   rv..
4/3r3 (–) g
Since the ball is moving with a constant velocity v i.e., there is no acceleration in it, the net force acting on
it must be zero. That is
4 2 r 2 (  )g
6  rv = p r3 ( – ) g or v=
3 9 
Thus, terminal velocity of the ball is directly proportional to the square of its radius
Important point
Air bubble in water always goes up. It is because density of air () is less than the density of water (). So
the terminal velocity for air bubble is Negative, which implies that the air bubble will go up. Positive terminal
velocity means the body will fall down.
Applications of Stokes' Formula
(i) In determining the Electronic Charge by Millikan's Experiment : Stokes' formula is used in
Millikan's method for determining the electronic charge. In this method the formula is applied for
finding out the radii of small oil-drops by measuring their terminal velocity in air.
(ii) Velocity of Rain Drops : Rain drops are formed by the condensation of water vapour on dust
particles. When they fall under gravity, their motion is opposed by the viscous drag in air. As the
velocity of their fall increases, the viscous drag also increases and finally becomes equal to the
effective force of gravity. The drops then attain a (constant) terminal velocity which is directly propor-
tional to the square of the radius of the drops. In the beginning the raindrops are very small in size
and so they fall with such a small velocity that they appear floating in the sky as cloud. As they grow
in size by further condensation, then they reach the earth with appreciable velocity,
DPPS FILE # 158

(iii) Parachute : When a soldier with a parachute jumps from a flying
aeroplane, he descends very slowly in air.
In the beginning the soldier falls with gravity acceleration g, but soon the acceleration goes on decreasing
rapidly until in parachute is fully opened. Therefore, in the beginning the speed of the falling soldier increases
somewhat rapidly but then very slowly. Due to the viscosity of air the acceleration of the soldier becomes
ultimately zero and the soldier then falls with a constant terminal speed. In Fig graph is shown between the
speed of the falling soldier and time.
llus. 1. A spherical ball is moving with terminal velocity inside a liquid. Determine the relationship of rate of heat loss
with the radius of ball. 2
 2 gr 2 (0    ) 
Sol. Rate of heat loss = power = F × v = 6   r v × v = 6   r v = 6p  r 
2 
 9  
Rate of heat loss  r5
llus. 2. A drop of water of radius 0.0015 mm is falling in air. If the coefficient of viscosity of air is
1.8 × 10–5 kg /(m-s), what will be the terminal velocity of the drop? (density of water = 1.0 × 103 kg/m2 and g
= 9.8 N/kg.) Density of air can be neglected.
Sol. By Stokes' law , the terminal velocity of a water drop of radius r is given by
2 r 2 (   ) g
=
9 
where  is the density of water,  is the density of air and  the coefficient of viscosity of air. Here  is neg-
ligible and r = 0.0015 mm = 1.5 × 10–3 mm = 1.5 × 10–6 m. Substituting the values :
2 (1.5  10 6 ) 2  (1.0  10 3 )  9.8

= × = 2.72 × 10–4 m/s
9 1.8  10 5
Now answer the follwing :
1. A ball bearing of radius of 3 mm made of iron of density 7.85 g cm–3 is allowed to fall through a long column
of glycerine of density 1.25 g cm–3. It is found to attain a terminal velocity of 2.20 cm s–1. Determine the
viscosity of glycerine in centipoise. (Take g = 10 m/s2)
2. An air bubble of 1 cm radius is rising at a steady rate of 0.5 cm s–1 through a liquid of density 0.81 gcm–3.
Calculate the coefficient of viscosity of the liquid. Neglect the density of air.(Take g = 10 m/s2)
3. A metallic sphere of radius 1.0 × 10–3 m and density 1.0 × 104 kg/m3 enters a tank of water, after a free fall
through a distance of h in the earth’s gravitational field. If its velocity remains unchanged after entering water,
determine the value of h. Given : coefficient of viscosity of water = 1.0 × 10–3 N-s/m2, g = 10 m/s2 and density of water
= 1.0 × 103 kg/m3.
DPPS FILE # 159

1. (C) 2. (C) 3. (C) 4. (A) 1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (C) 5. (D)
5. (C) 6. (ABD) 7. (B) 8. (B) 6. (B,D,E) 7. 4 units 8. (A) 9. (B)
9. (D) 10. (C) 10. (B)

1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (C) 4. 4x 3 + 6x 1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (C) 4. (D) 5. (C)
6. (A) 7. (B) 8. (B) 9. (A), (B), (C)
2 dy 1 3 10. (5, 10)
5. 5 + 21x 2 6. 7. = 1 + 2x – 2  4 .
5 dx x x
2
DPP NO. - 10
dy
8. = 2x – 3 . 9. (B) 10. (A) 1. (C) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (B) 5. (A)
dx x
6. (A,B,C) 7. (A,B,C) 8. 10 cm s–1
DPP NO. - 3
DPP NO. - 11
1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (C) 5. (B)
1. (C) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (C) 5. (D)
6. (A) 7. (B)
6. (C,D) 7. (C) 8. (B) 9. (D)
dy 18 32
8. = 8(2x +3)3 – 14(7x – 1)–  . DPP NO. - 12
dx (3x  1)4 (4 x  3)3
1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (B) 4. (A) 5. (C)
9. (A) 10. (B) 6. (C) 7. 212.5 m. 8. Only graph (iii) is possible.

1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (B) 4. (B) 1. (D) 2. (D) 3. (B) 4. (A) 5. (C)
5. (B) 6. (A) 7. (C) 8. (A), (B) 6. (B) 7. (B) 8. (B)
c2
9. 10. sin 4x + C DPP NO. - 14
4
1. (A) 2. (A) 3. (B) 4. (B) 5. (D)
DPP NO. - 5 6. (A) 7. (B)(C) 8. (A,B,D) 9. (A,B)
1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (A) 10. 26 m.
5. 12250 m 6. 4x3 + 6x2 + C
7. (C) 8. (D) 9. (B) DPP NO. - 15
1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (D) 4. (D) 5. (D)
DPP NO. - 6 6. (D) 7. (A) 8. (B)
1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (C) 4. (D)
DPP NO. - 16
3
1 (2t  4)
5.  cos4t + t 2 + C. 6. = – +C 1. (C) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (D) 5. (B)
4 6
6. (C) 7. 9
1 125
7. log (6t – 1) + C 8. (A) 9. (A) 8. h = m above point of projection
6 3
10. (A) 11. (C) 9. (A) r (B) p (C) s (D) q

1. (D) 2. (D) 3. (A) 4. (C) 5. 5 1. (D) 2. (D) 3. (A) 4. (D) 5. (B)
6. 2 7. (C) 8. (B) 9. (B)
6. (A) 7. (A), (B) 8. ( ) 9. ( ).
DPPS FILE # 160

1. (C) 2. (A) 3. (A) 4. (A) 1. (D) 2. (A) (B) (D) 3. 0.5 sec.
5. (A),(D) 6. (B), (D) 7. 0.5 m/s. 4. (C) 5. (C) 6. (A)
8. (A) s (B) p (C) r (D) q
DPP NO. - 28
DPP NO. - 19
1._ (C) 2._ (A) 3. (B) 4. (B)
1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (A) 4. (A) 5. (A) (B) (C) (D) 6. (A) (B) (C)
5. t = (loge2) sec 6. (A) 7. (B) 8. (C) 2mg
7. (a) T = mg, x = ;
K
DPP NO. - 20
mg
1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (C) 4. (A) 5. (D) (b) T1 = mg , T2 = 2mg, x = ;
K
2 mg
6. (B) 7. t = 8. 52 m (c) T1 = mg, T2 = 2mg, x = ;
a K
DPP NO. - 21 (d) T = mg, x =

2mg
; (e) T = 2mg, x =
mg
K K
1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (D) 5. (A)
6. (A) 7. (D) 8. (C)
DPP NO. - 29
DPP NO. - 22 
1. (A) 2. (D) 3. (B) 4. =
1. (A) 2. (A) 3. (A) 4. (D) 5. (A) 4
6. (C) 7. (A), (B), (C) 8. (B), (C) 5. (i) yes (ii) depends upon path (iii) yes (iv) no
(v) limiting friction needs to be overcome to make
body move
DPP NO. - 23 (vi) N is larger
1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (D) 4. (B) 5. (A) 6. (B) 7. (C) 8. (B)
6. (A,D)
, DPP NO. - 30
DPP NO. - 24 1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (A) 4. (B) 5. (A)
6. (B) 7. (C)
1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (D) 4. (B) 5. (A)
6. (D) 7. (i) False (ii) True DPP NO. - 31
8. (i) 24 N (ii) 108 N
1. (A) 2. (A) 3. (C) 4. (D) 5. (B)
DPP NO. - 25 6. (E) 7. (A)(D)
1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (B) DPP NO. - 32

m1 m 2 g sin(   ) 1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (B) 5. (C)
4. (A) 5. T = m cos   m cos  6. (A) 6. (D) 7. (B) 8. (A) (B)
1 2
7. (B) 8. (D) DPP NO. - 33

DPP NO. - 26 1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (C) 4. (A) (D)
1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (C) 4. (A) 5. (C)

5. (B) (D) 6. (B)(D) 7. (a) t = 4 3g
mg
6. (A) (B) (D) 7. F = 2
 m 
1    2  5
 m  M (b) SA = 4V 3g  3  , SB = 4V 3g  3  ,
d 1
8. =
dt 1 t2
DPPS FILE # 161

8. (a) T1 = 0 ; T2 = 0; T3 = 0 ; a = g
(b) T1 = 0 ; T2 = 0; T3 = 0 ; a = g
DPP NO. - 41
(c) T1 = 0 ; T2 = 0; T3 = 0 ; a = g 1. (C) 2. (D) 3. (B)
4. (A) 5. (B) 6. (B)
DPP NO. - 34 7. (A), (D) 8. (D) 9. (A)
10. (C)
1. (D) 2. (D) 3. (B) 4. (D)
5.(B), (C), (D) 6. (A) 7. (D) 8. (B)
DPP NO. - 42
DPP NO. - 35 1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (B)
1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. 2 sec. 4. (B) 5. (D) 6. (B)
5. 5 6. (C) 7. (A) 8. (B)
2 R
7. (a) (– 3 î + 4 ĵ ) m/s2
DPP NO. - 36 20T2
1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (B) R

5.(A) (D) (b) m/s2
2 T2
6. (10 î  10k̂ ) rain appears to come 45° with î
DPP NO. - 43
7. (B) 8. (D)
1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (C)
DPP NO. - 37
48
1. (A) 2. (A) 3. (B) 4. (A) 5. (A) 4. (C) 5. 20 m 6. u = g
5
 g 2  7. (A) 8. (A) 9. (C)
 
6. (A), (B), (D) 7. w =  a    2  (M / m)  10. (A) 11. (A)
 
8. x = [3(a – mg)/b]½ DPP NO. - 44
DPP NO. - 38 1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (D)
4. (D) 5. (A) (B) (C)
1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (A), (C) 4. 10m/s.
6. (D) 7. (C) 8. (A)
5. 27 N 6. (A) 7. (A) 8. (A)
9. (A) s (B) q (C) r (D) p

2
a
1. (A) 2. – 1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (A)
2
4. (C) 5. (B) 6. (B)
3. wOAC = 8 J, wOBC = 2 J; wODC = 19/3 J, No
7. A = mg (h + k  ) 8. (B)
4. (A) 5. (B) 6. (C)
9. (A) 10. (D)
7. (A) s (B) r (C) r (D) r
DPP NO. - 46
DPP NO. - 40 1. (C) 2. (C) 3. (A)
1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (D) 5. 140 N. 6. (1/7, 23/14)
7. (A) p,q (B) r, s (C) p,q,s (D) p,q,s
4. (A) (C) 5. (i) 10 3 î  5 ĵ ,
DPP NO. - 47

1 3 
(ii) cos  2  1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (B)
 13 
40
6. (C) 7. (A) 8. (C) 4. (D) 5. sec. 6. 300
7
7. (A) r (B) q,s (C) p (D) q,r 8. (B)
DPPS FILE # 162

1. (C) 2. (D) 3. (A) 1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (A) 4. (B)
4. F = 2mg 5. (A) 6. (A) 5. (A), (C) 6. (A), (C) 7. (C)
7. (B) 8. (A) q,r (B) p,s (C) p,s (D) p,s DPP NO. - 57
DPP NO. - 49 1. (C) 2. (A) 3. (B) 4. (C)
5. (B), (C), (D) 6. (A), (D)
1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (C)
4. (A), (B) 5. (A), (C) mg r
7. T = 2
1/ 3
R  r2
2
 K mg 
6. (a) 5k > 4s , (b) x=  
 K  DPP NO. - 58
7. (A), (D) 8. (B) 9. (C), (D) 1. (D) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (A)
DPP NO. - 50 5. (a) AB =

1
mR2
4
1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (B)
2
4. (A) 5. (A) 6. (B) 1  4R 
7. (B) 8. (C) 9. (C) (b) CD = mR2 – m   by parallel axis Theorem
2  3 
DPP NO. - 51 2

6. cos–1  3  7. 13   3 Ans.
 
1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (C)
4 (D) 5. (A) 6. (B) 57
7. R/3 8. (A) q (B) q (C) r (D) q 8.  = MR2 9. (D)
140

1. (C) 2. (D) 3. (C) 1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (B)
4. (C) 5. (A), (C) 6. (A), (B), (C) 2mg  MgL
5. T = 6. (B) 7. (C)
1 2L sin 
7. k x02
4 8. (D)

1. (C) 2. (B), (C) 3. (A), (B), (C) 1. (A) 2. (A,B,D) 3. (B,D) 4. 13
5. (a) T = 225N, (b) F X = 225N, F Y = 300N
13  mv 2
4. 5. 6. (B) 7. (C) 8. (B)
4 3
6. (A) p (B) q (C) q, s (D) r
DPP NO. - 61
DPP NO. - 54 1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (B) 4. (C)
1. (A) 2. (D) 3. (A), (B), (C) 3

5. (2,0) 6. 7. (B) 8. (B)
4. Kinetic energy of m1 > initial mechanical energy of 2
system 9. (A)
5. 5 cm 6. (A) 7. (B) 8. (C)
DPP NO. - 62
DPP NO. - 55
mg mg
1. (B) 2. (D) 3. (B) 4. (A) 5. (C) 1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (B) 4.(a) 2 k (b)
2
6. (C) 7. (A) 8. (B)
5. (B) 6. (D) 7. (C)
8. A – s , B – p, C – q , D – r
DPPS FILE # 163

1. (C) 2. (C) 3. (B)(C)(D) 1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (A) 5. (C)
6. (A) 7. (A) (B) (C) (D)
5
4. (a) VP = V (b) V cosec 
4
DPP NO. - 71
9g 4w
5. (a)  (b)  6. (C) 7. (D)
1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (C) 4. (D) 5. (C)
7 7
8. (B) T
6. (A)(B) (C) 7. 2 8.
24
DPP NO. - 64
DPP NO. - 72
1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (A) (B) (C) (D)
4. 36 5. 48 N 6. (C) 7. (A) 8. (B) 1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (A) (B) (C) 4. (A) (B) (C)
5. (B) 6. (A) 7. (A)

1. (C) 2. (D) 3. (C) 4. (A)(B) (C)(D)
T
20 2g 1. (C) 2. (A) 3. 0 4. 5. (B)
5. a = or 6. (A) 7. (D) 8. (B) 24
7 7
6. (B) 7. (B)
DPP NO. - 66
DPP NO. - 74
1. (B) 2. (D) 3. (A)(B)(D) 4. 0 = 2/5
1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (B) (C) 4. (A) (B) (C)
5. (C) 6. (B) 7. (B)
10 25 25
5. 8 6. (a) Hz (b) cm (c) N , 91.7 N.
DPP NO. - 67  6 3
NL 2mg 1 k  M  m  ab
1. (E) 2. 3. (C) 4. (B) 7. (a) K  ; (b) (c)  
4 ba 2 M  m  ba  m
5. (D) 6. (C) 7. (A) 8. (C)
9. (B) 10. (C) DPP NO. - 75
DPP NO. - 68 1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (B) 4. (C) 5. (D)
6. (A) 7. (C) 8. (B)
1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (D) 4. (A), (B), (D)
5. (A), (B), (C) DPP NO. - 76
6. Since torque is not balanced, it will topple.
7. 300rad/sec., 150 rad/sec 1. (C) 2. (A) (B) (C) (D) 3. (C) (D)
4. (A) (B) (C) (D) 5. 3 6. (D)
DPP NO. - 69 7. (B) 8. (B)
1. (D) 2. (B) 3. (A) DPP NO. - 77

4. (a) 2g[R(1  cos )   sin ] 1. (C) 2. (A) 3. (B) 4. (B)(D) 5. 5
m2
   6. 3 7. =3 8. (a) 6m, 0.25 Hz, 1.5m/s
(b) 6 mg 1  cos   sin   m1
 R 
(c) The radius through the particle makes an angle (b) 1.5 mm/s,0.752 mm/s (c) 
cos–1 (2/3) with the vertical 5. 50/3 sec.
6. (B) 7. (C) 8. (A)
DPPS FILE # 164

1. (C) 2. (A) 3. Acceleration = 0 1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (B) 5. (B)
4. (A) 5. (C) 6. (B) 6. 90 7. (A) p,q,s (B) r,s (C) s (D) r,s
7. (A) – p ; (B) – r, s, t ; (C) – r, s, t ; (D) – r, s, t
DPP NO. - 87
DPP NO. - 79
1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (D) 4. (B)
1. (D) 2. (A) 3. (D) 4. 8 5. (B) 5. (A) (B) (C) (D) 6. 3
6. (C) 7. (D) 7. (A) – r ; (B) – p,q,s ; (C) – p ; (D) – r, p

1. (B) 2. (A) 3. (C) 1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (A) 4. (C) 5. (B)
2 Ms
2  1  h   6. (A)(C) 7. v = v 0 , S = V0
4. V = mgh – K   µmgh cot  
m  2  sin   

5. (B) 6. (C) 7. (D)
DPP NO. - 89
1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (B)
DPP NO. - 81
strain in copper wire 20
1. (C) 2. (A) 3. (C) 4. (A) (C) 5. (a) 1 (b) strain in steel wire
=
13
5. (A) 6. (C) 7. (A)
m 2 g (2m1  m 2 )
6. 3.8 × 104 N 7.
DPP NO. - 82 2AY(m1  m 2 )
m2 DPP NO. - 90
1. (C) 2. (A) 3. 1.5% 4. sin = m
1
1. (D) 2. (A) (C) (D) 3.(B) (C)
15 4. (D) 5. (A) 6. (B)
(b) m/s2 5. (C) 6. (D) 7. (C) 7. (i) A(from comprehension)
9
(ii) B (from comprehension)
DPP NO. - 83 (iii) A (A can bear more stress than B before fracture)
1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (B) 4. (A) (B) (C) (D)
1 DPP NO. - 91
5. (A) (B) (C) (D) 6.  = tan–1
2
200
7. (A) p,s (B) p,s (C) q,s (D) r 1. (B) 2. m/s, t = 100 n2 seconds
3
DPP NO. - 84 m (R 2  R1 )n2
3. t=
1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (D) 4. (C) 4    R1
1 DPP NO. - 92
5.  m/sec. 6. (B) 7. (C)
6
8. (A) 1. 6000 2. 360 poise 3. 20 m
DPP NO. - 85
1. (C) 2. (D) 3. (C) 4. (D)
5. 06 m 6. (D) 7. (A)
DPPS FILE # 165

Physics DPPs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics DPPs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics DPPs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

2 Answer Key- Physics 160-165

(A) Acceleration of 'A' relative to ground is in negative y-direction

8. The acceleration of cylinder immediately after the external force is removed is

9. The speed of the cylinder when it reaches its equlibrium position is

(A) 2.0 m (B) 1.8 m (C) 1.5 m (D) 1.2 m

(A) 2 N, 6 N, 3.2 N (B) 2 N, 6 N, 0 N

(A) 1/2 mv2 (B) mv2 (C) Kmv (D) zero

(A) 5g/6 (B) 5g/3 (C) g/3 (D) 17 g/6

(A) NA = 2NB (B) NB = 3 N A

6. An ideal gas undergoes a cyclic process abcda which is shown by P

(A) monoatomic (B) diatomic

(A) 60º (B) 75º (C) 67.5º (D) none of these

(A) block A starts sliding on B at t = 5 seconds

6. The equation of the wave is

7. The speed of particle at x = 2 m and t = 1sec is

8. The instantaneous power transfer through x=2 m and t= 1.125 sec, is

(A) 0° (B) 30° (C) 45° (D) 60°

(A) 1.5 (B) 3 (C) 4.5 (D) 6

Type of Questions M.M., Min.

(A) 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 1 : 4

4. A virtual erect image in a concave mirror is represented, in the above figures, by

(A) (B) (C) (D)

5. A driving mirror on a car is never concave because :

7. If x 0 = 30 cm, then the distance of final image from pole is

8. If the slab is shifted parallel to itself by 3 cm then the final image

(B) A (q) Both W and U are negative

(C) B (r) W is positive whereas U is negative

(D) B (s) W is negative whereas U is positive

(A) OA (B) OB (C) OC (D) OD

(A) continuously decreases (B) continuously increases

(A) (B) (C) (D)

Type of Questions M.M., Min.

(A) 1: 1 (B) 2: 1 (C) 8: 3 (D) 1: 4

(A) 10 m (B) 12.5 m (C) 15 m (D) 20 m

(A) 2mm (B) 4mm (C) 8 mm (D) 6 mm

(A) 22° (B) 24° (C) 26° (D) 28°

8. For d = 20 cm, the distance of the image from the pole is

9. For d = 20 cm, The size of image is

5. A body of mass 'm' sliding down a movable inclined plane of mass 2 m,

(A) (B) (C) (D) none of these

(A) in portion 'AB' including point A and B

7. In a cyclic process, a gas is taken from state A to B via

(A) one plane mirror (B) one concave mirror

(A) 4 m/s (B) 2 m/s

4. Two wave functions in a medium along x direction are given by -

6. A thin uniform rod AB of mass ‘m’ translates with an acceleration ‘a’,

8. The absolute temperature T versus volume V for the given process is

(A) (B) (C) (D)

9. The maximum temperature of the gas during this process is

(A) 3gR (B) 4gR (C) 5gR (D) 5 . 5 gR

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(A) zero (B) 4 N (C) 4 2 N (D) 8 N

(A) increase (B) decrease

(A) At time t1 , it is going towards X m.

7. A 2 kg uniform cylinder is placed on a plank of mass 4 kg which in turn

3. A small coin of mass 40 g is placed on the horizontal surface of a rotating

(A) 8 J (B) 8J

5. Which of the following is/ are correct.